Home

Micro Lynx - (NI Broadcast Ltd)

1. Uem o POWER SUPPLY MIKO09B Figure Chapter 3 1 Power Supply Connection 1 Insert the Power Supply Unit DIN type connector into the socket marked POWER on the back of the Micro Lynx as shown in Figure 3 1 Connect the Power Supply IEC cord to the AC supply 2 Press the Power Switch on the System Unit front panel 3 If the Power ON LED on the front panel lights then there is power to the unit If not check the connections between the AC outlet and the System Unit 4 After approximately three seconds the SU system DATA and VALID LEDs should light 5 Power down the unit Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Fuses Installation The correct fuse is installed in the Power Supply by the factory This fuse is not replaceable If the Power Supply Unit should fail contact your local dealer or TimeLine for a replacement unit Placement The System Unit and the Keyboard Controller are connected by a 25 foot cable Mount the System Unit SU The System Unit is designed as rack mount equipment However the top and bottom covers provide adequate protection for table top operation Rack Mount Procedure The System Unit is a standard 19 rack mount case When deciding placement provide adjacent mounting space for the Micro Lynx Power Supply Unit Procedure 1 Slide the System Unit into a 1U high space in a 19 equipment rack 2 Mount and secure t
2. 6 20 Setting the Master Machine 02000000000000 0 6 20 Transport Control e tbe teet tive ta te OE 6 21 Chapter T System Umnit 5 rore h eoe eee eae area eee rape tae evi ao eee ae ene e e egeo e EE eatas 7 1 Introduction 55222 od f d o bad naa a ba ea Fa Du we ea dota 7 1 Front Panel Indicators and 0000 0100 000 1 2 REN 1 2 1 2 EXTERNAL COMPUTER IS ME 7 2 KEY BOARD 1 2 SYSTEM uet v Pa ue ee ERR err pen IU ee qud rer tud esee 1 3 POWER ER 1 3 Vid o Referente secre ied ERU I IURI MR UNI NI T MA dene qi c Mais 7 3 Transport Connectors ccccccccsssssssseccccecccccsssseeecccceeeauseseeeccceeeeseeeaauaasseeececseeeaauagneeeeeeeseeaeaa 7 4 Tim Code Readers and Generator Lii t ag e so ug ttu hen ug o i o oda 1 5 MID 1 6 Computer n RR E WENT HG ESTEE NIE T I Ee e iet ut 7 7 System Tally Aux In Xu siia icu d tte tot ug eaa oS HR NM E 7 9 Third Machine Interface eere tee tae eren tas RAE RENE TR ARR RR FER
3. 8 44 3 REVAS 8 45 As OYN CPA A OPE 8 45 B OBSI ODB tats UP 8 47 6 E RRT Oi S mee nce eee imo E CAL ETE e 8 49 T PCM 8 50 219 Dg PRU c TCR COL NERONE FORET RUPES NR 8 50 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Xi Table of Contents DURAS M i ic tti vasis 8 50 Auxiliary Function nnne ess 8 52 IC Is cce tese estet ttes 8 52 cL LO E EM Ea c Mu 8 53 iP ioco MOST EP 8 54 A x Lau QU M DS 8 55 simi en cea t T er tem ETE 8 56 coe oe LOI EIE CU C EM MU Ud 8 56 EXE TTS PERENNE 8 57 ee CIL M EU D NRE Ce ne C M 8 59 tatis Indicators ooo eed EI 8 60 CI D DP PE 8 60 Digital Audio Clock Generator LEDSs eene nnne eene 8 62 Chapter9 Advanced Feat res e eeee ee esee eee ee esa co aae oae ee ese a oaa aeo ee eee susce nasa do 9 1 Using AVID AudioVision with the Micro Lynx eeeeeeenneenennen eene nennen 9 1 To Control One Transport Device with the Micro
4. 9 11 Table Chapter 10 1 TRAN Setup 000 2 25 000 060 66 0 0000000 0 000 0001 10 5 Table Chapter 10 2 Troubleshooting the M3 Card sse 10 7 Table Chapter 10 3 ACG Card Sample Rate 10 14 Table Chapter 10 4 ACG Setup 18 1 1100 6000000000000050 8 000 0 10 16 Table Chapter 10 5 AES EBU Connector Pin 10 19 Table Chapter 10 6 Troubleshooting the ACG 10 20 Table Chapter 10 7 Setup nne essen 10 32 Table Appendix 1 Frame Rate Formats sees eee nnn nnne A 11 Table Appendix 2 Setup Quick Reference Guide eese A 23 Table Appendix A 3 Cable Reference 1 A 25 xviii Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Chapter 1 Introduction TIMEJINE Micro Lynx System Unit s MIK002A Figure Chapter 1 1 Micro Lynx What is the Micro Lynx The Micro Lynx is a high performance integrated machine control system The Micro Lynx system was specifically designed to handle the ever increasing machine control and synchronization requirements of the project recording studio and smaller post production facility The Micro L
5. nennen nennen 10 7 Installation I str ctions ctc eo o Ote eo NS EARN EFE deca cea 10 8 Digital Audio Clock Generator Card ACQ eese enne eene eene 10 12 Speed Reference ain Eee aa eas 10 12 The ACG Sai ri uiii A ie a cuo APR Td Se SP ac DU B 10 12 ACGel Features iie REL Eee R 10 13 2 KED i a o RE 10 14 Operation idet EE EEE EE EEEE EEE 10 15 Setup Options E 10 16 Digital Audio Clock Generator LEDS nennen 10 17 Audio Clock Generator 10 19 ACG Card Setup iiie oed rt degna eI 10 20 Error Conditions eea tuit er 10 21 Installation Instructions 2r e etn ret ade d e M e HR RR ERR RR ERR eR VR 10 21 NE 10 27 gant 3 cata nad dec gga 10 27 Introd ctiom T etm 10 27 Ingtallatian ast PUCDIOHSS dvds e 10 28 Operation 10 31 PEO VELG HT heo enne s 10 32 VITC Display and Status nennen eene nenne 10 32 Appendix tosse oases A 1 s eoe Dot ud ME i ee A 1 SMPTE Made SIMPE Nn EE EKR EEE KANE EK
6. 9 2 To Control Multiple Transport Devices with the Micro 9 3 To Slave AudioVision from an External Deck Connected to the Micro Lynx 9 3 Using Pro Tools with the Micro Lynx nnne 9 4 Introd we eot IAE uence VERE Iu quat eat aaa 9 4 System Set Up And Configuration Pro Tools as 5 9 5 VITC Option Card Setup and Configuration for Pro Tools 9 8 System Setup And Configuration Pro Tools as Master 9 9 Advanced MIDI Features ADU RI CHAIR RATE aed 9 11 Generat or ad toda cu aM ded epi 9 11 MIDI 100000000000000000000000000020210200000 a rennen ines sisse n eine eere 9 11 Description Of Settings ccccccsssssscccccccccessssseecccccseeeeuseeseeeceeeceesseeeuuaesseeeceseeeeauangness 9 12 Other Setting 0 nennen 9 14 Using Mediasound with the Micro Lynx eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenennnn ee ener nnns 9 15 TED KO TEA AKo o o Sats ons Sait ice a ec ck sah on ps cat re 9 15 Micro Lynx Options Necessa
7. 8 8 Rack Mount Procedure tonta b o ores 3 3 GO e o E E 8 4 Connect the Transports and the System 3 5 Connect the Keyboard Controller 3 7 Connect the AUX Input Hee ess rn nn trees sss nere esses 3 8 Quick Test and Initialization 000 0 6 66 22000 00000000008 3 9 Quick Check Troubleshooting 3 13 Chapter4 Getting Started eere tiec teer esee egeo soe eene e eee ene saa de Eae reos e eae Eae e oae e e e eoo ee 4 1 Introduction auo HE ia 4 1 Turn and Initializati n ie ecce tere ttt nea 4 1 Set the System Reference cccccsssssccccccccccsssssseecccceeeccesseseeccccseeseuuussssesseeecccseeeeauaaaseeeeeess 4 5 Generate Time Code oe e A a 4 7 Capture and Locate 4 9 xii eret pr eka e DE ERE EE 4 10 Lockingan a GrTOUD decet tete cre Nc Ft o ees 4 11 Offset eee n ei ases 4 12 Trim an Offset pd Rx e En b aa o oa udi Dane 4 16 Ghange the Master Machine nay etd RR EDO UIS 4 17 ID S
8. ote 1 3 Beat res 5 tes a su eee Gn e n E OE certam oe 1 4 Micro Lynx Keyboard Controller KBD cccccssssecccccccccceeeesesececceeeeauueesseseeeceeeseeeaas 1 4 Micro Lynx System Unit SU 1 4 Specifications esee RO Omne qq NE 1 6 Keyboard hn Haee ama nanc 1 6 System Units E wks cask Sa HG NENNEN EARN 1 6 Time ner Aa e ER CERRAR EE ER FEX XS FEVER ERIS TNR AA 1 6 SNAIL IKONA IVA A PAE E EE SIEG RI EE EEA REAR 1 6 Transports enna ERE I ENIRO RD oS 1 7 Time Code Reader tute Reto ada 1 7 Aux Inputs usse SE EE tet an Madea ae any 1 7 Aux ense A N 1 7 Madeo i erp ee ree RR a qum 1 7 Mideo Outpul a coe ven eB OBI ERBEN ee wT Gs 1 7 Serial TH OUE icis iet ie d e b etse ade 1 7 Power Supply Unit usus suu 1 8 Physical aue uet urge ER Me ig GER MI UII das ur 1 8 Options ossi soos ices Eee AS TE oS ed uuu IE IN 1 8 Cable Requirements eH IRIBPIBGnPNIDI nem TE 1 9 Chapter 2 JAppliesatiOfnss Pr ra Lx den 2 1 Introduction DETTO 2 1 Related Time line Products te ate o i rar da So Su 2 1 Third Machine Expansion Card M3
9. 6 18 How To Edit Loop a Group of Machines ccccccccccccccccsssseeecceeseceeeceaauaeeeececcceeeeaauaneess 6 13 Recording b nction8 a inte Rene eese mites 6 14 Using an Auxiliary Footswitch for Punch In Out 4 2 422 2 6 14 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 ix Table of Contents Setting Record Ready Options sees essen nnne nennen 6 14 Keyboard 6 15 Using the Jog Wheel for Trim Operations nennen nennen 6 15 Using the Memory Registers 6 15 Storing Numbers the Memory Registers 6 16 Recalling Memory Register 004002200000001 6 16 Programming 6 17 Deleting tas Marist sects cc DESSIN IS 6 18 Using the Preprogrammed Macros ccccccccsssssssssecccceeececssesseseseeecccseeeeuaaseeeeeeeeeeeeaas 6 18 Programming Your Own 6 18 Program Macro 0 4567 6 19 Setting Variable Speed Playback o cc cc cccssesscssssssdassseesseisisssgessiessaisiassdadvessecasescadsavestacns 6 19 Code Only Master Operation e A EET AENA 6 20 Selecting the System Reference
10. 1 5 Table Chapter 7 4 Time Code OUT Connector Pin Description 20000 2000 1 5 Table Chapter 7 5 MIDI IN Connector Pin eene 7 6 Table Chapter 7 6 MIDI OUT Connector Pin 00 02 2000 0 00 000000 1 6 Table Chapter 7 7 MIDI THRU OUT Connector Pin 400000 0000 1 6 Table Chapter 7 8 I F Connector Pin 2 2 2 2 201 eene 7 7 Table Chapter 7 9 I F Connector Pin Description eeeeeeeeesseseeeeeen nnne 7 7 Table Chapter 7 10 RS232 422 Connector Pin 7 8 Table Chapter 7 11 Keyboard Connector Pin Description 00220000000 7 8 Table Chapter 7 12 System Tally Connector Pin 7 9 Table Chapter 7 13 Aux In Connector Pin DeScription cccccccccceccessesseeeccceeeceaaeeaaeenees 7 9 Table Chapter 7 14 Aux Out Connector Pin Description eene 1 10 Table Chapter 7 15 Transport Connector Pin Description 7 11 Table Chapter 7 16 AES EBU Connector Pin 7 12 Table Chapter 7 17 POWER Connector Pin Description 7 13 Table Chapter 8 1 Key Mnemonics ccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeee
11. 001 3 5 3 Micro Lynx System Unit to Keyboard Controller Connection 3 7 4 Micro Lynx Keyboard Controller to Foot Switch sess 3 8 zT System U nib e t edt eet ed 7 1 2 Front Panel Indicators and Switches esee 7 2 oo Video Referents ato nace ate tone 7 3 4 Transport Conmectors ccsscccccccccccssssssscccccsccceaussssseecccseeeauaaseseccceseess 7 4 5 Time Code Readers and 7 5 MIDI eet i e e cn 7 6 7 External Contro Interface edere aedes tra eadera 7 7 8 System Tally and Aux 7 9 9 Third Machine Interface 7 11 10 Audio Clock Generator eee 1 12 LL Interface rene ek eine de Ree retia 7 13 Mo 7 13 l Front Panel eed e Eg ett awarded 8 1 22 Keyboard Key Locatot iue e ORO bebe s 8 2 soa Display cs estet ettet het 8 4 4 Motion Control Keys 8 11 E 8 16 26 Device Select Keys inscrita erret 8 18 7 Group Select Keys iio ie isse et 8 28 B Calculator Keys eec e beri e oe EH e toe 8 39 9 Auxiliary Functi
12. 10 1 10 2 Video synchronization esee 9 15 Video Transport Assembler 8 49 Cue tack oe eedem 8 46 SMPTE frame rate 6 2 Time code track ien er eR Uer 8 47 Video Transport with Micro LYNX irate neia 2 4 Video Audio Production ess 6 5 2 2 10 1 10 27 2 2 2 2 VITC Configuration for Pro Tools 9 8 VITG EBD iiit ire Ete is 8 59 VITC Options eee 8 18 8 20 VITC Reader Card 2 2 8 20 10 1 10 27 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 6 2 2 VSG tuper euin esee 10 1 10 2 VSG Video Sync Generator 9 15 LEE 6 19 W inn cM 5 6 Error Cannot open file referenced on page 1 Index 9
13. Selecting iEn Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Selecting machine esee 9 25 SLE CHOON is oic epe UE Dee qoe id 2 3 Single 6 7 8 21 Transport Keys ALLS TORS tede etus 8 11 CUE cred Seek ee 8 11 3 teeth ere o eee 8 12 220 2 8 13 GPL operatiohs 8 25 LOC ES Re a 8 11 PLAY edocs 8 13 tue IE RI Beh 8 14 8 14 REPLAY ugue D 8 12 REWIND ento niin 8 13 ROLLBACK ene Gena hess 8 11 STOP Seer pete se x E 8 13 Transport Options esee 8 22 E tct 8 16 Inm 3i eee eben 8 16 Trimming an 4 16 TRKS K6eya uunc SORS 8 18 8 35 V Variable Speed Operation 6 19 Variable Speed Playback 6 18 Vertical Interval Time 10 27 NID Key ie POUR Ei 8 42 Video NTSG Als ohn eee ee 9 23 Video Sync 9 15 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 VIDEO GEN LED eee 8 58 Video Reference ie Rp erre tet PE 7 3 Video Sync Generator esse 2 2 Video Sync Generator Card
14. sse nennen eene nnne 2 1 Digital Audio Clock Generator Card eee eene 2 1 Video Sync Generator Card VSG eese 2 2 VITC Reader Gard VITO 2 2 Basic Micro 2 8 Micro Lynx 3 1 95 vii Table of Contents Micro Lynx witha tope Teo us eed eee eed 2 4 Micro with MIDL eA ERA REA EEG 2 5 Micro Lynx with Third Machine Card 00040222200000 2 6 Micro Lynx with a Digital Audio Workstation 2 7 Micro Lynx with the Studio System ccccsccccccccccccssssseecccceeeceaecesaesseeeccceeeeeaauanseeeeceeeeees 2 8 Chapter 3 Installation 5 ette osea Eee tano eoe eno aane ena eee 3 1 Inttoductiob c a eodeni eR 3 1 Hardware Supplied cccccccccccccccsssssseecccccceccussseececceseeeauussseeecceseeesseeeuuuenseececesseeeaaansees 3 1 System Setup Planning 3 1 IPO Weis trices icant Moco eit Bi 3 2 T cede 3 3 Placement cines ati eub iuuat cot M 8 8 Mount the System Unit 17
15. 2 5 Manus eR RU OUR 8 55 Mixed Gode ute 8 46 MIXED CODE LED eee 8 58 N pde eeu 8 17 8 18 NON STDIN LED vii naui Ses 8 60 NON STD OUT LED eee 8 61 Non drop Frame Code esses 8 46 NISO ee estes ee ie ay 7 3 10 2 Offset Register Accessing 242222222 2 8 45 Offsets Adjusting between machines 8 57 Index 6 8 43 8 45 Displaying eet derepente 8 50 Machine i eine nea RISUS 6 11 R calliBg i eerte et eai 8 45 Settings ong ee iG nee 4 12 6 11 SOHNE 8 45 Tumming osea sean 4 16 8 57 OEST t eee neon onem 8 45 Operating 8 21 Option Card i Iud neue 2 Digital Audio Clock Generator 2 1 10 1 10 12 Third 2 1 2 6 10 1 10 4 Video Sync Generator 2 2 10 1 VITC 2 2 10 1 10 27 Ac 10 2 OUT 1470 1764 LED eee 8 60 OUT 1600 1920 LED et 8 60 OUT Key usedga hte RISO 8 48 Out Point Register Accessing 8 48 Out Point Short Cut 2 2 8 20 Output ACG ene 10 19 MID Dis esent seh ant 7 6 9 16 t
16. A 11 VIRCO A nme 12 SMPTE MID and toe dt e A 13 Using SMPTE 14 Things To Know About Generating Time A 14 Reshaping Time Codeseira aaa A A earen OR EIAN eR Ar ERES A 15 Regeneration or Jam O O a a AE NASA A 16 About Time Code Readers eese A 16 synchronizer Essentials 2 ets tur enn nscdnsnduyssuacenacdes SEXY REN NER RENS REY ERN PEAVEY UE PATERE A 16 Phase or Syne ui ead vd ed eco Do eal 17 Advanced Ap plications isi ERGIBT ES A 17 ite er ne ee eee eee eee A 17 A dio For Video cei ra AR ER ERR EA EIEEE A 18 The Modern Electronic Recording Studio A 20 SMPTE and the Digital Audio Workstation nennen eene enne enne A 21 The SMPTE tem S M Gare mv Maa crat brs IE Drev catia vs A 22 Setup Quick Refer nce e Le LEE E eU LAE EH AE eS A 23 Cable Reteremce Guid Fa Gan encanto A 27 Key and Key Combination Identification Numbers essen eene A 31 LOSS ALY uie onu USING OP RII OI RE ION A33 lin qe M n Index 1 Ist of WIG UNOS sect one neta Sees vette
17. Adapter In RS232 422 9 pin D type socket The Micro Lynx supports both major EIA standards RS232C and RS422 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 7 7 System Unit The RS232 transmitter modulates a signal with respect to a common ground bipolar The receiver senses whether the signal is sufficiently negative with respect to ground to determine a logical 1 which makes it susceptible to noise and interference As a consequence RS232C can only be used over short distances The RS422 transmitter modulates the signal against an inverted copy of the same signal i e a differential signal The receiver senses which line is more negative than the other Because the signal is differential it is more immune to noise and interference and will not degrade over significant distances Table Chapter 7 10 RS232 422 Connector Pin Description KEYBOARD Standard RJ 45 telephone socket Power data and communications between the TimeLine System Unit and the Keyboard Controller pass through this port Table Chapter 7 11 Keyboard Connector Pin Description Micro Lynx 7 8 06 22 00 System Tally Aux TIME CODE m RDR1 RDR2 System Unit In Aux Out MIDI AUDIO CLOCK GENERATOR THRU OUT 2 AESIEBU O S OUT WORD OUT CLOCKIN POWER VIDEO REF TRANSPORT 1 SYSTEM TALLY AUX IN AUX OUT Micro Lynx 06 22 00 MIK015B Figure Chapter 7 8 System Tally and Aux Jacks 9 pin D plu
18. eei eet 8 18 Third 000000 0 011 2 1 2 6 Third Machine 10 1 10 4 Index 8 Time Setting reference time Time code Drop frame sete eere ette MIDI on Micro Lynx esee Non drop Storing values sese Type parameters eere Type with 2 2 2224222 22 4 Time Code Calculating in mixed Calculating Capturing values sese Generatng euet ee p Howto set ciem Longitudinal eee 8 Reading from Recalling stored values 4 0 8 8 Recovery from problems Selecting 44222 1 21 DOM AL eine dip SEO Storing LCG Options 3 6 peti Re ales Track record Ver cal d aA RENS Time Code Display sees Time Code Generator Tracks Record Ready 5i Sategxmnode osea HEUS Transport 2 4 Customizing with M3 ou eee In code only i Input Output Port eese Installation eei Multiple machines Options Resetting parameters
19. 2 Ground 7 0 NC 4 0 5 IDI Ow 5 pin DIN socket Used as a MIDI output or to retransmit MIDI input information Table Chapter 7 7 MIDI THRU OUT Connector Pin Description Pin Description 2 Ground 4 MIDI Outs 5_____ MIDI Out MAC to MIDI Interface Mini 8 pin DIN MAC serial connector is Micro Lynx 06 22 00 System Unit used to directly connect the Micro Lynx to a MAC serial modem or printer port An external MIDI interface box is not required The Micro Lynx has a nominal interface speed of 1 MHz Select the correct serial port and interface speed from the MAC MIDI application This connector is used when the Micro Lynx generates MIDI time code Table Chapter 7 8 I F Connector Pin Description 1 MHz clock Bi polar N NC o Adapter Out C COMPUTER 5 E c SYSTEM TALLY AES Egu AUDIO clock GENERATOR RS232 422 UT WORD OUT 014 Figure Chapter 7 7 External Control Interface MAC Mini 8 pin connector Connects to a standard MAC serial peripheral port We recommend using the modem port because the computer gives it priority over the printer port when checking for activity The Micro Lynx serial interface conforms to RS422 standards and has an interface speed of 1 MHz Table Chapter 7 9 I F Connector Pin Description Adapter In Adapter Out Frame Clock 5v at system reference
20. OEVNT pOLIST EA DIGITAL AUDIO CLOCK GENERATOR rn ro Jl 7 Ig S l A IN OUT DUR OLAST ONEXT OENTR GROUP SELECT m CUE O TRIM o JOG OsHTL LOCK FOLOCK LOCK 9 4 5 6 O O O Busy OBusy Busy SYNGP OFT OREC REC M A2 Hoa porce pomo rn ro 1 2 3 PRE POST REF VID 05010 rOLOOP rORDY OTRKS 0 00 LL 6 4 o o o o o ro ALL ROLL RE Loc CUE 5 PLAY E o o o o o o M D MOTION JOG WHEEL MIK044A Micro Lynx 06 22 00 DEVICE SELECT SETUP ACG GROUP SELECT A B C TCG MIDI GRP SOLO LOOP RDY TRKS MOTION LOC CUE ALL STOP ROLL BACK REPLAY EDIT gt gt gt REH REC Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Table Chapter 8 1 Key Mnemonics Description Setup Audio Clock Generator Function Key 1 Function Key 2 VITC System Transport Event List Memory Machine A Transport 1 Machine B Transport 2 Machine C Transport 3 Time Code Generator MIDI Time Code Group Solo Loop Record Enable Tracks Locate Cue All Stop Roll Back Replay Edit Rewind Fast Forward Stop Play Rehearse Record Key Mnemonic CALCULATOR RCL STO MACRO CAPT CLR SUB FR 00 OTIME VID 1 PRE Al 2POST A2 3 REF A3
21. 8 48 E EditIn Point isi nee Rer ten 8 48 EDIE K6ey v iui eesTIgeus 8 12 8 18 Edit Loop neos re p heen ERR 6 12 Edit Options ode 8 18 Editing iei eee e enin 4 18 ENTR KE acini ene noB 8 17 Equal Keystone RU p Uo EE ORE 8 54 ERR Key i een el 8 47 Error Messages oo eter RR eie 5 5 Error Register eee teretes 8 47 Errors Accessing error register 24 2222 1 8 47 ACG Operations esce e tede 10 21 Display nE ep er et erer ie pei 5 1 8 20 Register status by mode 8 47 VSG or System nennen 8 59 When system error 2 42222 8 20 Index 4 Event 8 18 8 27 EVNT Key iatis ipo ORE 8 18 8 25 External Computer seen 7 2 External Vid o ra eite etnies 6 19 F EI Keys shits iota tates Rats oie en ae 8 20 2 Key eee Uode op eee RU Qt 8 20 Key 8 20 FAST FORWARD 2 2 2 2 2 8 13 Film Frame 222242420121 6 2 Footswitch Recording 6 13 Frame rate Setting with Micro Lynx sse 9 23 SYSLEM sens teen 9 17 with MG RU eee her ue Uer 9 22 Frame Rate Default sirien ree tt edet es 4 5 Displaying ates hee eases 6 2 Matching to 6 5 BUSS eene deg 3 3 G Generating Time Code sees 4 7 GPI Duration Teglster o Etre 8 25 Preroll register
22. 8 57 Sync WALD video siii ite epe tens 9 15 Sync Point Clearing ioco tete e 8 44 Displaying es 8 50 Reference egister aero en 8 43 Setting wails Shae centers EID 8 44 Source Teg1lsteE ii vsti dpi en eerte 8 43 Sync pulse generator VSG 9 15 Synchronization SMPTE esee 6 2 Synchronizing Capstan Mode ice o a EORR em 8 23 Drop with non drop 8 46 Multiple machines eee 6 9 Two audio 6 3 Using control track 4 2 44 222 8 24 Using serial time 22222222 8 24 With Audio Clock Generator 10 12 SYNGP K6y ei REIR 8 43 SYS Keynote RR Umen 8 18 8 20 SYS TED uet 8 10 8 20 System Controlling with Micro Lynx eee 9 15 Micro Lynx 9 22 Setting sample rate sese 9 20 System 9 17 System Error uo ete e eer 8 10 8 20 System Error 2 2 404201 5 1 SYSTEM LEED 5 2 5S Gain RUE 7 3 System Options 42022 2 1 4 24 8 18 8 21 2 1 4 5 System Unit 1 3 1 4 3 1 6 1 7 1 2 1 AE 4 21 System Resetting sss 8 21 T 8 47 TOGEK6y IEEE US 8 18 8 28 8 29
23. 11 Advanced Features Set the system reference for your specific application The ACG output and each of the machines in the system will all lock to the selected system reference thus ensuring correct synchronization Procedure 1 SETUP TCG Setup TCG Options Selection System Ref IntFix 2 and Select the system reference required Set the required frame rate and code type in the Micro Lynx TCG Setup options menu Procedure 1 SETUP TCG Setup TCG Options Selection System Ref IntFix TCG setup option menu 2 LAST NEXT Setup TCG Options Selection System Spd Code 29 97Hz 30 3 and Select frame rate and code type required This should be the same as the Pro Tools code type and rate Power up the Micro Lynx after the Macintosh computer If the Macintosh plays a short melody during startup and won t boot turn the Micro Lynx off and reboot the Macintosh Make sure that Appletalk is inactive in the Chooser Verify that the time code rate and type in the Pro Tools Option SMPTE format menu match those selected in the TCG Setup options on the Micro Lynx In the Pro Tools Options menu set Continuous Resync to OFF and Online to ON Set the time code start frame to the program material s starting time code 9 7 Advanced Features VITC Option Card Setup and Configuration for Pro Tools A useful feature of Pro Tools is its capability to capture a MIDI time code number for use in its Spotting mo
24. 29 97 30 drop frame Real Time NTSC standard USA amp Japan 29 97 30 non drop frame 0 1 96 slow USA amp Japan 30 00 30 drop frame 0 1 96 fast 30 00 30 non drop frame USA amp Japan 1 29 97 Generated by all color television sync generators i e almost all sync generators built after 1970 This is the speed at which a black burst signal runs not to be confused with black amp white It is a standard color signal with a color of black Use this as your standard frame rate unless you are an expert and have a reason not to 2 30 00 Usually available only in internal crystal mode of a time code generator or from black amp white television sync generators Don t use this non standard speed unless you are an expert and have a good reason This is sometimes used in conjunction with motion picture film systems Skips 108 frames hour at regular intervals Many users prefer 30 full frame counting because no numbers skip in the counting sequence even though the elapsed time accuracy at 29 97 frame rate is slightly different from real time A 11 VITC A 12 Vertical Interval Time Code VITC is another form of SMPTE that is used only with video and is printed horizontally at the be ginning of each field as part of the video signal Longitudinal Time Code LTC is printed linearly along an audio track Unlike LTC VITC cannot normally be added to a video tape after the pict
25. Figure Chapter 10 13 Install the ACG Option Card Bracket Install the ACG Option 9 Reinstall the M3 Card if it was removed ACG Card is Card With New Metal mounted on the left side of the System Unit above the M3 Work Card 10 Remove the mounting standoffs from the 9 pin connector on the ACG Card Micro Lynx 06 22 00 10 25 Option Cards 10 26 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 The Option Card cable is a ribbon cable with four connectors attached On one end of the cable the second connector is about 3 5 from the end Insert this end into connector J1 on the component side of the ACG Card The connector should be attached so that the cable falls away from the ACG Card as illustrated in Figure 10 10 Position the ACG Card component side down with connector J1 toward the front of the System Unit Approximately 1 25 from the J1 connector bend the Option Card cable under so that it makes a right angle turn the unused connectors on the cable will face the chassis bottom Insert the folded Option Card cable through the opening in the Option Card bracket Lie the ACG Card flat on the Option Card bracket Slide the ACG Card against the back panel so that the AES EBU connector and the O S OUT WORD OUT and CLOCK IN jacks are seated in the appropriate cutouts in the back panel Insert the washers and nuts onto the BNC connectors Replace the mounting standoffs on the 9 pin connector
26. Next error or Normal display Press SYS again to see the next error message and to exit when the list is done The Micro Lynx holds error messages in a stack when the top message is removed the next one is displayed Repeat step 3 until all messages have been read 4 CLR Display clears Press the CLR key to exit SYS ERROR mode and return to a normal operating display without clearing the list Cause The ACG Option card has not locked to the incoming AES EBU Word or Oversample Clock because the signal is either not present or out of range Solution Verify that the external digital audio clock is present and connected to the correct input Check that the ACG setup parameters have been correctly configured Cause The ACG Option card has not locked to the system reference Solution Verify that the selected system reference is present Check that the Keyboard Ref Lock LED is on Cause The connection between the System Unit SU and the Keyboard Controller KBD has been dropped either momentarily or completely Each time there is a communication error this message will be added to the stack Solution Check the SU to KBD cable connection reset either the SU or the KBD Cause A reference source that is not present has been selected Solution Verify that the reference source is connected or that the correct reference source has been selected Cause The reference source has been changed at some point Micro Ly
27. 2 SELECT RDY OR TRAN THEN MACHINE A B OR C TO SETUP OPTIONS 3 USE KEYS 0 1 2 ONLY AFTER FIRST SELECTION Micro Lynx 06 22 00 ROLLBACK REH REC KEY OPTIONS 2 LAST NEXT ROLLBACK OR 0 ROLLBACK KEY TF ROLLBACK PLAY REV REH OR 1 REHEARSE BY T PLAY REH L REHONLY OR 2 RECORD BY PLAY REC XL RECONLY SYS SYSTEM OPTIONS LAST NEXT TCG TCG OPTIONS LAST NEXT 0 LED BRIGHTNESS L 20 100 100 1 DSPL CONTRAST L 30 100 70 2 DSPL TIMEOUT OFF 1 MIN 5 MIN 10 MIN 20 MIN NEVER JOG SPEED L 1 10 5 TRIM FRAME L 01 10 01 TRIM SUBFRAME L 01 25 01 6 PORT SELECT MAC MIDI 422 ES L ES 422 0FF oi 0 SYSTEM REF INTFIX INTVAR EXTVID AUX VSO MASTER ACG 1 SYSTEM SPD CODE 24 2 24 25Hz 25 PAL 29 97Hz DF 29 97Hz 30 NTSC 30Hz DF 30Hz 30 VARISPEED L 87 5 112 5 100 00 JOG SHTL WHEEL 0 1 HH 0 01 TCG GROUP MODE I PLAY RUN 4 1 5 N 5 L PLAY MUTE PLAY WIND 4 TCG STILL MODE TH OFF F L on 5 AUX OUTPUT SEL PILOT RESHAPE 1 RESHAPE 2 RESHAPE 3 GPI 2 BEEP 6 VIDEO SYNC GEN TH OFF 1 L on I TRKS TRACK OPTIONS EL 0 VIDEO TRACKS z th SAFE C READY aL 1 VIDEO AUTO RST TE OFF L ON TRAN MACHINE SELECT E LAST NEXT TRANSPORT MFGR MACHINE MODEL TRAN TRAN OPTIONS
28. 8 17 JOS MOG ates ci eri repete tet 8 16 8 17 Jog Wheelin cient Rete een 8 16 K 2 8 Keyboard Connector esee 7 8 Keyboard Controller 1 3 1 4 6 1 8 1 R settilig eoe et rti deo d oret Une 4 22 uere en 7 2 Keyboard Operations see 6 14 L LEAST Keyai eem ee ee Sis eee 8 17 8 18 LED SE IN 8 61 AP OUT d ite attomo nonien 8 61 AC Gute tsi BD Bente ae aos 7 2 BUSY cused atone 8 29 7 2 gt 1460 1264 8 60 Tn 1600 1920 2 a5 baie 8 60 Keyboard renis net 7 2 LOCK satis elias tn eae at 8 29 MIB 7 2 10 4 MIDI ire DRESU SODSPeSfevsIgS 7 2 MIXED CODE RUE nee RnS 8 58 NON STD IN 3 etin dee 8 60 NON STDOUT tern 8 61 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 OUT 1470 1764 essere 8 60 OUT T600 1920 eerte 8 60 aene ISI 7 3 8 15 8 29 RC 8 58 REH eto R ann Ruston 8 14 Iosue Ede eu Nee 8 20 SYSLOUL A oed tee ies onte db eigene 7 3 VIDEO GEN ee AE A E R R 8 58 7 2 8 59 LEDs As status indicators 8 58 Digital audio clock generator 8 60 Front Panel uiae epi en aise 7 2 Gr
29. 9 10 3 and Setup MIDI Options Selection MTC Source I F Jack Use and to select the input connector you wish to use or Setup MIDI Options Selection MTC Source MAC Jack Set MIDI Resolve Procedure 1 SETUP MIDI Setup MIDI Options Selection MIDI Out Jack MTC Enter MIDI options setup menu 2 LAST NEXT or 6 Setup MIDI Options Selection MIDI Resolve Off Press 6 or Last Next until the MIDI Resolve menu is displayed 3 and Setup MIDI Options Selection MIDI Resolve ACG Servo Select ACG Servo Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Advanced Features Advanced MIDI Features General Features MIDI Setup Menu Micro Lynx 06 22 00 With Micro Lynx software version 1 30 and later the MIDI capabilities were enhanced for more versatile operation These features and the MIDI Setup Menu are described in this section e User selectable MIDI MTC input source to LTC conversion e MIDI translator 5 pin to 8 pin MAC feature e Comprehensive MIDI data and MTC routing matrix e to digital audio word clock workstation resolve function e MIDI time code as master is now implemented This allows Micro Lynx group slaves to case lock to incoming MTC Table 9 1 is a complete list of the Micro Lynx setup options for MIDI Figure 9 1 is a block diagram of the MIDI routing Explanation for each menu item is also included Press the SETUP key to enter setup m
30. FUTURE USE SOURCE SWITCH 2 MIDI TIME CODE READER 09 OFF MIDI INPUT on MIDI OUT JACK SWITCH m MIDI THRU JACK SWITCH MIDI OUTPUT MIDI TIME CODE e Q OFF GENERATOR e I F OUT JACK O SWITCH MIDI TIME CODE e AND MIDI DATA MERGE Lo FOR FUTURE USE 5 MIDI DATA O OFF FOR FUTURE USE o _ OUT JACK SWITCH o E gt ES BUS INPUT O i PORT SELECT i SWITCH Oo ES BUS OUTPUT O NOTE MIK083A 9 13 Advanced Features Other Setting Descriptions Port Select MAC Port Select RS422 9 14 The following settings are relevant to the System Setup covered in the Keyboard Controller section MIDI MAC port will accept MIDI or MTC input ES MAC port will accept ES Bus communications ES RS422 connector will accept RS422 serial communications Off RS422 connector is turned off Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Advanced Features Using Mediasound with the Micro Lynx Introduction The Micro Lynx is a synchronizer that allows you to control up to three machines It also generates locked SMPTE EBU and MIDI time codes The Micro Lynx is composed of a system unit and a keyboard controller The Micro Lynx reads SMPTE or EBU time code from the VTR or ATR drop frame or non drop frame converts it to MIDI Time Code and sends it to the SGI workstation serial port 2 The Micro Lynx also generates sample clock information
31. Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Power Placement Cabling Initialization Before you install and configure your equipment there are several installation issues to consider and plan The Micro Lynx uses a DC power supply Connect and use the power supply shipped with the Micro Lynx The power supply should be plugged into a surge protected MAINS outlet The System Unit is fitted with rack mount hardware and is generally installed in a 19 equipment rack The Keyboard Controller has a rubber mat base and can be placed on a console table or similar flat surface The Micro Lynx requires power transport time code and communications cables Careful connection and routing of cables will ensure a quick and successful installation Power supply and Keyboard cables are included with the Micro Lynx You must order the correct transport control and time code cables with your Micro Lynx to complete an installation Power up the Micro Lynx select the transport type settings and perform a quick check to verify correct system operation 3 1 Installation Power The Micro Lynx has an external power supply The Power Supply Unit is a switched mode type which automatically adjusts to the correct AC voltage for your area It is suitable for operation at any voltage in any country USA Japan 110 120 VAC Outside USA 220 250 VAC SYSTEM UNIT BACK PANEL TIMECODE COMPUTER our THRUOUT uF Mac RSZS2422
32. Procedure Hold the GRP key and add groups in order of priority Power on the SU and KBD 1 SETUP ACG SETUP LED flashes ACG LED turns on LAST LED turns on NEXT LED turns on 4 LED turns on LED turns on Setup ACG Options Selection Nom S Rate Out 48 00 Ks s You may access the Setup menu at any time 2 4 Setup ACG Options Selection Nom S Rate Out 47 592 Ks s Press the and keys to select the options in each menu selection Use NEXT and LAST to step through menu items Table Chapter 10 6 Troubleshooting the ACG Card Situation Conditions SU ACG LED fails to turn on or it is Verify the card installation If you have installed upgraded flashing Check insertion and seating of the option card software also check PROM cable and connector installation on the main board ACG not available when selected Use CLR SYS to reset the SU Check the new PROM installation on the Main board Micro Lynx 10 20 06 22 00 Error Conditions Warning System Error Option Cards If any of the following LEDs are flashing it indicates that the ACG output is not locked to the respective Micro Lynx system reference or input IN 1600 1920 OUT 1600 1920 IN 1470 1764 OUT 1470 1764 NON STD When the display reads ACG Input lost lock it indicates that the ACG Card has not locked to the incoming signal because the signal is out of range can t lock or no s
33. key and add groups in order of priority Reselect the group The first machine selected will be the reference machine 3 GRP B GRP A a B 1 03 47 17 0 B becomes the reference and master Offsets are automatically transferred 4 A SETUP b Bs 1 03 47 17 0 A becomes the master B remains the reference Offsets are transferred Micro Lynx 06 22 00 8 33 Keyboard Controller SOLO LOOP 8 34 Status Mode Press SOLO and the appropriate machine select key A C TCG to place a machine in Solo mode The transport motion control keys will only control the soloed machine all other machines remain in their previous state Press the SOLO key a second time to switch back to GRP mode The machine keys A C are used to access Status mode in Solo Press the soloed machine key the display will show the offset error for the soloed machine Press SOLO or the machine key again to return to Solo mode Procedure 1 SOLO A SOLO A 1 03 47 17 0 A is soloed 2 A A 1 03 47 17 Err 0 The offset error status is displayed 3 A SOLO A 1 03 47 17 0 Press the machine key or SOLO to take A out of status mode Press the LOOP key to select Edit Loop or Cycle mode The Loop key will continuously cycle an edit until it is interrupted by a transport command SETUP e LOOP Press SETUP followed by LOOP to select the loop options This menu has three
34. keys to set the System Ref option to IntFix and the Video Sync Gen option to On Press the SETUP key to leave setup mode You are now ready to synchronize the Transport to Mediasound Put Mediasound into Chase mode by clicking the Chase button in the Group Display Area On the Micro Lynx press and hold the Group key and press the A and TCG group select keys This forms a group of the Transport and Mediasound Press PLAY The Transport and Mediasound will play and synchronize 9 25 Advanced Features 12 The Micro Lynx generator will always jam to the incoming reader code The time code generator operation mode should be set to Play Wind to follow group transport operation Refer to TCG Option Menu in the Keyboard Controller section of the Micro Lynx Manual for option setting choices Note When the TCG is put in the group or put into play MTC will be transmitted from the selected MIDI I F or MAC connectors Micro Lynx 9 26 06 22 00 Chapter 10 Option Cards The Micro Lynx has been designed to quickly and easily accommodate four option cards to expand the Micro Lynx synchronizer capabilities This chapter describes the following option cards Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Video Sync Generator Card VSG The VSG Card is a small daughter card that plugs directly into the mother board and generates Video Sync in NTSC or PAL The video signal is referenced to the Micro Lynx system speed reference Third Machi
35. seen 8 25 Relays 8CCessIig ee nee eben 8 25 Select 8 18 Transport keys odo oe PRU uU 8 25 GPI Closures Ree etim 8 25 2 4 Group Editing oni cote tin 6 12 Group Mode reda 6 9 Group 8 18 8 31 Group Select Keys noo 8 28 ae a ee i ee 8 31 8 34 MIDI ehe 8 28 8 30 RDY aot ire ens 8 35 SOLO isse URB 8 28 8 34 ecc 8 28 8 29 ies sites Said oes Ree 8 35 Grouping Machines 4 10 4 11 6 9 deed 8 18 8 31 e eter 8 32 H Hardware Supplied sess 3 1 Hatinonics ierit poU 6 3 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 House 6 5 IN 1470 1764 LED ctio etti 8 60 IN 1600 1920 LED eee 8 60 IN Key nre d o ees 8 48 In Point Register Accessing 2 8 48 In Point Short Cut Keys esses 8 20 Input ee et ei eed hee 7 6 Time Code i ie 7 5 TANS POT scott ite EE E 7 4 NideOSYNC eines preme 7 3 Installing Micro Lynx System Hardware 3 1 Installing Options ACG Card uode ota ipis 10 21 10 24 M3 Card iR eal Seis 10 7 VIETC Card e ended ds 10 28 10 30 VSG Card 3 iia eben 10 2 J Jani SYNC scie e tete ren epe aes 6 3 6 7 JOG Key ee
36. 0 CAPSTAN MODE TE WILD RESOLVED 1 CAPST SPD TRIM L 128 TO 127 0 LIFTER DEFEAT NEVER NORMAL NOT STP PLAY ALWAYS RECORD IN T PULSE REC L P RECPLAY RECORD OUT PULSE PLAY P REC PLAY PULSE STOP P REC STOP P PLAY STOP PULSE OPTO SPECIAL OPTO b REHEARSE IN LATCH REH PULSE REH P REH PLAY P REH RECLOG L REH RECLOG PULSE REC 6 REHEARSE OUT UNLATCH af PULSE PLAY SAVE AS REC 7 APPROACH SPEED 20 254 8 BANDWIDTH LIMIT TF OFF C ON 9 READER MODE LTC SER TC LTC TT1 SERIAL TC T TIMER 1 00 MUTE CONTROL NORMAL UNTIL RSLVED UNTIL LOCKED NOT LOCKED NEXT LOCK THRESHOLD L 0 50 35 NEXT LOCK DELAY L 0 50 10 NEXT PARK WINDOW L 0 10 10 N 19 LAST NEXT Ie vitc OPTIONS 0 GROUP SELECT OFF A B 1 READER MODE T AUTO FIXED Ie LAST NEXT MIK082B 8 19 Keyboard Controller 8 20 ACG F1 F2 F3 SYS When the ACG card is installed it is automatically active The ACG setup configuration can be adjusted during any Micro Lynx operation without affecting the current operation since the ACG card processor operates independently from the other Micro Lynx functions The ACG LED will light to indicate that the ACG card is installed Refer to the Option Card chapter for more detailed information on the Audio Clock Generator SETUP ACG Press SETUP then ACG
37. 4 and keys Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Getting Started Table Chapter 4 3 Micro Lynx Setup Selections ACG ACG OPTION GRP GROUP OPTIONS ROLLBACK REH REC KEY OPTIONS 2 TRKS TRACK OPTIONS El 0 NOM S RATE OUT 0 SEARCH MODE ROLLBACK OR 0 ROLLBACK KEY 0 VIDEO TRACKS 32 000 Ks s TE CHASE cl ROLLBACK z TL SAFE 44 056 Ks s E 51 Group g L bAvynEV 3 L READY i 44100 ee 1 REF FOLLOW MSTR 5 REH OR 1 REHEARSE BY RETO 1 48 000 Ks s L ow Sep PEAYEREH XL on 1 VAR RATIO OUT 2 GROUP PARKAHEAD REH ONLY TF OFF L 0 30 25 REC OR 2 RECORD BY TRAN MACHINE SELECT on 3 GRP LED STATUS PLAY REC LAST NEXT TRANSPORT MFGR 2 VAR RATIO OUT NORMAL L REC ONLY MACHINE MODEL L 85 115 100 0095 XL TIMECODE TRAN TRAN OPTIONS 3 OVERSAMPLE OUT SYS SYSTEM OPTIONS 0 CAPSTAN MODE 192 ZC mesoLvED L 20 100 100 eun EL 4 NOM S RATE IN ZL 1 AFTER REPLAY 30 100 70 2 LIFTER DEFEAT 32 000 Ks s 5 vL END 2 DSPL TIMEOUT NEVER t TH 44 056 Ks s REPEAT OFF TH NORMAL 3 5 44 100 Ks s 2 AFTER 1 MIN amp NOTSTP PLAY 47 952 Ks s TLF STOP Th
38. A GRP TCG a B t 1 00 00 00 Se 2 oe 0 The first machine selected to the group becomes the Reference and Master 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 but press GRP A first to set the Micro Lynx back to A as Master and Reference before proceeding to the next example The Micro Lynx has comprehensive Rehearse Record and Replay edit routines In Points and Out Points can be quickly marked The Micro Lynx cues all transports to the preroll point executes an automatic record at the in point and drops out of record at the out point F1 is a macro that sets the In Point F2 is a macro that sets the Out Point 1 gt PLAY A B t 1 00 00 00 II gt L gt L gt L 0 The group goes into play and locks Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Getting Started F1 1 00 00 00 II A In 1 00 00 00 Mark a record in point The message MACRO I EXECUTING will be momentarily displayed F2 1 00 20 00 II A Out 1 00 20 00 Mark record out point The message MACRO II EXECUTING will be momentarily displayed EDIT EDIT LED on CUE LED flashes REPLAY LED flashes REC LED flashes LED flashes Select edit mode 1 00 00 00 A Out 1 00 20 00 Enter Edit mode Edit mode selection LEDs flash to prompt a selection REC EDIT LED on CUE LED on REC LED flashes A 55 00 00 A Out 1 00 20 00 Select Edit Record mode Group cues to the cue point The prer
39. A C The C machine is only available when a Machine Expansion Card M3 is installed The Time Code Generator TCG also has a machine key and can be considered as a 4th machine The TCG key controls both the LTC and MTC generators The three machines and the TCG may be operated either individually in solo mode or together synchronously in group mode Press SOLO and the appropriate machine select key A C TCG The transport control keys will control only the selected machine All other machines will remain in their current state of motion To select a different machine press the appropriate machine select key A C TCG Solo TCG is normally only used if you want to generate time code but can be used to control a time code only chase device machines assigned to the group will be controlled together by the transport control keys synchronously in play To assign a machine to the group press and hold the GRP key and press the appropriate machine select key A C TCG To remove a machine Micro Lynx 06 22 00 LOCK LED BUSY LED REC LED TCG Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller from a group press and hold the GRP key and the appropriate machine select key A C TCG The MIDI key is a special case that is used for MIDI time code chase When the MIDI key is grouped it automatically becomes the Master SETUP A C TCG Use this key combination to change the master machine designation Press an
40. C to select the type of transport to control 10 11 Option Cards Digital Audio Clock Generator Card ACG Speed Reference The ACG Solution 10 12 The Digital Audio Clock Generator is the first synchronizer product developed in a new class of interface products which bridge the worlds of digital audio time code and machine control In a conventional machine environment true synchronization of digital audio transports and workstations requires special refer ence clocks that are at a constant ratio to the system frame rate Even machines with internal time code readers and the ability to locate to specific time code locations require an exact sample rate or speed reference Without this reference the machines will slowly drift apart There are two ACG configurations e ACG 1 with Word Clock and e Oversample Clock outputs ACG 2 same as ACG 1 features and adds AES EBU Silent Output and AES EBU Clock Inputs which can be used as the Micro Lynx system reference Speed reference is an essential component for synchronizing any system For a Digital Audio Workstation or digital tape machine to stay in sync with other time code based equipment a common synchronizing speed reference is required Normally a fixed rate reference like video sync or sample rate clock word clock is used Frequently a fixed rate speed reference is not available not accepted by all of the equipment in the system or may need
41. Cable Requirements Keyboard Controller Between Equipment Supplied By KBD to SU 8 pin RJ 45 Keyboard to System Unit System Unit Between Equipment Supplied By SU to Power Supply DIN 5 System Unit to Power Supply Unit SU to Transports pin mue System Unit to each transport remote or synchronizer connector SU and Transport time 1 4 stereo Customer System Unit RDR 1 2 3 OUT amp Aux to Transport time code code inputs and outputs output time code input and appropriate Aux transport inputs and outputs SU to Ext Video BNC Customer System Unit to Video Reference Sync source or VTR DTR Video Sync input if TimeLine VSG option installed Synthesizer keyboard or drum machine SU ACG to Workstation BNC Customer System Unit Word Clock amp Oversample Clock outputs to Digital Audio Workstation or DTR SU VITC to Video System Unit to VTR output and Video Mon equipment input Micro Lynx 06 22 00 1 9 Introduction Chapter 2 Applications Many different types of audio and video equipment are available Before configuring the Micro Lynx decide what equipment you will use and how your system will be set up We have selected some of the most common configurations used in the industry Please use these as a guide for configuring your equipment to accommodate your specific application Related TimeLine Products When looking through this chapter keep the Micro Lynx option cards in mind TimeLine products can provide
42. REC ADV 7 5 OUT L 0 255 T N ILAST NEXT Setup Quick Reference ROLLBACK REH REC KEY OPTIONS ROLLBACK OR 0 ROLLBACK KEY TP ROLLBACK 7 PLAY REV 1 REHEARSE BY TL PLAY REH L REH ONLY REC OR 2 RECORD BY Th PLAY REC X REC ONLY SYS SYSTEM OPTIONS 0 LED BRIGHTNESS L 20 100 100 1 DSPL CONTRAST L 30 100 70 2 DSPL TIMEOUT OFF 1 MIN 5 MIN 10 MIN 20 MIN NEVER JOG SPEED L 1 10 5 TRIM FRAME L 01 10 01 TRIM SUBFRAME L 01 25 01 PORT SELECT L MAC MIDI 422 ES L ES 422 0FF Cy oi GE 2 TCG TCG OPTIONS 0 SYSTEM REF L INTFIX INTVAR EXTVID H AUX H VSO MASTER L ACG 1 SYSTEM SPD CODE H 24 Hz 24 H 25Hz 25 PAL 29 97Hz DF H 29 97Hz 30 NTSC 30Hz DF 30Hz 30 VARISPEED L 87 5 112 5 100 0096 JOG SHTL WHEEL 0 1 0 01 TCG GROUP MODE PLAY RUN L PLAY MUTE L PLAY WIND TCG STILL MODE H ON AUX OUTPUT SEL PILOT H RESHAPE 1 RESHAPE 2 L RESHAPE 3 GPI 2 BEEP 6 VIDEO SYNC GEN TE OFF L on T N Cy oi TRKS TRACK OPTIONS 0 VIDEO TRACKS TH SAFE L READY 1 VIDEO AUTO RST TH OFF L on LAST NEXT TRAN MACHINE SELECT LAST NEXT TRANSPORT MFGR t MACHINE MODEL TRAN TRAN OPTIONS 0 CAPSTAN
43. System timing parameters are set in the TCG Options Menu the following menu selections are available Table Chapter 4 1 TCG Options Menu KEY MENU SUB MENU RANGE VSO Master ACG 1 System Spd Code 24Hz 24 25Hz 25 PAL 29 97Hz DF 29 97Hz 30 NTSC 2 Varispeed 87 5 112 596 100 0096 Jog Shtl Wheel 0 1 10 196 3 Group Mode Play Run Play Mute Play Wind 4 TCG Still Mode Off On 5 Aux Output Sel Pilot Reshape 1 Reshape 2 Reshape 3 GPI 2 Beep 6 Video Sync Gen Off On Factory default settings are in italics Procedure Micro Lynx 06 22 00 4 5 Getting Started Generate Time Code 4 6 b 1 01 14 05 Err 0 SETUP TCG 0 SETUP LED flashes TCG LED turns on Enter Setup mode Select the time code generator menu Setup TCG options Selection System Ref IntFix Select time code generator and system reference Setup TCG options Selection System Ref IntVar Select the next reference option H Setup TCG options Selection System Ref IntFix Select the previous reference option NEXT or 1 Setup TCG options Selection System Spd Code 29 97 Hz 30 The current generator rate and code type are displayed Setup options Selection System Spd Code 30 Hz DF The next generator rate and code selection is displayed Setup options Selection System Spd Code 30 Hz 30 The next generator ra
44. The corner of the ACG Card with the black rubber bumper will rest on the L bracket installed on the side of the chassis in Step 5 Insert two phillips screws through the ACG Card into the Option Card bracket and tighten See Figure 10 14 MIKO91A Figure Chapter 10 14 Install the ACG Card If the M3 Card is fitted insert the Option Card cable connector into J1 on the M3 Card If the VITC Card is fitted insert the Option Card cable connector into J1 on the VITC Card Connect the other end of the cable into J3 on the Main Board The unused connectors will lie in the open area in the middle of the System Unit unless you have option cards installed Replace the top cover and the six phillips screws Power up the System Unit The Micro Lynx will recognize the ACG Card on power up and the ACG LED on the System Unit OPTION Section will turn on Press SETUP ACG to the configure the card functions Micro Lynx 06 22 00 VITC Reader Card Features Introduction Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Option Cards e Automatic or manual line selections modes e Automatic switch between LTC and VITC at 1 8rd play speed e Allocation to any of the three Micro Lynx machines e Valid VITC code type and line status display The Micro Lynx VITC Reader Card is a state of the art microprocessor based Vertical Interval Time Code VITC reader that installs inside the Micro Lynx system unit The VITC Card integrates directly with any
45. accomplished by soloing each tape machine and then playing it until it locks to the system speed reference Look at the display In addition to identifying the machine status as master or slave and showing the time code it indicates whether the machine and group are in lock The letter defines the reference source In this example II is used however any of the reference letters may be used Procedure Micro Lynx 06 22 00 A b t 1 09 22 23 0 SOLO A 1 09 22 23 Err 0 Solo the first machine The indicates that it is the reference machine and the capital letter indicates that it is the master Getting Started Set an Offset gt PLAY SOLO A gt L A 1 10 00 00 Err 0 00 Press gt on the motion control keys As the tape machine plays it will automatically resolve and lock STOP 1 10 00 00 Err 0 Press on the motion control keys once the machine has achieved lock B SOLO b 1 30 00 00 0 Solo the next machine The lower case letter indicates that this is a slave machine Repeat steps 2 4 for each machine GRP A b t A 1 10 00 00 0 Enter Group mode If the group prompt message Hold the GRP key and add groups in order of priority is displayed perform the procedure described in Make a Group ALL STOP STOP A b t 1 30 40 01 Ch Press ALL STOP followed by The Slave machines will chase to the correct l
46. an existing time code on tape It is extremely useful for repairing a break in an existing time code track or creating a continuous time code track from an edited or discontinuous track Code is read up to the last good address Then the generator uses the next consecutive address to generate new code ATR VTR LYNX MODULE TC IN 12 TIME CODE JAM SYNC gt LTC IN 12 35 08 29 ECO 12 35 08 29 READER GENERATOR 4 SMPTEO008A Figure Appendix A 9 Jam Sync Jam sync is used extensively in video editing where different pieces of tape each with different time code are spliced together Jam sync provides the resulting program with continuous time code TimeLine s Micro Lynx and Lynx both have manual and automatic jam modes that quickly and simply let you repair or create new time code tracks to overcome the problems that are detected with bad code About Time Code Readers A Wide Band Reader such as the Lynx Time Code Module or Micro Lynx reads time code even at the high tape speeds used for Fast Forward and Rewind Wide band reader capabilities are essential since SMPTE addresses provide the only accurate means of locating positions on tape If time code on tape becomes unreadable the TimeLine readers automatically search for the next best sync source on tape After SMPTE the reader searches for serial time code then pilot ton
47. outdoors all over the place Within a given scene the perspective also shifts i e from one camera to another each shooting the scene at a different angle In editing there are multiple video machines each loaded with footage of different scenes shot by different cameras The potential for chaos is great Fortunately there s SMPTE time code Each reel of raw footage is striped with SMPTE and each frame has a specific and unique location or address In some cases both LTC and VITC are on the tape During editing selected scenes of raw footage are transferred onto a master video tape one after another in sequence as they will appear in the finished show The master video tape as its name implies contains the master or program time code A video editor locks the source video machines loaded with raw footage to the master video machine Additionally one or more audio tape machines may be locked to the master These contain the production audio the dialog and incidental sounds recorded during shooting of the raw footage A 17 Audio For Video A 18 Video editing is normally a two stage operation First comes offline editing The person editing the show receives work tapes i e copies of all the raw footage with time code burned in so that it s visible in one corner of the picture Any footage initially shot on film is usually transferred to video at this point From the work tapes a basic seq
48. supported in the Appendix 4 SETUP c 10 00 00 00 Err 0 Press SETUP to exit Setup mode Alternatively select a different menu to modify Table Chapter 10 2 Troubleshooting the M3 Card Situation Solution SU LED fails to turn on or is Check the Keyboard to SU cable connection If you have installed upgraded flashing Verify the card installation software also check PROM Check insertion and seating of the option card installation on the main board cable and connector When you try to SOLO it is Not Press CLR and SYS then ENTR to clear and Available or does not exist reset the System Unit No time code Verify that the insertion and wiring of the time Time code must already be striped code cable from the SU to the machine is correct on the tape Verify that the machine cable is correctly inserted No machine control Verify that the correct transport type is selected The different machine selections are listed in the Appendix of the Micro Lynx manual Micro Lynx 06 22 00 10 7 Option Cards Installation Instructions Note If your Micro Lynx System Unit Serial Number is 1024 or higher you have new metal work The new metal work does not require the Option Card Bracket Please turn to the instructions for new metalwork later in this section for instructions on installing the M3 Card 1 Turn off the power and place the Micro Lynx System Unit on a static
49. to enter the ACG options menu Use it to set the following operating parameters Table Chapter 8 3 ACG Setup Menu KEY MENU SUB MENU RANGE ACG ACG Option 0 Nom S Rate Out 32 000 44 056 44 100 47 952 48 000 Ks s 4 Nom S Rate In 32 000 44 056 44 100 7 Oversample In 128 192 256 384 Off 8 Reference In AES EBU Clock In BNC The F1 and F2 keys are short cut keys to macros 1 2 They are preprogrammed by the factory to capture and store the edit in and out points It is possible to clear and reprogram these keys however they will default to the factory settings if the Keyboard Controller is reset See Macro for more information The F3 key is used for the VITC reader card Table Chapter 8 4 F3 Setup Menu KEY MENU SUE MENU F3 VITC Options 0 Group Select Off A B C 1 Reader Mode Auto Fixed The SYS key displays the software version numbers for the Micro Lynx system microprocessors and provides access to the system error list To display the software version numbers press RCL followed by SYS The version number for each PROM will be displayed These software numbers are required for any communication with the factory The SYS LED will flash when a system error occurs Press SYS to enter the error mode The SYS LED turns on and the first error message is displayed Pressing SYS again displays the Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller next erro
50. video machine This feature is normally only fully used on serially controlled machines Press the TRKS key to enter track select mode Press the machine select key A C that you wish to record enable When a track is enabled the track number is displayed if the track is safe a line is displayed XXX indicates that the track is safe or unavailable To accommodate the various types of machines one of three different setup displays will be used 8 35 Keyboard Controller Procedure 1 TRAN A Al A2 A4 Syn TC TRACKS Video or audio machine with less than 5 audio channels 2 TRAN A 1 A2 4 6 7 8 TRACKS Machines up to 8 audio channels 3 Multitrack with more than 8 audio channels To disable or safe all record enabled tracks hold CLR then press TRKS Video Machines Press the following calculator keys to record enable the corresponding track Pie A 1 0 vd 1 3 6 Timecode 4 as 9 Assemble Audio Machines For multitrack machines with up to 8 tracks press the following calculator keys to record enable the corresponding track Multitrack Machines Enter the track number and use the LAST and NEXT keys or the Jog Wheel to select the track to be record enabled Press to enable and or CLR to disable or safe each track If the machine has more than 24 tracks press the TRKS key a second time to display the higher number tracks Key Fun
51. 1920 for 48 000 Ks s and with 1470 1764 for 44 100 Ks s There is no specific indication when a 32 000 Ks s input is being varied Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller NON STD OUT If only this LED is on it indicates that an ACG output sample rate ratio of either 1066 2 3 samples per frame at 30 Hz or 1280 samples per frame at 25 Hz has been set This is a nominal sample rate of 32 000 Ks s If this LED flashes it indicates that the ACG output is not locked If the LED is on in combination with one of the previous two output LEDs it indicates that the nominal sample rate ratio is being varied If it is turned on with 1600 1920 for 48 000 Ks s and with 1470 1764 for 44 100 Ks s There is no specific indication when a 32 000 Ks s output is being varied IN This LED operates in combination with the previous input LEDs and indicates that the selected input sample rate ratio has been automatically pulled up or down by 0 146 for example from 48 000 to 47 952 or from 44 100 to 44 056 When the nominal sample rate is selected the ACG card will automatically adjust the sample rate ratio by 0 1 if the sample rate requested requires a pull up because the system frame rate is running at 29 97 Hz instead of 30 25 24 Hz Or it will automatically adjust the sample rate ratio by 0 1 if the sample rate requires a pull down because the system frame rate is running at 30 25 24 Hz instead of 29 97 Hz OUT This LED operates in combinati
52. AUX OUT TRANSPORT 1 TRANSPORT 2 019 Figure Chapter 7 5 Time Code Readers and Generator RDR 1 2 OUT 1 4 stereo jack differential input Time code inputs for transports 1 and 2 Readers 1 and 2 are wideband high speed linear time code inputs with a speed range from 1 10 speed to 60x play speed Table Chapter 7 2 RDR 1 Time Code Connector Pin Description Pin Description Time Code Reader 1 Time Code Reader 1 Table Chapter 7 3 RDR 2 Time Code Connector Pin Description Pin Description 1 4 stereo jack unbalanced output Time Code output for software selectable multi standard time code generator It has a fixed output level of 1 dBm 1 4V pp Table Chapter 7 4 Time Code OUT Connector Pin Description Pin Description Time code generator Ground Ground System Unit MIDI M i TIME CODE RDR1 RDR2 OUT THRU OUT Figure Chapter 7 6 MIDI AUDIO CLOC 0 5 WORDOUTCLOCKIN GENERATOR 013 5 pin DIN socket MIDI input is used to read MIDI time code MTO from an external MIDI device Table Chapter 7 5 MIDI IN Connector Pin Description Pin Description 2 Ground 4 MDine 5 5 pin DIN socket The MIDI output is used when the Micro Lynx generates MIDI Time Code Table Chapter 7 6 MIDI OUT Connector Pin Description Pin Description
53. Audio Clock Generator 2 1 10 1 10 12 Audio Clock Generator Options 8 18 8 20 Audio Clock setting up with Micro Lynx 9 20 Audio Only Studio 2 6 3 Audio Video Production eese 6 5 Audio Visioi erari sia r ie 9 1 9 3 Auxiliary Function 2 2 21 8 50 ANID 3s pe BS PCERIINI S 9 1 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 B Boot System Unit essere 8 21 BUSY SEED etti tnter i es 8 29 C Cables eas o teaso He bo ep 1 9 3 1 3 4 Calculator Keys eer etes 8 41 OO 8 39 PREIAT 5 sit Eb 8 42 2 POSTIA2 uie eh iere d ete 8 42 SRBEE AS i ERBEN AIR 8 43 qSYNCGP AA esperes 8 43 DORST CUB entree 8 45 cie URSUS ERU gre 8 47 JT INS EUREN SORS 8 48 SOUT key iei oH Peine 8 48 9 DUR ASM ep chi Ete 8 48 ACCESSING registers ue iere petii cns 8 8 CER Keys ene 8 39 Eqial Key een eee terr tht ire ets 8 54 Minus iens 8 55 PLUS Key eR Er RU CHE EORR UNS 8 54 Calculator Scratch Pad 4 21 8 5 8 7 Capstan erret 8 23 Capstan Speed sse 8 23 CAPT Key uie ERE ES 8 53 Changing Master Machine sees 4 17 Changing Memory 517 8 27 Chase mode With Micro 9 17 2 7 CLR Key ese Sai in Ros ere REPE 4
54. Enter setup mode by pressing the SETUP key followed by F3 to select the VITC setup options menu Use the NEXT LAST and keys to set the correct options from the menu 10 31 Option Cards F3 VITC Options Group Select Reader Mode Table Chapter 10 7 F3 Setup Options KEY MENU VITC Options SUB MENU RANGE 0 Group Select Off A B C F3 1 Reader Mode Auto Fixed Use the group select option to allocate the VITC reader to a specific Micro Lynx machine This should be set to the same machine A C that the video transport is connected to Make sure that a BNC to BNC cable is connected between the video out jack on the video transport and the video in jack on the Micro Lynx VITC Card Auto Automatic mode will always find and select the lowest pair of matching lines If this pair of lines is lost for any reason then the VITC Card will scan for the next matching pair of lines on the tape If the VITC board finds another pair of lines then it will automatically switch to the new lines and display the warning message VITC Lines changed This mode of operation is extremely effective when there is only one pair of continuous lines on the tape If the VITC on tape is discontinuous or because of the video editing process there are several pairs of discontinuous VITC lines on tape then fixed reader mode should be used Fixed In fixed mode a single pair of VITC lines can be selected When a pair of lines
55. Frame 4 The VSG is selected off the system reference is not set to Ext Vid and there is a released transport type in the group a VTR or DTR Procedure VIDEO GEN LED flashing Verify system reference setup 1 SETUP TCG 0 Setup TCG options Selection System Ref IntVar Enter the TCG options menu 2 Setup options Selection System Ref ExtVid Press or until ExtVid is selected 3 SETUP VIDEO GEN LED turns off VITC LED This LED indicates VITC reader card status If the LED is on the reader is detecting valid VITC data matching line pair from the selected video machine Micro Lynx 06 22 00 8 59 Keyboard Controller Digital Audio Clock Generator LEDs 8 60 IN 1600 1920 OUT 1600 1920 IN 1470 1764 OUT 1470 1764 NON STD IN The Digital Audio Clock Generator LEDs indicate the status of the ACG card The LEDs directly reflect the parameters that have been set in the ACG options under the Setup menu There are two rows of LEDs the upper row is for ACG inputs and the lower row is for ACG outputs This LED indicates that an ACG input sample rate ratio of either 1600 samples per frame at 30 Hz or 1920 samples per frame at 25 Hz has been set This is a nominal sample rate of 48 000 Ks s This LED should be read in conjunction with the NON STD and LEDs If this LED flashes it indicates that the ACG Card has not locked to the incoming signal This LED indicates
56. Mediasound for positional synchronization MTC can be transmitted from either the Micro Lynx MAC or MIDI I F ports Set the appropriate MIDI port to Output MTC Procedure 1 SETUP MIDI Setup MIDI Selection MIDI OUT Jack MTC Select MIDI port setup 2 Last Next Setup MIDI Selection I F Out Jack MTC 3 Last Next Setup MIDI Selection MAC OUT Jack MTC Select the port you wish to use for MTC 4 4 Use to select MTC as the MIDI output 5 SETUP Exit Setup mode 9 21 Advanced Features MIDI Data Source Setup The Micro Lynx is switched by Mediasound to transmit the time code type frame rate and sample rate with the over the MIDI port The correct port must be selected Set the MIDI Data Source to the same MIDI port that was selected in the previous step Procedure 1 SETUP MIDI Setup MIDI Selection MIDI OUT Jack MTC Select MIDI port setup 2 Last Next Setup MIDI Selection MIDI Data Src MAC Jack Select the MIDI Data Source option 3 H4 Setup MIDI Selection MIDI Data Src I F Jack Use to select chosen port for MIDI Data Source 4 SETUP Exit Setup mode System Reference Setup The Micro Lynx system reference is used to set the reference time base for all of the equipment in the system If you are using a video tape transport that is connected to an external video sync generator connect the sync source to the Micro Lynx and select Ext Vid as the system refere
57. Program Macro VITC Reader Press the SETUP key to enter Setup mode Next select the category that you wish to modify After modifying the selected option exit Setup mode by pressing SETUP a second time Each item in a particular menu can be accessed either directly by Micro Lynx 06 22 00 ACG ACG OPTION 0 NOM S RATE OUT 32 000 Ks s 44 056 Ks s 44 100 Ks s 47 952 Ks s 48 000 Ks s VAR RATIO OUT TE OFF L ON 2 VAR RATIO OUT L 85 115 100 0096 OVERSAMPLE OUT 128 192 256 384 4 NOM S RATE IN 32 000 Ks s 44 056 Ks s 44 100 Ks s 47 952 Ks s 48 000 Ks s 5 VAR RATIO IN Tr OFF L ON 6 VAR RATIO IN mE LAST NEXT 7 OVERSAMPLE IN 128 192 256 384 OFF 8 REFERENCE IN AES EBU L CLOCK IN BNC G4 EDIT EDIT OPTION El EDIT Q C DISABLE RETRY STOP EDITS ROLLAS H MAST SLAVE 5 L ALL SLAVES LAST NEXT EVENT SELECT GPI OPTIONS 1 GPI 1 NORMAL AUTOSET REC TALLY EDIT REC REH TALLY EDIT REH LOCK TALLY 2 GPI 2 0 MODE NORMAL AUTOSET REC TALLY EDIT REC REH TALLY EDIT REH LOCK TALLY 1 BEEP MODE OFF L on 2 BEEP SPACING L 10 30 20 3 LAST BEEP MUTED L 4 LAST NEXT NOTE ALL KEYS ARE IN BRACKETS FACTORY DEFAULTS ARE ITALICIZED L 87 5 112 5 100 0095 Keyboard Controller selecting it numeri
58. So for every hour by the clock on the wall the time code is 108 frames short Just a few frames off might disastrously make your lead guitarist end his solo two chords early To correct this a time code format called Drop Frame DF was developed Drop frame skips the first two frame counts in each minute with the exception of minutes 00 10 20 30 40 and 50 to force the time code to match the clock time Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Film Appendix Film is our final consideration It has run at a frame rate of 24 frames per second ever since Thomas Edison invented it Although this is a non standard time code it is sometimes used in the field Different Frame Rate Formats Micro Lynx 06 22 00 In summary the important thing to remember is that SMPTE conveys two pieces of information tape speed and tape position Frame rate is the speed at which the code will run and frame type 80 DF 25 24 is the way in which frame positions are counted 30 Thirty frames per second can be drop frame DF or non drop frame If drop frame is selected then the actual frame count is reduced by 108 frames per hour 25 Twenty five frames per second is the European standard 24 Twenty four frames per second is the film standard Table Appendix A 1 Frame Rate Formats Counting Counting Method Displayed Time Application Rate Hz Frames per Second Accuracy Motion pictures and film 25 25 frame Real Time EBU standard for European television
59. Sync source or VTR DTR Video Sync input if TimeLine VSG option installed Synthesizer keyboard or drum machine Computer interface computer SU to Studio 9 pin D System Unit GPI Mute and Lock to Console Mon system SU to AES EBU 9 pin D System Unit ABS EBU to Digital Audio Equipment I O SU ACG to Workstation BNC Customer System Unit Word Clock amp Oversample Clock outputs to Digital Audio Workstation or DTR SU VITC to Video System Unit VTR output and Video Mon equipment input Micro Lynx 3 4 06 22 00 Installation Connect the Transports and the System Unit ATR ATR l TC OUT CONTROL TC OUT N CONTROL 8523242 SYSTEMTALLY C AES EBU r DIO CLOCK GENERATOR MAC 0 8 OUT WORD OUT CLOCK IN o IN KEYBOARD Ld RDR3 TRANSPORT 3 MIK042B POWER SUPPLY EXT SYNC Figure Chapter 3 2 Connect the Transports to the System Unit Each transport must be directly connected to the Micro Lynx System Unit Procedure 1 Connect each transport 40 pin transport cable to the System Unit a Connect the Transport 1 port to the remote or synchronizer port on the first machine b Connect the Transport 2 port to the remote or synchronizer port on the second machine c Ifthe card is installed connect the Transport 3 port to the remote or synchronizer port on the third machine 2 Connect the time
60. VITC Card Slide the VITC Card against the back panel so that the VITC IN and VITC THRU jacks are seated in the appropriate cutouts in the back panel Insert the washers and nuts onto the BNC connectors Insert the four phillips screws through the VITC Card into the chassis and tighten See Figure 10 18 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Operation Instructions Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Option Cards MIKO89A Figure Chapter 10 18 Securing the VITC Card 10 Insert the Option Card cable connector into J1 on the VITC Card 11 Connect the end of the cable into J3 on the Main Board The unused connectors on the left of the cable will lie in the open area unless you have option cards installed 12 Replace the top cover and the six phillips screws 13 Power up the System Unit The Micro Lynx will recognize the VITC Card on power up and the VITC LED on the System Unit OPTION Section will turn on Operation of the VITC Reader Card is extremely simple and once configured operates transparently to the user When a VITC Option Card is installed in the Micro Lynx SU the card is automatically detected by the system The VITC LED on the front panel of the system unit and the F3 LED on the Keyboard will come on to indicate that the VITC Option Card is present and correctly communicating To configure the VITC Card the line scan mode and group assignment need to be selected Use Setup VITC to specify the correct settings for your system
61. When the Micro Lynx is in group mode pressing the machine key A C TCQ selects Status mode and automatically recalls the error register The error register contains the error between the master and slave tape position in frames see the GRP key description under Function Select keys for more information The error register display is programmed to show the most relevant information at all times There are occasions when the offset error display has no meaning The following table shows the error register status in each transport mode Table Chapter 8 14 Error Register Display Mode STOP PLAY Rewind FWD Solo Resolve error in subframes Group Resolve error Mast machine Stat master Resolve error Mast machine Stat slave Distance from Mast Resolve error in Distance from Mast park ahead subframes Offset err The Micro Lynx automatically displays subframe error when the error is less than 1 frame For example 2 09 55 00 Err 0 01 When the displayed error is greater than 1 frame the sub frame component is suppressed and shows only as x 2 09 55 00 Err 23 8 47 Keyboard Controller 7 IN 8 OUT 9 DUR ASM 8 48 DUR When not used as a 7 in calculator mode the IN key provides ac cess to the In Point register The in point register may be accessed in store recall and trim operations Press CLR and IN simultaneously to clear the in point register The
62. addresses It is also called Sync Lock The Pilot output signal is a sinusoidally shaped output which is always two times the frame rate of the time code that is being referenced or generated Activities that take place after the raw footage has been shot for a video program or motion picture Includes video editing and a number of audio processes such as ADR Foley and mixing The initial stages in the making of a film or television program which includes the shooting of raw footage and recording of production audio Random Access Memory The module s configuration parameters are stored in battery backed RAM And recalled each time the unit is turned on Frame rate or speed See Frame Rate or Speed Reference source The signal that is used to determine the rate that the generator and synchronizer will run at The reference source can be thought of as the system time base The reference source can be internal crystal external video MAINS or external Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Register Reshape Resolving RLB Rollback S PDIF Sequencer Serial Serial Port Setup Mode Shuttle SMPTE SOLO Speed Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Appendix pilot tone or the time code reader VSO The generator register is the module s memory buffer that holds numeric time code values that are entered or captured Each synchronizer also has reader sync point offset user bit and error registers The output signal is the same
63. as the input signal but it has been reshaped with correct rise time values and a fixed voltage output This type of output does not correct for bit or timing errors A technique for regulating the play speed of a tape machine by matching the rate of pulses recorded on tape with a pulse rate from another stable source or a master tape machine See Rollback The rollback function is used to rewind machines by a predetermined amount from the current position The default rollback time is 15 seconds A consumer standard similar to AES EBU for the high speed transmission of digital audio data Jointly developed by Sony and Philips A device that can record performance data for synthesizers and other electronic instruments and then on playback pass that data on to the instruments so that they ll play what has been recorded Modern sequencers use MIDI as their communications protocol A type of computer interface where all data is sent down a single wire or pair of wires one bit at a time Examples of serial interfaces are RS422 amp RS232 The physical computer connection through which serial data is transmitted and received The process of defining the user selected operational parameters such as defining a specific transport or lifter defeat mode Fast wind Fast forward or Rewind Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers An industry standards committee The group responsible for developing SMPTE time code Litera
64. at theme park attractions and trigger flashpot explosions Its uses are many and they will continue to grow as time goes on HOWEVER the basics of SMPTE will never change Now that you know them you re ready for the future Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Table Appendix 2 Setup Quick Reference Guide ACG ACG OPTION H 0 NOM S RATE OUT 32 000 Ks s 44 056 Ks s 44 100 Ks s 47 952 Ks s 48 000 Ks s VAR RATIO OUT OFF on VAR RATIO OUT L 85 115 100 00 OVERSAMPLE OUT 128 192 256 384 NOM S RATE IN 32 000 Ks s 44 056 Ks s 44 100 Ks s 47 952 Ks s 48 000 Ks s VAR RATIO IN tT OFF L on VAR RATIO IN L 87 5 112 5 100 0096 7 OVERSAMPLE IN 128 192 256 384 OFF REFERENCE IN T AES EBU L CLOCK IN BNC 4 T N T LAST NEXT T A 4 4 T oi x EDIT EDIT OPTION F 0 EDIT Q C _ F DISABLE i F RETRY STOP EDITS ROLL AS T MAST SLAVE L ALL SLAVES LAST NEXT EVENT SELECT OPTIONS L 1 GPI 1 NORMAL AUTOSET REC TALLY EDIT REC REH TALLY EDIT REH LOCK TALLY L 2 GPI 2 0 MODE NORMAL AUTOSET REC TALLY EDIT REC REH TALLY EDIT REH LOCK TALLY 1 BEEP MODE TF OFF L on 2 BEEP SPACING L 10 30 20 3 LAST BEEP T MUTED Lon ILAST NEXT NOTE ALL KEYS ARE IN BRACKETS 1 FACTORY DEFAU
65. available line pair with matching time codes In fixed scan the user specifies the lines for reading The Keyboard shows a clear display of all lines present and lines selected to assist VITC reader configuration 10 27 Option Cards The VITC Option Card also updates the output of the time code and MIDI time code generators in Jog Shuttle and Still modes This is particularly useful when using digital audio workstations that can read time code or MTC in still and slow motion modes Specific applications include spotting sound effects and capturing frame accurate video positions The VITC Card is an essential addition to the Micro Lynx system for audio and video applications Installation Instructions Note If your Micro Lynx System Unit Serial Number is 1024 or higher you have new metal work The new metal work does not require the Option Card Bracket Please turn to the instructions for new metalwork later in this section for instruction on installing the VITC Card 1 Install the Option Card 5 Bracket 10 28 Turn off the power and place the Micro Lynx System Unit on a static safe workstation Ground yourself and the workstation anti static mat On the back of the System Unit remove cover labeled VITC READER Remove the six phillips screws securing the top cover to the System Unit Position the System Unit so that the front panel faces you and remove the top cover The Back Panel PCB is located at the top bac
66. code a VITC reader card will permit frame accurate positioning in still or stop mode Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Applications Basic Micro Lynx ATR ATR CONTROL TIME CODE CONTROL TIME CODE MICRO LYNX SYSTEM UNIT POWER SUPPLY KEYBOARD CONTROLLER Figure Chapter 2 1 Basic Micro Lynx Typical Uses Micro Lynx adds multiple audio machine control and synchronization to a basic studio setup The Micro Lynx provides a fast convenient way to perform time code reading time code generation and synchronization It controls activities performed frequently such as locating entering offsets slipping one tape machine against another and doing automated edits Considerations The Micro Lynx has transport selection of over 120 machines The battery backup stores all setup parameters so your studio configuration will never be lost Micro Lynx 06 22 00 2 3 Applications Micro Lynx with a VTR ATR VTR CONTROL TIME CODE CONTROL TIME CODE MICRO LYNX SYSTEM UNIT VSG CED TIME CODE N GENERATOR POWER SUPPLY Lo x es es cs 4 KEYBOARD CONTROLLER Figure Chapter 2 2 Micro Lynx with a VTR Typical Uses Audio for video The Micro Lynx is compatible with numerous video transports that support external synchronization including s
67. code cables a Connect the Transport 1 time code output cable to the System Unit time code RDR 1 input b Connect the Transport 2 time code output cable to the System Unit time code RDR 2 input Micro Lynx 06 22 00 3 5 Installation c Ifthe M3 option card is installed connect the Transport 3 time code output cable to the System Unit time code RDR 3 input Note If the transport being controlled is a Sony RS422 machine control protocol a separate LTC connection is not required The Micro Lynx will use Serial Time Code on the RS422 connector to synchronize the machine 3 For video or digital audio transports connect the video sync reference a Connect the System Unit Video Reference VID REF connector to the same video sync reference as the VTR DTR b Ifthe TimeLine VSG option is installed connect the System Unit Video Reference VID REF connector to the Video Sync input on the VTR DTR machine Note The Micro Lynx VID REF BNC connector is used for either input or output of video reference signals If external video reference is selected then the internal VSG card is inhibited It is not possible to damage the VSG card by connecting an external video reference signal Table Chapter 3 2 Cable Check List Between Equipment SU and Transports 40 pin System Unit to each transport remote or synchronizer connector inputs and outputs time code output connector SU to EXT Video BNC System Unit to Video Reference
68. ee 7 11 Audio Clock Generator entente teen nius net uy Rea Nune UNE tag causaduocsuyesunvenasdioeta 1 12 ra cdi ea diva NU rara aM na 7 13 gno RC 7 18 Chapter 8 Keyboard Controller c eee eee eee eee eee eee eaaet 8 1 M M O v 8 1 Micro Lynx X 06 22 00 Table of Contents Display 8 4 Normal Operating 1 1 8 6 Calc latorDisplay 6 AE SIRE SEEN IEEE 8 7 Register 02 222000 a aa a 8 8 setup Displayasz SAI M LE 8 9 Prompt amp Error Display 8 10 Transport Controls aig deuil iUd rios eei LAE T 8 11 Jog Shuttle ce oe ettet ete tee tet ete Us 8 16 Jog Shuttle Wheel eere re viro e devi 8 16 cae iy 8 16 JOGUNEXT 2 aem tis ette eese HF AA RES 8 17 vla TR ape 8 17 D vice Select Keys oco tp thes ots cas atonal cite el vette 8 18 SETUP etern
69. film This means you can shuttle to the exact spot on tape where that gunshot occurs and replace the existing blast with a more convincing sample one the sound effects engineer just acquired Think of what that means the master machine can find ANYTHING on a tape and all slave machines will chase the master to that very same spot At this point we re a long way from just locking one faceless sine wave with another and rolling from the top We ve moved into the realm of position accuracy Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Anatomy of a SMPTE Frame A SMPTE frame or word consists of 80 bits that convey SMPTE s message of hours minutes seconds and frames Each bit is rep resented by a binary 1 or 0 that is specifically encoded for recording onto tape The method used is called biphase encoding This coding reverses the signal polarity halfway through a bit to represent a l and leaves the bit polarity unchanged to represent a A continuous string of these 80 bit words is recorded linearly along the tape to form the time code Let s look at the jobs the bits perform Each frame is broken up into 16 groups of 4 bits and a 16 bit sync word Eight 4 bit groups are assigned to the hours minutes seconds and frame number Eight 4 bit groups are user bits They are reserved for infor mation such as ID reel numbers session dates or another time code number The remaining bits form a sync word to pr
70. has been reset transports are not yet assigned and No Transport is displayed Tran C Not Available Ref IntFix Displays transport type selected if M3 option is installed otherwise displays Not Available Displays currently selected system reference Hold the GRP key and add groups in order of priority The Micro Lynx default is group mode When no machines are selected to the group a prompt telling you how to select machines to the group is displayed F1 LED F2 LED on F3 LED on REF LOCK LED on GRP LED flashing A LED flashing B LED flashing TCG LED flashing The Keyboard LEDs light The C LED will flash if the M3 card has been installed The F3 LED will come on if a VITC Reader Card has been installed Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Getting Started Selecting a transport if selections have been made jump to Step 9 4 SETUP TRAN A SETUP LED flashes TRAN LED on A LED on Select the setup mode Each transport must be identified by manufacturer and machine type Setup AUTO Serial TRANSPORT Tran The default transport selection is displayed You have entered the transport select mode 5 NEXT Setup AMPEX ATR 100 Tran Using the NEXT or LAST key select the manufacturer of the machine connected to the A Transport 1 port For this example select Ampex 6 Setup AMPEX ATR 124 Tran Press and keys to select the machine type Refer to the Cable Reference Guide in the A
71. have the ACG Card already installed remove the card from the bracket before installing the M3 Card 10 Tilt and slide the left side of the card into the groove along the bottom of the Micro Lynx Side Panel 11 As the card slides into the groove lie it flat in the chassis 054 Figure Chapter 10 4 Installation of M3 Card 12 Slide the M3 Card against the back panel so that the TRANSPORT connector and RDR jack are seated in the appropriate cutouts in the back panel 13 Insert two phillips screws through the M3 Card into the option card bracket standoffs and tighten 14 If the ACG Card was removed reinstall the card Micro Lynx 06 22 00 10 9 Option Cards Install the M3 Option Card New Metal Work 10 10 15 Insert the second connector of the Option Card Cable into J1 on the M3 Card and connect the other end of the cable into J3 on the Main Board The unused connectors will lie in the open area in the System Unit unless you have option cards installed 16 Replace the top cover and the six phillips screws 17 Connect the transport cable and reader cables between the Micro Lynx and third transport 18 Power up the System Unit The M3 LED on the System Unit OPTION Section should turn on 19 Press SETUP TRAN C to select the type of transport to control 1 Turn off the power and place the Micro Lynx System Unit on a static safe workstation Ground yourself and the works
72. in a given time interval just as an automobile s tachometer indicates how fast an engine is turning When playing a tape with pilot tone back the sine wave on tape is compared with a reference sine wave coming from the wall current or some other guaranteed signal If the tape slows down the frequency of the pilot tone or the number of cycles that tick by each second will decrease If the tape speeds up the frequency will increase A controlling device tied into the tape machine s capstan motor senses the difference between the reference tone and the pilot tone on tape and varies the speed of the tape machine motor to make the two match up again This process of matching tape machine speed to a stable reference is called resolving The two sets of sine waves are brought in phase with one another so they match up perfectly peak for peak trough for trough Which is why this is sometimes called phase locked IN PHASE 60 Hz 60 Hz SMPTE004A Micro Lynx 06 22 00 A 7 However There Is Problem Figure Appendix A 5 Two Sine Wave Signals in Phase Just as pilot tone on one tape machine is made to match the ref erence source it can also be made to match pilot tone on a second master tape machine Thus pilot tone can be used to synchronize the speed of the two tape machines One sine wave looks exactly like another While the slave machine can phase lock with the master it has no
73. incoming master machine s time code As the Micro Lynx Keyboard controls cannot be used the deck plate or machine re mote transport keys must be used Whenever the time code source is played slave machine chase and lock will be initiated A slave offset may be necessary to position the slave machine s correctly Please note that the automated editing capabilities of the Micro Lynx Keyboard will not function since the Micro Lynx is not remotely controlling the master machine Micro Lynx 6 20 06 22 00 Chapter 7 System Unit Micro Lynx System Unit options COMPUTER KEYBOARD ES DATA rs ME CORE vib COMPUTER AUDIO CLOCK GENERATOR 3 2 MEINE RDR1 RDR2 auxin auxour N WF BURN AESIEBU OUT WORD OUT CLOCK IN 99955060099 do ur tri POWER VIDEO REF TRANSPORT 1 TRANSPORT 2 KEYBOARD THR TRANSPORT 3 BACK PANEL cea Figure Chapter 7 1 System Unit Introduction The System Unit contains the main processors software and control circuitry for Micro Lynx It oversees all of the operator selected operations communications between equipment signal conversion and generation It also contains all of the stored transport specific data conversion tables formulas and time codes for performing operations Micro Lynx 06 22 00 7 1 System Unit Front Panel Indicators and Switches Micro Lynx System Unit MIKO11A Figure Ch
74. is on in combination with one of the previous two input LEDs it indicates that the selected nominal sample rate ratio is being varied There is no specific indication when a 32 000 Ks s input is being varied 10 17 Option Cards NON STD OUT IN OUT 10 18 If only this LED is it indicates that output sample rate ratio of either 1066 2 3 samples per frame at 30 Hz or 1280 samples per frame at 25 Hz has been set This is a nominal sample rate of 32 000 Ks s If this LED flashes it indicates that the ACG output is not locked If the LED is on in combination with one of the previous two out put LEDs it indicates that the selected nominal sample rate ratio is being varied There is no specific indication when a 32 000 Ks s output is being varied This LED operates in combination with the previous input LEDs and indicates that the selected input sample rate ratio has been automatically pulled up or down by 0 146 for example from 48 000 to 47 952 or from 44 100 to 44 056 When the nominal sample rate is selected the ACG Card will automatically adjust the sample rate ratio by 0 1 if the sample rate requested requires a pull up because the system frame rate is running at 29 97 Hz instead of 30 25 24 Hz Or it will automati cally adjust the sample rate ratio by 0 1 if the sample rate requires a pull down because the system frame rate is running at 30 25 24 Hz instead of 29 97 Hz This LED oper
75. is Right for Your Application 6 2 SMPTE Time Code in the Audio only Studio essen 6 3 Striping the Tapes eere 6 4 SMPTE Time Code in the Integrated Video Audio Production Studio 6 5 Recovering from Bad Time Code and Time Code 6 6 Jain SV TIC FUBcbloDB s t e ut e ted ee dissi n dt dec s a 6 8 Play backs Features oerte etse ete 6 8 Solo Mode Single Machine Control Functions 6 8 Using Cue vetet Ett o tete enel 6 9 petting the Cue RURSUS UR es 6 9 Using the Cue Registers eie ue et eod re Ts 6 9 Group Mode Multiple Machine 6 10 Cr at a ne ie we 6 10 Changing the Master Machine 6 11 Resetting the Group cccccsssssssssssccccccccccussssscecccseecssuessseccceseeeeauenseeccceseeeauuanssesseeeecess 6 11 Machine Offsets sse eode ime tem ee e eie eo ax eui 6 12 Setting the bir mre RI IC 6 12 Machine ooo e es 6 12 Adjustine the PreR l Erie etcetera otn RO RD IO 6 13 Adjusting Postroll
76. is no longer reset by a CLR TRAN Lock Threshold The time code window or threshold in subframes 0 50 sfr that the machine has to be within before the lock delay starts running The lock window setting can be adjusted when time to lock may be more critical than lock accuracy This can be used to fix problems with unstable machines bad or misframed time code or to cause a Digital or Video tape transport to release with a looser lock tolerance The setting is used in conjunction with the Lock Delay setting Lock Delay The time in frames 0 50 fr that the machine has to be continuously in the lock window before it is considered that the transport is locked and the Micro Lynx will show lock status It should be noted that very short lock delays could result in the machine locking in the wrong place Park Window The park window in frames 0 10 fr for video and film transports only This is used to accurately cue a video transport to a specific location If the park window is set to zero then the transport will respond to a 1 frame locate The video park window setting is set for all VTRs and is not reset when a different video machine is selected for that group A C The EVNT key is used to access the Micro Lynx GPI relays The GPI relays can be made to operate or follow several internal time code registers The default setting for the GPIs is Auto set In this mode the relays follow the edit in point When the in point is changed
77. is used in conjunction with the Lock Delay setting The time in frames 0 50 fr that the machine has to be continuously in the lock window before it is considered that the transport is locked and the Micro Lynx will show lock status It should be noted that very short lock delays could result in the machine locking in the wrong place The park window in frames 0 10 fr for video and film transports only This is used to accurately cue a video transport to a specific location If the park window is set to zero then the transport will respond to a 1 frame locate The video park window setting is set for all VTRs and is not reset when a different video machine is selected for that group A C Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Option Cards M3 Card Initialization Procedure 1 SOLO C SETUP TRAN SETUP LED flashes TRAN LED turns on LAST LED turns on NEXT LED turns on 4 LED turns on LED turns on C LED Setup AUTO Serial TRANSPORT Tran You may access the Setup menus at any time Go to the transport selection menu If the Transport Option selection menu was accessed last press TRAN again to access the Transport selection menu 2 NEXT Setup Ampex ATR 100 Tran Using NEXT or LAST select the manufacturer of the machine connected to the C Transport 3 port For this example select Ampex 3 H Setup Ampex ATR 124 Tran Press and to select your machine type Refer to the table of machines
78. issues an immediate Stop command to all transports on the system regardless of group status solo status or transport mode All machines will stop This key is used as a panic button to stop unexpected transport operations The ROLLBACK key rewinds the selected machine or group by a predetermined amount The default rollback value is 15 seconds The rollback time can be changed by entering a new value then pressing the STO and ROLLBACK keys 8 11 Keyboard Controller REPLAY EDIT The ROLLBACK key can also be used as a reverse play key for transports that will play backwards To change the ROLLBACK key to PLAY REV enter the Key options menu by pressing SETUP followed by ROLLBACK Use the and keys to select the desired function The REPLAY key is used in conjunction with the EDIT key to replay the current edit Pressing EDIT followed by REPLAY cues the selected machines in the group to cue to the current edit preroll position and commence an edit replay sequence The REPLAY key has an associated replay register that stores the time code when the PLAY key was last pressed Pressing REPLAY causes a locate to the time code when the PLAY key was last pressed Remember that pressing PLAY while the machines are playing can be used to update the replay register and set a new replay register time code The EDIT key initiates a Micro Lynx edit sequence It is used in combina
79. off the power and place the Micro Lynx System Unit on a Card Bracket With New static safe workstation Ground yourself and the workstation Metal Work anti static mat 2 On the back of the System Unit remove the cover labeled AUDIO CLOCK GENERATOR 3 Remove the six phillips screws securing the top cover to the System Unit 4 Position the System Unit so that the front panel faces you and remove the top cover Micro Lynx 10 24 06 22 00 Option Cards 5 Remove the L shaped bracket supporting the Back Panel PCB Relocate this bracket to the left side of the chassis as shown in Detail A and secure using the phillips screw supplied in the ACG Option Installation Kit See Figure 10 12 RELOCATION OF L BRACKET SEE DETAIL A fl MIK090A DETAIL A LEFT SIDE BRACKET ORIENTATION Figure Chapter 10 12 Relocation of L Bracket 6 Remove the M3 Card if installed Remove the nut on the left threaded stud securing the front panel to the chassis 7 Hold the ACG Option Card bracket diagonally across the chassis with the cable opening to the front Set the front of the bracket in place on the threaded stud inside the chassis Slide the bracket under the left edge of the Back Panel PCB and the VITC Card if installed 8 Insert and tighten the screw removed from the back panel and from the Back Panel PCB Replace the nut on the front panel threaded stud to secure the bracket See Figure 10 13 MIKO91A
80. register key on the calculator keypad to select a different register to trim The following keys are also active with TRIM CLR Clears any number from the data entry area of the display and exits trim mode STO Initiates a Store command and prompts for a register to store to In setup mode the TRIM key is used as the LAST key This key steps backwards to the previous item in a menu In the Jog mode the wheel is used to bump a transport forward clockwise or backward counter clockwise a small amount each time that it is turned If you turn the wheel continuously the tape will scrub past the heads with a velocity proportional to how fast you turn the wheel In setup mode the JOG key is used as the NEXT key This key steps forward to the next item in a menu In the Shuttle mode turning the wheel clockwise causes the selected machines to move forward with a velocity that is proportional to the amount that you rotate the wheel from its starting position Likewise turning the wheel counter clockwise initiates variable speed backwards motion The Shuttle speed may be varied from a slow crawl to several times normal play Speed Generally speaking the Shuttle mode is a controlled speed mode only on video transports Most audio tape machines do not have a variable speed shuttle mode so the shuttle function is implemented by rapidly toggling between rewind and fast forward The actual velocity is determined by th
81. sequentially by pressing the LAST and NEXT keys Step through the menu options by pressing the and keys The setup key options are provided in a table at the end of this chapter and in Appendix A selections and associated numbers are listed If power to the Micro Lynx is turned off ALL settings are saved The last settings entered will be restored when the Micro Lynx is turned back on The following is a typical Micro Lynx Setup Menu Table Chapter 4 2 Micro Lynx Setup Menu KEY MENU SUB MENU RANGE System 0 LED Brightness 20 100 100 Options 1 DSPL Contrast 30 100 70 2 DSPL Timeout Off 1 5 10 20 min Never 3 Jog Speed 1 10 5 01 10 01 5 Trim Subframe 01 25 01 6 Port Select 422 ES MAC ES 422 Off Table 4 3 is a complete list of all of the Micro Lynx setup options The table is in quick reference form that excludes any detailed explanations of each option For a more comprehensive explanation of each of the menus see the Keyboard Controller chapter Press the SETUP key to enter setup mode Next press the key for the category that you wish to modify After modifying the selected option exit setup mode by pressing SETUP a second time Each menu in a particular category can be accessed either directly by selecting it numerically or sequentially by pressing the LAST and NEXT keys The individual menu options are stepped through by pressing the
82. that an ACG output sample rate ratio of either 1600 samples per frame at 30 Hz or 1920 samples per frame at 25 Hz has been set It is a nominal sample rate of 48 000 Ks s This LED should be read in conjunction with the NON STD and LEDs If this LED flashes it indicates that the ACG output is not locked This LED indicates that an ACG input sample rate ratio of either 1470 samples per frame at 30 Hz or 1764 samples per frame at 25 Hz has been set This is a nominal sample rate of 44 100 Ks s This LED should be read in conjunction with the NON STD and LEDs If this LED flashes it indicates that the ACG Card has not locked to the incoming signal This LED indicates that an ACG output sample rate ratio of either 1470 samples per frame at 30 Hz or 1764 samples per frame at 25 Hz has been set This is a nominal sample rate of 44 100 Ks s This LED should be read in conjunction with the NON STD and LEDs If this LED flashes it indicates that the ACG output is not locked If only this LED is on it indicates that an ACG input sample rate ratio of either 1066 2 3 samples per frame at 30 Hz or 1280 samples per frame at 25 Hz has been set This is a nominal sample rate of 32 000 Ks s If this LED flashes it indicates that the ACG Card has not locked to the incoming signal If the LED is on in combination with one of the previous two input LEDs it indicates that the nominal sample rate ratio is being varied Ifitis on with 1600
83. the play command is issued Time code generation is selected in Setup mode under TCG options When striping time code for the first time use the preprogrammed macros which automatically set up the Micro Lynx to generate time code MACRO 9 and macro MACRO 8 to exit time code generation mode example is presented in the Getting Started section SETUP e TCG Press SETUP followed by TCG to enter the TCG options menu This menu has seven headings that set the system reference time code types generator mode aux output signal and the video sync generator Pressing a calculator key 0 6 gives direct access to the various menu headings Use the TCG options to configure the Micro Lynx system for your particular application The selections are as follows Table Chapter 8 9 TCG Setup Menu MENU SUB MENU RANGE VSO Master ACG 1 System Spd Code 24Hz 24 25Hz 25 PAL 29 97Hz DF 29 97Hz 30 NTSC 30Hz DF 30Hz 30 2 Varispeed 87 5 112 5 100 00 Jog Shtl Wheel 0 1 0 1 3 TCG Group Mode Play Run Play Mute Play Wind 4 TCG Still Mode Off On 5 Aux Output Sel Pilot Reshape 1 Reshape 2 Reshape 3 GPI 2 Beep 6 Video Sync Gen Off On The Micro Lynx generates MIDI Time Code MTC locked to the system reference with the same time code value as the SMPTE time code generator When the TCG LED is on it indicates that MTC is being generated or will be generated when a play comma
84. then the GPI execution point changes with it If a GPI closure is required at a particular time code value then set the GPI mode to Normal and enter a GPI in point time code value The GPI will then always operate at that time code value Each GPI has a Preroll and Duration register The Preroll register is used to advance the closure time to allow for slow start of externally triggered devices The Duration can be set to suit the 8 25 Keyboard Controller 8 26 LIST MEM closure type required Press EVNT followed by a 1 or 2 to select the respective GPI The following transport keys are used to affect GPI operation STOP Takes the GPI offline PLAY Sets the GPI to ready or active REH Will rehearse the closure SETUP EVNT Press SETUP followed by EVNT to enter the EVNT Setup option Select the GPI number to enter the menu GPI 1 only has a mode select option GPI 2 has four headings that define the event process GPI 2 can be set to operate as a dialog beep or talent cue output by setting options 1 3 Table Chapter 8 7 EVENT Setup Menu KEY MENU SUE MENU EVENT Select GPI Options 1 GPI 1 Normal AutoSet Rec Tally Edit Rec Reh Tally Edit Reh Lock Tally 2 GPI2 0 Mode Normal Autoset Rec Tally Edit Rec Reh Tally Edit Reh Lock Tally 1 Beep Mode Off On 2 Beep Spacing 10 30 20 3 Last Beep This function is not currently in use It will be used in the future for
85. time code placed within the video frame rather than the Longitudinal Time Code LTC which is recorded on the Cue Aux or second audio track The VITC card automatically switches between the two modes depending on the speed of the transport and whether VITC is present Video transport positioning is much more accurate when using VITC since the LTC drops out when the tape is shuttled very slowly without the VITC card the Micro Lynx must monitor the capstan control pulses as the LTC drops out Recovering from Bad Time Code and Time Code Dropouts 6 6 Before starting a recording session where prestriped tapes are to be used it s always a good idea to spot check the quality of the time code by locating the machines to several sections of the tape to check that there are no gross problems with the time code To locate a specific machine to a specific time code point put it into solo press SOLO and the machine letter A B or C Press CLR and then enter the time code number that the transport should locate to Press LOC locate The machine will then fast forward or rewind to the time code position that was entered minus the time set in the preroll register 1 PRE Spot checking the prestriped time code can minimize the chances of encountering locking problems later in the session Of course if the tapes were recorded at other facilities and you will be mixing them down then you may be stuck with substandard quality time code
86. to confirm this action Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Getting Started ENTR SHTL Holding Memory unless you press and hold CLR key within 1 second Lamp test Holding memory 5 CLR Lamp test Clearing memory CLR TRAN 6 SOLO amp A SOLO A gt 1 00 00 00 0 Select Solo mode Select the machine to reset 7 CLR TRAN Transport Clearing Now The selected machine is reset to factory default parameters Remember It is not necessary to reselect the transport Customize the Micro Lynx Setup The Micro Lynx has a comprehensive setup procedure that allows the system to be customized precisely for a particular mode transport or application The setup options are organized by function in a menu type format in which there are currently 14 option categories Key ACG SYS TRAN EVNT MEM TCG GRP LOOP RDY TRKS KEY EDIT MACRO Audio Clock Generator System Transport Events Memory Time Code Generator amp System Reference Group Loop Record Ready Tracks Rollback REH REC Operation Edit Program Macro VITC Reader Press the SETUP key to enter setup mode Next select the category that you wish to modify After modifying the selected Micro Lynx 06 22 00 4 23 Getting Started Setup 4 24 option exit setup mode by pressing SETUP a second time Each menu in a particular category can be accessed either directly by selecting it numerically or
87. track and pressing 9 puts the machine into the assemble edit mode To select additional audio tracks simply press the appropriate number pad key If more than eight channels of audio are available on a machine the jog wheel can be used to scan through the tracks and the and keys used to select or disable record ready on each track Using the Last and Next keys will also step through the tracks and CLR will change the track ready status back to safe Chapter 8 Keyboard Controller gives more details on using the record ready function To ensure that all tracks on a transport are in the safe mode select that transport using the TRKS and transport letter keys and then press and hold CLR while pressing the TRKS key This will clear any track enables putting all tracks back into the record safe mode Keyboard Operations Using the Jog Wheel for Trim Operations The jog wheel can be used not only to jog and shuttle the tape in the transport mode but can be used for setting some setup option variables Using the Memory Registers 6 14 The Micro Lynx has 100 general purpose memory registers used for storing time code numbers These numbers are placed into the calculator display when they are recalled so they can be used with CUE LOC and other functions where a time code number would normally be entered on the calculator keypad Most users prefer using the ten memory register option The advantage is that eac
88. way of knowing whether the master is playing the first verse or the third chorus or if the master is three and a half seconds into a scene or right at the beginning As a tool for synchronization pilot tone is severely limited The same is true for other speed only sync codes such as Frequency Shift Key FSK and Din Sync To work master and slave must be carefully lined up at the be ginning of playback and there s no way to run the machines accurately to the middle of the program material since the slave never knows where the master is only how fast it is playing SMPTE What You Can Do with a Speed and Position Reference A 8 This is where SMPTE time code enters the picture As we said SMPTE indicates not only tape speed but also tape position SMPTE time code is a complex digital signal equivalent to the simple analog pilot tone signal with a unique number assigned to each cycle of the sine wave Time code is recorded onto tape as an audible signal a rapid fire series of blips These blips are read by a microprocessor as a unique number an address consisting of separate numbers for hours minutes seconds and fractions of a second called frames gt gt So if you have a gunshot at the climactic scene of a suspense melodrama SMPTE tells you exactly where the gunshot lives what its address or location is on tape SMPTE can say This gunshot occurs one hour 31 minutes 12 seconds and 19 frames into the
89. will then stop and park at the Cue time minus any preroll time that is set The Cue register can be cleared to 00 00 00 00 by pressing and holding the CLR key and then pressing CUE Micro Lynx 6 8 06 22 00 Operational Features Group Mode Multiple Machine Control Create a Group Micro Lynx 06 22 00 In order to synchronize and control multiple transports they must be placed into a group group is made up of one or more transports that are controlled together such that one is designated the master machine and the rest are slave machines All machines in the group are timed from a reference machine which does not necessarily have to be the master machine A group can also contain the Time Code Generator TCG which is treated just like another transport or machine in that it can be selected as part of a group and it can be soloed just like the other three transports A B and C The TCG output is typically used to drive an automation system workstation sequencer or other time code chase device so it syncs up to the master This can be used to control MIDI synthesizers lighting special FX or any other time based sequential action When grouping machines it is important to remember that the first machine selected in a new group will become the reference and master machine The reference machine has an asterisk displayed next to it in the display The reference machine defines the time code type and positio
90. 0 If LOOP is selected before the edit is complete then the group will to the preroll point and repeat the sequence Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Reset the System CLR CLR SYS CLR SETUP Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Getting Started If it becomes necessary to clear or reset the system the calculator CLR key is used in combination with a number of other keys You can reset the system or a specific parameter value to its default In the following section hold down the first key then press the second key Before these commands are executed a warning message is displayed Press ENTR to confirm In normal operating mode this key clears the calculator data entry register In setup mode it quickly resets track record enables to off and variable rates back to nominal values For example press SETUP then TCG Press CLR to set the varispeed percentage back to 100 Simultaneously pressing these keys will cold boot or reset the System Unit This clears all user setup options back to the defaults If you are sure that you want to reset the System Unit press the ENTR SHTL key Simultaneously pressing these keys will reset the Keyboard Controller This key combination is used to initiate either a cold or warm reset of the keyboard after which the unit returns to normal operating mode If you are sure that you want to reset the Keyboard Controller press the ENTR SHTL key This initiates a Warm boot
91. 0 BVU 950 BVH 2000 BVH 2000 BVH 2800 BVH 3000 DMR 4000 DMR 4000 DVR 10 18 DVR 10 DVR 1000 DVR 1000 DVW 500 DVW 500 DVW A500 DVW 510 DVW A510 DVW CA510 DVW CA510 UVW 1800 UVW 1800 Special Order Stellavox TD 9 A 807 Par A 807 Ser Par A 810 71C067 Studer A 807 A 810 A 812 A 812 Par A 812 Ser Par A 820 1 2 A 820 1 2 Par A 820 1 2 Ser Par A 820 32 Hz A 820 Par A 820 Ser Par A 827 32 Hz A 827 32 Hz Tach Par A 827 32 Hz Tach Ser Par D 820 64 Hz z 48k Par m 2 44 1k Par m z 48k Par 2 44 1k Par D 827 64 Hz z 48k Par 2 44 1k Par 71C058 Studer A 80VU A80VU 16 Hz Tach A80VU 18 Hz Tach 71C059 Studer A 800 1 A 800 1 A 800 3 A 800 3 710062 D 827 D 827 71 060 Tascam 40 Series 40 Series Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Micro Lynx Serial TD 9 Studer Type B A 80VU A800 Micro Lynx Serial Tascam Type A Appendix Setup Menu Description Cable Type Description VO 5850 int VO 5850 M3 Card required A 27 Table A 3 Cable Reference Guide continued Micro Lynx Transport Control Cables TimeLine Transport Machine Setup Menu Description Cable Type Part No Manufacturer Model Description ATR 60 60 Series ATR 80 ATR 80 71C068 Tascam MSR 16 Tascam Type B TSR 8 TSR 8 71061 Tascam 505 5 7 50 71 062 Tascam DA 88 DA 88 Micro Lynx Serial DA 60 DA 60 Special Order Tascam DA 800 DA 800 44 1k DA 8
92. 00 Operational Features Press SETUP LOOP and 0 to bring up the After Edit setting Press 4 or to select Re Edit or Replay Re Edit repeats the edit once again unless stop is pressed Replay rewinds the tape and plays back the edit Pressing 1 brings up the After Replay setting Press the or key to select End or Repeat If end is selected then the machine will stop after the tape is replayed If repeat is selected then the machine will continue to either go through the replay sequence If end is selected in option 1 press 2 to set what happens when the End of the loop sequence is reached Use the or keys to select between stopping the tape at the edit end point or recuing the tape to the edit start point Recording Functions Using an Auxiliary Footswitch for Punch In Out Control Normally punch in and out points are set beforehand so that the exact record start and record end times are known before recording is initiated When performing and recording live music it may be easier to do this on the fly by using a footswitch than to take the time to set up punch in and out points The Installation section outlines what is required to set up a footswitch to perform punch ins and outs To use the footswitch you must preset the appropriate tracks to the record ready state see next section Simply put the machine s into play and at the appropriate time step on the footswitch to switch the record
93. 00 DA 800 48k Micro Lynx A 28 06 22 00 Auto Serial Transport A new transport selection labeled AUTO Serial TRANSPORT will automatically detect the presence of most serial transports and load in the appropriate transport parameters The following table lists the serially controlled transports currently recognized and shows the transport selection that will be invoked when each transport is found Ampex DCT 700d Micro Lynx 06 22 00 A 29 Key and Key Combination Identification Numbers Micro Lynx Stuck Key or Combination Stuck Key or Combination SETUP TRAN EVNT LIST SOLO LOOP RDY NE NN tae dw 38 E dm ae 48 46 100 O 8 QE O 5 stop O s ROLLBACK D x REPLAY 55 EDIT ss RW lt lt sr FF gt gt 58 STOP m 59 PLAY gt RH O 8 REO O amp jogon O e SHTL OR ENTR Ooa PEDAL CUE LOC 86 STOP RW Micro Lynx 06 22 00 A 31 Stuck Key or Combination A 32 STOP FF PLAY REH PLAY REC CLR 0 CLR 1 CLR 2 CLR 3 CLR 4 CLR 5 CLR 6 CLR 7 CLR 8 CLR 9 CLR 00 CLR CUE CLR EDIT CLR RDY CLR SYS CLR TRAN CLR TRKS CLR SETUP GRP SETUP GRP SYS MEM CAPT Stuck Key or Combination 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 18
94. 06 22 00 8 21 Keyboard Controller 8 22 CLR TRAN The TRAN key is also used with the CLR key to reset a machine select key to factory default settings Solo a transport then press and hold the CLR key and press TRAN the following message is displayed as the transport parameters are reset SETUP e TRAN Press SETUP followed by TRAN to enter the TRAN options menu This menu has two pages Press the TRAN key again to access the second page The first page has a list of all the machines that the Micro Lynx supports Use the LAST and NEXT keys to select the tape machine manufacturer Press the and keys to step through the list of transports for that manufacturer This process should be repeated for each machine connected to the system Press machine select key A C to select the next machine and set the appropriate transport type Press SETUP again to exit setup and store the transport settings The transport selections are retained in memory and should only need to be reset if the transport type is changed The second transport setup page contains a list of transport specific parameters Most of the 10 menu settings are automatically set by the selected transport type Select a specific heading and use the and keys to make changes to the default settings if required Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller Table Chapter 8 6 TRAN Setup Menu Last Next Transpor
95. 1CO081 Model 20 Model 20 Model 20 71C062 Fostex D 20 20 Micro Lynx Serial RD 8 8 u 71C062 CR 850 CR 850 Ser Micro Lynx Serial 71 042 or BR 610 BRS 610 JVC Type B or 71C073 BR 611 JVC Type B Y Cable BR 810 BRS 810 BR 811 BR 5610 BR 8600 cbl BR 5810 BR 8600U BR 7700U BR 8600E BR 8600E BR 7700E CR 5500 CR 8250 JVC Type C or CR 6650 JVC Type C Y Cable CR 8250 Special Order M 79 M79 Dealer installation pues 20 LUND 71 046 Mitsubishi X 850 X 850 Capst Norm X 850 X 850 Capst Rls Norm X 880 X 880 Capst Norm X 880 Capst Rls Norm Micro Lynx 06 22 00 A 25 71 043 or 71C070 Table A 3 Cable Reference Guide continued Micro Lynx Transport Control Cables TimeLine Transport Machine Setup Menu Description Cable Type Part No Manufacturer Model Description 71C047 Otari MTR 10 1 MTR 10 1 MTR 10 12 Series MTR 12 1 MTR 12 1 20 pin Honda connectors 71 048 Otari MTR 90 1 MTR 90 1 MTR 90 Series 50 pin amp 9 pin D connector Y Cable 71 064 Otari MTR 90 2 MTR 90 2 MTR 90 Series MTR 90 2 Layback MTR 90 2 Layback 25 pin Honda connector MTR 90 3 MTR 90 2 Srch V 71C066 MTR 100 MTR 100 MTR 100 71 063 Otar MTR 10 2 MTR 10 2 Otari Type A MTR 12 2 MTR 12 2 MTR 20 MTR 20 MTR 15 MTR 15 MX 55 MX 55 MX 70 MX 70 MX 80 MX 70 MX 70 Layback MX 70 Layback MTR 100 MTR 100 MTR 100V MTR 100 Srch V DTR 900 1 Capst Rls DTR 900 2 DTR 900 2 Capst No
96. 21 8 39 Components aseo enn tn hes 1 2 Configuration 1 3 Connectors For house idee Pet epe 6 5 Keyboard a i RB Rte ttes 7 8 xc e ie eel eddie 7 1 ders 7 6 5232 422 2 5 tip ione 7 7 Index Time code generator eee 7 5 Transport eere exter ree eee RR 7 4 Controlling system with Micro Lynx 9 15 CUER6y sedeo eene 6 8 8 11 8 12 8 46 eie a rtr ert a 6 8 8 52 CUE Register sic RU oe e eR 6 8 D Device Select 2 22222 8 18 8 20 ee 8 25 E 8 27 dee SU PES HS 8 27 SETUP etie 8 18 eee 8 20 er ete E 8 21 Digital Audio Clock Generator 2 1 10 12 Digital Audio Clock Generator Card 10 1 Digital Audio Clock Generator LEDs 8 60 2 7 Display 8 5 Display Screen zoe eie te e 8 4 Displaying Calculator d ta oe Een i 8 5 BIrors once hes thei 8 10 Machine information sse 8 5 Machine 8 5 Proinpts iocos UR Ur RE ReRnt 8 10 Time Code oue ee E 8 5 Drop Frame Code sess 8 5 8 46 Dropouts 6 6 6 7 DUR KEY nor aet Rte re ERREUR 8 48 Duration Register Accessing
97. 4 4 5OFST 6 ERR TC 8 OUT 9 DUR ASM STATUS REF LOCK MIXED CODE VIDEO GEN VITC JOG WHEEL TRIM LAST JOB NEXT SHTL ENTR Description Recall Store Macro Capture Clear Subframe Minus or move 1 increment backward Plus or move 1 increment forward Equals Double Zero 0 Time Code register Video Insert 1 Preroll register Track A1 2 Postroll register Track A2 3 Reference Sync Point register Track A3 4 Sync Point register Track A4 5 Offset register Cue track 6 Error register Time Code track 7 In Point register 8 Out Point register 9 Duration register Video Assemble Speed Reference is Locked Mixed Code Video Generator VITC Trim or Last menu selection Jog or Next menu selection Shuttle or Enter 8 3 Display Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller 11 27 06 03 LL 0 Micro Lynx Keyboard DEO obe GEN 11870 e e DIGITAL AUDIO CLOCK GENERATOR 20 Figure Chapter 8 3 Display The Micro Lynx uses an 80 character Liquid Crystal Display LCD Several categories of information are displayed b 2 3 4 5 Normal Operating Display Calculator Display Register Contents Setup Displays Prompts and Error Messages The display can be conceptually divided into four quadrants Each area provides a specific type of information upper left upper right M
98. 43 Enter the first number or press RCL and use the value in a register 2 2 0 0 3 4 A b 3 13 02 23 ts plus 2 00 34 Enter the second value 3 A b 3 13 02 23 T 4 07 17 The answer is displayed in time code 30 frame calculation At this point you may decide to save this time code in another register 4 STO STO LED flashes Store reg or mem A 3 13 02 23 2 4 07 17 Select register or memory in which to store the value 5 IN 7 STO LED turns off 3 13 02 23 A In 4 07 17 The sum is stored in the in point register 6 CLR A b 3 13 02 23 S 2 0 The display returns to the normal operating display The or minus key is used with the key to subtract two time code values Subtractions are computed in frames and displayed in the code type or format of the master machine After perform 8 55 Keyboard Controller 8 56 ing the calculation it may be stored to a register Press CLR to begin a new calculation or return to the normal operating display The minus key is also used in setup to select the previous option in a menu and in TRIM to bump or decrease the numerical value stored in a selected register by the trim register value If you subtract a large number from a smaller one the result will be displayed as a negative time code number Procedure 1 1 6 5 4 3 A b 3 13 02 23 1 65 43 Enter the first number or press R
99. 5 ALWAYS 48 000 Ks s XL RECUE E PF 10MIN 3 RECORD IN 5 VAR RATIO IN 20 MIN PULSE REC OFF MACRO PROGRAM MACRO E L L 0 9 1 2 3 8 amp 9 a NEVER 4 RECORD OUT 6 VAR RATIO IN M SPEED PULSE PLAY L 87 5 112 5 100 00 MEM MEMORY OPTION L 1 10 5 P REC PLAY 7 OVERSAMPLE IN L MEMORY SIZE 4 TRIM FRAME PULSE STOP 128 TF 0 9 L 01 10 07 af P REC STOP TP 192 XL 00 99 5 TRIM SUBFRAME P PLAY STOP XL 256 L 01 25 01 PULSE OPTO 384 MIDI MID OPTIONS 6 PORT SELECT SPECIAL OPTO OFF 0 MIDI OUT JACK MIDI 42258 5 REHEARSE IN E wont doo EDIT EDIT OPTION THRU 0 SYSTEM REF L REH RECLOG EL I0 EDIT ac 1 OUT JACK INTFIX PULSE REC 8 af DISABLE OFF INTVAR 6 REHEARSE OUT E RETRY TH EXTVID UNLATCH 5 STOP MIDI DATA L aux af PULSE PLAY 1 EDITS ROLLAS DATA VSO MASTER SAVE AS REC FE aur sLaves 2 MAC OUT JACK AcG E AMA E EE 1 SYSTEM SPD CODE T D IUT EVENT SELECT GPI OPTIONS 2 Th MM TL oFF 1 GPI 1 MIDI DATA _ 25 2 25 PAL L on NORMAL k IL 29 97Hz DF 9 READER MODE AUTOSET 3 MIDI THRU JACK 29 97Hz 30 NTSC LTC SER TC REC TALLY TE MIDI IN 3 30Hz DF TP ure x EDIT REC L MIDIOUT 30Hz 30 L sERIALTC REH TALLY 4 MTC SOURCE 2 VARISPEED T TIMER 1 p ipee L 2 2 E Mae JOG SHTL WH
100. 5 192 193 194 195 196 MACRO 0 MACRO 1 MACRO 2 MACRO 3 MACRO 4 MACRO 5 MACRO 6 MACRO 7 MACRO 8 MACRO 9 GRP A GRP B GRP GRP GRP MIDI RDY A RDY B RDY C SETUP A SETUP B SETUP C SETUP TCG SETUP MIDI Micro Lynx 06 22 00 24 25 29 97 30 Address ADR AES EBU Amplitude Analog Audio ATR Autolocator Bandwidth Binary Numerical System Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Glossary 24 refers to both the film standard speed and code type 25 refers to both the EBU PAL speed and code type 29 97 refers to a SMPTE frame rate only in frames per second 580 refers to SMPTE frame rate only in frames per second SMPTE EBU time code address Also referred to as time code value A specific and unique address in the time code data stream A set of SMPTE or EBU time code numbers indicating a specific position on tape complete SMPTE address includes hours minutes seconds and frames Automated Dialog Replacement A technique for replacing production dialog in the studio A professional standard for the high speed transfer of two channels of digital audio data Developed jointly by the Audio Engineering Society AES and the European Broadcast Union EBU Signal displacement from a zero point The amplitude of an analog signal is the measurement of voltage increase or decrease The traditional means of recording and reproducing sound u
101. 5 00 The value is stored in the register A new offset is automatically calculated and stored for the slave machine if a ref sync point exists Clear a Sync Point SOLO B SOLO b b 2 09 55 00 0 CLR 4 SOLO b bs 2 09 55 00 0 The value in the sync point register is cleared RCL 4 SOLO b 2 09 55 00 Sync 0 You can verify the clear by recalling the sync point register contents Micro Lynx 06 22 00 5 OFST CUE Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller OFST When not used as a 5 in calculator mode the OFST key provides access to the Offset register for a specified machine This register may be accessed during store recall and trim operations Each slave machine in the system has a separate offset register The reference machine can not have an offset The offset is a numerical expression of the relationship between the source and reference machine time code positions It is always applied to a slave machine Offset is determined Slave Source time code Master Reference time code Offset 02 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 1 00 00 00 A positive offset indicates that the source machine time code position is in advance of the reference machine time code position If the machine selected is the reference tape machine then the offset register value will be zero since offsets are always applied to slave machines Select a machine in solo or group status mode and press RCL or STO to recal
102. 8 8 18 Self Test MESSAGES eene eee rete 5 4 Serial Time Code see 8 24 Setting Machine Offsets sess 6 11 Setting Time Code seen 6 2 SETUP K Ypres na nini 4 24 8 18 Setup Parameters esse 2 3 4 24 SGI ports Digital VO get eae eee 9 15 Serial Port 2 ss ener een ne oh 9 18 SGI Workstation Digital Audio output eese 9 18 SHIL iue 8 17 Shuttl Mode eite eR nien 8 16 Shuttle Wheel eee 8 16 8 17 Slave machine ose eod eem eeu 9 15 SMPTE time code eee 9 15 SMPTE Time Code item eds 6 2 SMPTE Synchronizing eee 9 16 Software Version Number sse 8 20 SOLO usen 8 28 8 34 Solo MOode ett 6 7 Sony 5850 2 21 2 2 2 6 10 4 Source Sync Point Register Accessing 8 43 Specifications 1 6 Start Polnt eet eee tee 6 8 6 11 Status Current 8 5 8 21 Index 7 Index Group Status Mode sse 8 31 e ERU ote BR ERRAT 8 47 SIQ K y pene Ee 8 8 8 51 STOP ROY ee e eate 8 13 Striping Time Code 6 4 6 17 8 23 8 52 SUBER Key poe Ue ien estie tet 8 57 Subframe Displaying 8 47 Entering information 8 57 Trimming
103. 9 Time Code Formats There are 60 minutes in an hour 60 seconds in a minute but how many frames are there in a second Frame rate is the term used to express the number of frames per second in SMPTE time code Frame rate was originally measured as one half the power line frequency Since there are different power line frequencies in the U S and Europe time code has several different formats defined by the frame rate used in each country National Television Standards Committee NTSC Wall current in the U S has a frequency of 60 Hz making 30 frames per second the standard frame rate for American black and white television Phase Alternate Line PAL Drop Frame DF A 10 In Europe the standard wall current frequency is 50 Hz Thus we have another format 25 frames per second or the PAL format the standard for European color television What about American color TV When it was invented by RCA they reduced the American black and white frame rate of 30 frames per second to 29 97 frames per second to allow both color encoding and compatibility with existing black and white televi sion sets This became the standard color TV format for America The problem is that 30 frame time code running at this rate measures slightly slower than real time 60 sec x 30 frames sec 1800 min x 60 min hr 108 000 frames 60 sec x 29 97 frames sec 1798 2 min x 60 min hr 107 892 frames Difference 108 frames
104. Assume that the A and B machines are grouped Use and keys to trim 2 B b 2 03 52 03 Err 0 Select status mode for machine B 3 TRIM TRIM LED flashes LEDon LED on b 2 03 52 03 Ofst 1 03 52 03 The frame trim increment is displayed The offset register is automatically called 4 4 Use the plus key to dynamically increase the offset Holding the key down will make the key auto repeat 5 H Use the minus key to dynamically decrease the offset Holding the key down will make the key auto repeat 6 TRIM STAT b 1 08 36 23 0 Press TRIM to exit trim mode save the new offset and return to Status mode or B Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Getting Started b t 1 00 00 00 MAECEN 0 Press B to exit trim mode save the new offset and return to Group mode or CLR Old Offset used Press CLR to exit trim mode without storing the new offset value Use the Jog Wheel to trim 7 TRIM Jog Wheel TRIM LED flashes 4 LED on LED on A bt t 1 04 12 23 0 The Jog Wheel can be used to dynamically trim the offset up or down instead of using the and keys Note In this example the tape machines were in Stop An offset can be trimmed dynamically with the tape machines in play Change the Master Machine The Micro Lynx will allow any machine to be the group Master You can change the Master at any time and all positional rel
105. CL and use the value in a register 2 H 2 0 0 4 3 13 02 23 minus 2 00 34 Enter the second value 3 A b 3 13 02 23 2 52 5 09 The answer is displayed in time code 30 frame calculation At this point you may decide to save this time code in another register 4 STO STO LED flashes Store reg or mem 3 13 02 23 P 5 09 Select a register or memory in which to store the value 5 IN 7 STO LED turns off b 3 13 02 23 5 09 The difference is stored in the point register 6 CLR A b A 3 13 02 23 0 The display returns to the normal operating display Micro Lynx 06 22 00 SUBFR Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller The Micro Lynx stores time code values in high resolution format In normal operation the high resolution or subframe content of all time code numbers except for the error display is suppressed Press the SUBFR key to enter or trim the subframe information SUBFR is commonly used when adjusting offsets between machines This can be done dynamically so that it is possible to easily adjust the positional relationship between machines until the audio phases Recall the offset for a slave machine that requires altering and press TRIM and SUBFR The Jog Wheel and and keys can now be used to trim the offset register in subframe increments The Micro Lynx defaults to a subframe trim value of 01 subframes See Setup SY
106. DI Time Code A tape machine analog or digital which has more than two audio tracks Not available Not active Not applicable A 37 Non Drop Frame Non contiguous NTSC Offset Oversampling PAL Phase Lock Pilot Tone Post production Production RAM Rate REF SRC A 38 NDF or ND is one of the two SMPTE code types and is the black amp white television standard When using this code type every frame of time code is counted in real time See the Appendix for more time code information Not a continuous predictable sequence i e 1 2 4 5 6 8 9 isa non contiguous number sequence A system of coding color information for television transmission used primarily in the USA and Japan Named after the National Television System Committee Offset is the difference between two time codes at the point at which they are to be synchronized Offsets are subframe accurate and are displayed using the HH MM SS FF format Offsets are always applied to the slave machines A process by which a computer interpolates between adjacent digital audio numbers to provide in between values and reduce quantization error Phase Alternate Line PAL is another name for the 25 time code format which is the standard for European color and B amp W television A mode of synchronizer operation that uses phase information derived from SMPTE time code and after initial synchronization ignores specific frame
107. EC and PLAY simultaneously 4 H Setup Key options Selection Record by Play Rec Single key record operation begins by pressing REC only 5 SETUP Hold the GRP key and add groups in order of priority Exit and save the record key selection 8 9 Keyboard Controller Prompt amp Error Display 8 10 The Micro Lynx has a comprehensive prompt message system that guides the user in various operational situations For example Hold the GRP key and add groups in order of priority A concise message is flashed momentarily on the display to prompt an action provide description suggestions and status information If a system error occurs the SYS key will flash A complete list of error messages is located in Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Press SYS to display the error messages The SYS LED will turn on and the first error message will be displayed until you press SYS again Pressing SYS again displays the next error message After the last error is displayed the errors are cleared and the error mode is automatically exited The SYS LED flashes until all of the errors have been cleared Press CLR to exit SYS mode at any point without erasing the list Procedure 1 SYS LED flashing When the SYS LED flashes a system error or change has occurred 2 SYS 1 Communications error The first error message in the error stack or list is displayed Note the message as you will be asked for this infor
108. EEL 0 1 RSLVED 0 MODE 5 MIDI DATA SRC 0 01 UNTIL LOCKED NORMAL _ MIDI IN JACK 3 TCG GROUP MODE NOT LOCKED AUTOSET E JACK T I PLAY RUN NEXT LOCK THRESHOLD F REC TALLY MAC JACK X PLAY MUTE L 0 50 35 E EDIT REC 6 MIDI RESOLVE PLAY WIND NEXT LOCK DELAY 2 TALLY 4 TCG STILL MODE L 0 50 10 2 Er z ACG SERVO FH OFF NEXT PARK WINDOW L ON 1 MODE RDY RECORD OPTIONS OFF REC ADV 30 IN S AUXOUTPUTSEL F3 vic OPTIONS XL on L 0 255 PILOT 0 GROUP SELECT 2 BEEP SPACING 1 REC ADV 30 OUT RESHAPE 1 E OFF L 10 30 20 E L 0 255 RESHAPE 2 Th A 3 LAST BEEP SP 2 REC ADV 15 IN RESHAPE 3 L B MUTED L 0 255 GPI 2 BEEP E ON 3 3 jee 15 OUT 6 VIDEO SYNC GEN 1 DE 4 REG ADV 7 5 IN Sia L FIXED MIK082B a ES SIREC ADV 1 ou 1 PRESS EVENT KEY THEN DESIRED GPI NUMBER 2 SELECT RDY OR TRAN THEN MACHINE A B OR C TO SETUP OPTIONS 3 USE KEYS 0 1 2 ONLY AFTER FIRST SELECTION Micro Lynx 06 22 00 4 25 Introduction Chapter 5 Troubleshooting The Micro Lynx provides several levels of user information system error messages prompts messages and warnings System error messages are displayed when the Micro Lynx is unable to perform due to a system failure or communications discontinuity Messages are displayed if a command sequence is entered incorrectly or a precondition is required for a command to opera
109. ER EREN E A AEKA A 1 Introd etie leta RAA E A cunt A R A 3 WAYOM PTE orende oth tese atu meu oett te td 8 What Can You Do with iie eae E AR VES SR VENANT MESE ES SER A 3 Synchronizing Multiple Audio 2 2020 2 000000000000 000 4 Locking to Pict re ded Rau oe A 5 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 xiii Table of Contents Mix Automation and More esee ette dur RI EY EXTR ERE RR ER EV 5 Complete 1 1 1 1 eene eese 6 How Does SMPTE DO IU Maie a d edito A 7 What You Can Do with a Speed A 7 SMPTE What You Can Do with a Speed and Position A 8 Anatomy ota oMPTE EFTame 9 Tim Code soos Ut cnius pd 10 National Television Standards Committee 01 A 10 Phase Alternate Line PAD A 10 Drop Brame DEB eerte eret er ere veter rte reor ve rv Cree or Due A 10 RE T Ota ta eat ie tac ca A 11 Different Frame Rate Forthata eoe er aen
110. GRP B A b A400 00 00 00 0 While holding the GRP key press A release A continue to hold the GRP key press B then release both keys 17 ALL STOP STOP A b A400 00 00 00 Ch Press ALLSTOP then Assuming that both machines have the same time code then the b machine will chase A and park at the A time code ready to synchronize 18 PLAY A B A400 00 00 00 11 gt L gt L The A machine goes into play followed by the b machine Both machines will lock up a group lock to internal speed reference Il will show in the display The time to lock will be slightly longer the first time as the Micro Lynx learns the transports characteristics subsequent lock times will improve noticeably You are ready to use the Micro Lynx Micro Lynx 3 12 06 22 00 Installation Quick Check Troubleshooting Table Chapter 3 4 Troubleshooting the System Unit Situation Solution 7 Conditions Si POWER ON LED fails to turn on Check all power supply connections Check that the AC MAINS supply is OK SYSTEM DATA amp VALID LEDs fail Hold CLR SYS key on SU failed to internally initialize to turn on Keyboard to reset SU correctly Table Chapter 3 5 Troubleshooting the System Unit communications with the Keyboard Controller Situation Solution SU Keyboard DATA amp VALID LEDs Check the Keyboard to SU cable Communications between the fail to turn on connection Keyboard and SU f
111. Generator The VSG card is a sync pulse generator that outputs NTSC or PAL composite sync This signal is typically routed to the External Sync inputs of video decks in the system Advanced Features For information on installing a Micro Lynx and an external VTR or ATR to the SGI workstation see Using Mediasound with the Micro Lynx later in this chapter Detailed instructions for using the Micro Lynx are in the Micro Lynx manual Using Mediasound with the Micro Lynx The Micro Lynx synchronizer includes special support for Mediasound Using the Micro Lynx with Mediasound will enable you to control Mediasound with external video or tape decks The Micro Lynx also allows you to output the Mediasound time code position LTC when Mediasound is in Chase mode and slave Mediasound to an external time code source This section outlines the basic steps necessary to connect the Micro Lynx to Mediasound and use it to control the workstation with one or multiple decks It is assumed that you are familiar with operating the Micro Lynx or that you have read the Getting Started section of the Micro Lynx User s Manual If you are not already familiar with the Micro Lynx read the manual before you attempt to use the Micro Lynx with Mediasound The Micro Lynx machine control system has a number of special features that make it ideal for use with Mediasound digital audio software running on SGI workstations X The MIDI and SMPTE time code generators c
112. ITAL AUDIO WORKSTATION i ERI m o a ola MAC a g g INTERFACE z Zj Zj S 2 S 2 Ec unu D ACG WORD CLOCK POWER SUPPLY TIME CODE EFFECTS PROCESSOR SMPTE013A KEYBOARD CONTROLLER Figure Appendix A 11 The Modern Electronic Studio Micro Lynx A 20 06 22 00 pNP SMPTE and the Digital Audio Workstation Micro Lynx 06 22 00 The Digital Audio Workstation DAW is an important tool for post production and music recording The DAW records edits manipulates and mixes multiple tracks of audio in a single digital environment Like the biosphere it s a self contained self sufficient system but at some point it must sync with the real world Digital audio workstations must eventually be slaved to picture or a master tape machine This can present a problem DAWSs are always referenced to their own internal sample rate clock The workstation can use time code to locate and park at a specific SMPTE address When that address comes up on the master tape it goes into play but it s running wild locked to nothing but its own internal clock In short we re back to something only just a little better than the scenario presented in the beginning attempting to press two start buttons on two machines at the same time and crossing our fingers ATR ATR DTR VTR 7 MEER DIGITAL AUDIO SYNC WORKSTATION au au a
113. In Point Cause A CLR SYS command has been entered and confirmed The SU will reset to default parameters and all setup information will be lost Cause A CLR TRAN command has been issued for the soloed transport The transport will reset to default parameters Cause The specified transport speed has changed to 30 ips Cause The specified transport speed has changed to 15 ips Cause The specified transport speed has changed to 7 5 ips Cause A track record enable command has been ignored because the track has been set to safe or the Micro Lynx system cannot enable it Solution Use the setup menu to select and set the track to ready and then set the track to enable Cause An Edit command has been issued and no edit Out Point has been entered Solution Set an Out Point by using the F2 key A time code value can also be entered and stored as the Out Point by pressing STO OUT Cause No transports have been record readied in Edit therefore the Micro Lynx will not issue the Record or Rehearse commands Solution Set one or more transports to record ready by using the RDY and machine select keys 5 7 Troubleshooting A B or C Does Not Exist VITC Lines Changed VITC Mismatched Lines 5 8 Cause You have tried to solo or group a machine that is unavailable For example selecting C when the Machine Expansion Card M3 option is not installed Solution Install a Machine Expansion Card Ve
114. LTS ARE ITALICIZED 1 PRESS EVENT KEY THEN DESIRED GPI NUMBER 2 SELECT RDY OR TRAN THEN MACHINE A B OR C TO SETUP OPTIONS 3 USE KEYS 0 1 2 ONLY AFTER FIRST SELECTION Micro Lynx 06 22 00 LAST NEXT LAST NEXT MACRO PROGRAM MACRO GRP GROUP OPTIONS SEARCH MODE TL CHASE GROUP L 1 REF FOLLOW MSTR L 2 GROUP PARKAHEAD L 0 30 25 L 3 GRP LED STATUS NORMAL TIMECODE LOOP Loop 5 0 AFTER EDIT TL RE EDIT REPLAY AFTER REPLAY r N AFTER END STOP RECUE 4 L 0 9 1 2 3 8 amp 9 ILAST NEXT ILAST NEXT MEM MEMORY OPTION L MEMORY SIZE T 0 9 x 00 99 MIDI MIDI OPTIONS ILAST NEXT ILAST NEXT 0 MIDI OUT JACK OFF MTC MIDI DATA DATA VF THRU VF OUT JACK OFF MTG MIDI DATA DATA MIDI THRU MAC OUT JACK OFF MTC MIDI DATA MTC DATA MIDI THRU JACK T MIDI IN L SOURCE MIDI IN JACK 4 N 4 T gt VF JACK MAC JACK MIDI DATA SRC T F MIDI IN JACK T oi VF JACK MAC JACK MIDI RESOLVE ACG SERVO r DY RECORD OPTIONS 2 REC ADV 30 IN L 0 255 REC ADV 30 OUT L 0 255 REC ADV 15 IN L 0 255 8 REC ADV 15 OUT L 0 255 L 4 REC ADV 7 5 IN L 0 255 L B
115. MIDI Data Connector will output Micro Lynx MIDI data Not available at this time Data Connector will output MIDI time code and MIDI data simultaneously Not available at this time MIDI Thru Connector will thru put data that has been input to the 5 pin MIDI input connector Off Connector will not output any signal MTC Connector will output MIDI time code MIDI Data Connector will output Micro Lynx MIDI data Not available at this time Data Connector will output MIDI time code and MIDI data simultaneously Not available at this time MIDI In MIDI thru jack outputs data from MIDI In jack MIDI Out MIDI thru jack outputs MIDI out data MIDI In Jack MIDI time code source is the MIDI In jack I F Jack MIDI time code source is the I F jack MAC Jack MIDI time code source is the MAC jack MIDI In Jack MIDI data source is the Midi In jack I F Jack MIDI data source is the I F jack MAC Jack MIDI data source is the MAC jack Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Advanced Features MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI THRU OUT o CE VF OUT MAC IN MACOUT A COMP IN COMP OUT Micro Lynx 06 22 00 OorF SWITCHES SHOWN IN DEFAULT POSITIONS Figure Chapter 9 1 MIDI Routing MIDI DATA SRC SWITCH MIDI DATA gt
116. MINI DIN SGI WORKSTATION BACK PANEL RCA MALE RCA FEMALE f SGI DIGITAL INPUT BLACK T 2 3 5MM STERO SGI DIGITAL MINIPHONE INPUT OUTPUT Gre 5 22 amp PIN SGISERAL gg dnon PORT 2 SGI DIGITAL OUTPUT T FEMALE Figure Chapter 9 3 Micro Lynx to SGI Workstation Connections 9 18 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Advanced Features Micro Lynx to VTR Connections Typical Micro Lynx 06 22 00 The Micro Lynx is compatible with many video transports that support external synchronization including standard 3 4 inch U matic Beta S VHS VHS open reel and digital VTRs With a Micro Lynx the video machines are always resolved so they can be run as either Master or Slave If the VTR uses Sony Serial Protocol serial time code can be used as the time code source Use an external video sync source as a speed reference source for the Micro Lynx and VTR Install the Micro Lynx Video Sync Generator Card VSG if an external sync source is not available EXT SYNC TIME CODE TIME CODE E MICRO LYNX SYSTEM UNIT TIME CODE GENERATOR POWER SUPPLY ex ea ca MICRO LYNX KEYBOARD CONTROLLER MDS002A Figure Chapter 9 4 Micro Lynx to VTR Connections 9 19 Advanced Features Micro Lynx Setup Audio Clock Generator Setup The AES EBU Audio Clock Generator produces a digital
117. MODE TF L RESOLVED CAPST SPD TRIM L 128 127 0 LIFTER DEFEAT NEVER NORMAL NOT STP PLAY ALWAYS L 3 RECORD IN PULSE REC ZL p REC PLAY 4 RECORD OUT PULSE PLAY P REC PLAY PULSE STOP P REC STOP P PLAY STOP PULSE OPTO SPECIAL OPTO 5 REHEARSE IN LATCH REH PULSE REH P REH PLAY P REH RECLOG L REH RECLOG PULSE REC L 6 REHEARSE OUT UNLATCH T N 4 LAST NEXT PULSE PLAY SAVE AS F 7 APPROACH SPEED 20 254 L 8 BANDWIDTH LIMIT FE OFF L on 9 READER MODE LTC SER TC TF Lent L SERIALTC 1 00 MUTE CONTROL NORMAL UNTIL RSLVED UNTIL LOCKED NOT LOCKED Ie L 0 50 35 NEXT LOCK DELAY L 0 50 10 L NEXT PARK WINDOW L 0 10 10 virc OPTIONS 0 GROUP SELECT F LAST NEXT READER MODE H AUTO FIXED NEXT THRESHOLD MIK082B A 23 A 24 06 22 00 Cable Reference Guide Table Appendix A 3 Cable Reference Guide Micro Lynx Transport Control Cables Part No Manufacturer Model Description Seeca Ore AEG M20 M20 te 71co39 Ampex MM320 MM3iz0 8 0 MM3i20 71C062 Ampex VPR 3 VPR 3 Micro Lynx Serial VPR 6 VPR 6 VPR 80 VPR 80 VPR 300 VPR 300 71C076 DN 3603 RA DN 3603 RA DEN 3603 DN 3603G DN 3603G 10k 7
118. Micro Lynx machine controller and eliminates the need for an external VITC to LTC translator The VITC Reader Card is used in audio for video post production applications when a VITC reading capability is required and the VTR or VCR is not equipped to supply serial time code to the synchronizer Since VITC can be read in still mode and at very slow speeds it can be used for accurately determining video tape position The Micro Lynx seamlessly switches at 1 3rd play speed between Longitudinal Time Code LTC and VITC ensuring smooth operation and accurate time code values for use in dialog replacement sound effects spotting and foley applications A Micro Lynx keyboard status LED indicates when VITC is present and the LCD displays when the Micro Lynx is using VITC to update the machine reader position VITC is a form of time code that is only used with video It is re corded as part of the video signal in the vertical blanking interval VITC uses a 90 bit time code data word that is recorded on two non consecutive video lines at the beginning of each video field The Micro Lynx keyboard provides a comprehensive use interface for selecting VITC parameters A function key accesses the VITC menu setup options The menu structure is used to freely allocate the VITC Card to any video transport and to set the line scan mode The scan mode can be automatic or fixed In automatic the Micro Lynx scans all video lines and will select the first
119. Micro Lynx machines and the time code generator can be used simultaneously in SOLO For example machine A could be in rewind and b in Play 6 7 Operational Features Using Cue Points The CUE register is a nonvolatile memory location that is typically used to store the time code for a machine start point It is updated as one works through a mix or editing session to set a new start time so that all the machines can be located back to that specific time in order to play back through the edits or mix changes Setting the Cue Register The Cue register is set with the current number shown in the calculator section of the display lower right display This number can be manually entered using the keypad or it can be captured from any machine or recalled from another memory register To save the displayed number as the new Cue location press STO store then CUE Using the Cue Register The Cue register can be used to locate one machine if that machine is soloed or a group when the GRP LED is on to the Cue time by simply pressing CUE All machines will then go to the Cue time minus any preroll time set in the Preroll register The Cue register setting can be checked by pressing RCL and CUE This displays the current Cue time code setting in the lower right display a b C t es 59 45 00 Cue 59 45 00 Pressing CUE while in play will force the machine s to rewind or fast forward to the Cue time The machine s
120. Minutes Seconds Frames A SMPTE time code address or value Completely clear the synchronizers RAM Press and hold the CLR key while you power up the module A system speed reference that is derived from the unit s internal crystal This reference should be selected when an external reference video or word clock is not required A technique used to start a time code generator from another running time code It can be used to recreate missing time code or to external existing time code on tape The Jam Time Code or Jam Sync function See Jam Sync Keyboard Control Unit TimeLine s external machine control unit The KCU provides centrally controlled access to all synchronizers in a system Liquid Crystal display The KBD display is of this type Light emitting diode A tape transport s head lifter mechanism Tape machines Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Local Transport Lock LTC Machine Machine Control MACROS MIDI MIDI Time Code Motion Controls MTC Multitrack N A Appendix normally lift the tape off the heads when in wind FFW RWD The synchronizer intelligently controls the machines lifter operation to read time code when required The machine or transport that the synchronizer is connected to and controlling The transport is synchronized with the system reference GEN REF Longitudinal Time Code Time code information encoded in binary coded decimal BCD form which is recorded a
121. OLLER SMPTEQOAA Figure Appendix A 2 Synchronize to Video Mix Automation and More Micro Lynx 06 22 00 If you have a MIDI sequencer and some synthesizers that you want to lock to your multitrack tape or to picture the TimeLine Micro Lynx can translate SMPTE time code into the MIDI data that the sequencer needs to lock to tape SMPTE can be used to control just about anything that has micro processor intelligence and what piece of audio gear doesn t these days For instance mixing console automation will run to time code and can therefore be locked to tape and other time code de vices for complete system automation 5 Complete Systems A 6 MIDI SEQUENCER ATR N EU al ala xl QO O 4 z ysg EXTSYNC SYSTEM UNIT 5 me Excuse N 3 TIME CODE 2 GENERATOR POWER SUPPLY ea ea is cs ic KEYBOARD CONTROLLER 5 Figure Appendix A 3 MIDI Sequencer and Time Code The ultimate SMPTE application is the complete studio system Just as two devices can be locked to a common time reference so can a whole roomful tape machines consoles synthesizers effects processors and hard disk recorders With an efficient controller like the Micro Lynx Keyboard all of these different machines can be operated as easily as a single set of trans
122. ORD OUT CI TRANSPORT 3 016 Figure Chapter 7 9 Third Machine Interface TRANSPORT 3 40 dual inline header All machine control signals pass through this 40 pin input output port The transport control signals capstan servo signal and machine tallies needed for the transport to correctly operate and synchronize are on this connector See the Installation Chapter or TRAN under SETUP in the Keyboard Controller chapter for information on how to select the transport type and configure this connector for your machine Table Chapter 7 15 Transport 3 Connector Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description 9 Record Tally 11 5V Servo relay B normally closed contact 4 6 8 Rehearse 14 Video Track Enable INS Ground 16 Ground 0 2 PlayTally 18 Audio Track Enable A2 RS422 TX 0 RS422TX j 5422 RX 2 RS422HX Record Exit 7 24 SearchEnable Auxin 1 26 Search Control Voltage Capstan Frequency 28 Tape Direction 32 34 36 Servo Relay B Normally Open 3 Capstan Control Voltage Contact Lifter Enable In Out 42V 1 8 427 O Stop 40 Ply 3 1 4 stereo socket differential input Wideband linear time code input for transport 3 with a speed range is of 1 10 to 60x play Speed 4 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 0 32 34 36 38 40 Mic
123. Operating Manual Micro Lynx System Unit with Keyboard Controller Co oy ight All Rights Res Manual No Preface Assistance and Information TimeLine 1755 La Costa Meadows Drive Suite B San Marcos CA 92069 Software Version Technical Support Phone 760 761 4440 Fax 760 761 4449 SUPPORTGTIMELINEVISTA COM Serial Number KBD CP MC Technical Assistance is available ONLY if the Micro Lynx is registered Mail in your Warranty Card immediately to register the Micro Lynx Remember when calling for technical support you must provide the software version and Micro Lynx serial number so that we can give you accurate and prompt assistance Printing History All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval System or transmitted in any form or by any means electronically mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of TimeLine Vista Inc Each revision will cause the letter to the right of the manual part number to change The purpose for each revision will be listed below Events such as the addition of a feature or functional test will cause the revision number to change Internal Document Number 73K014 Revision M Approval Serial No Date Affected Changes Made D 8 25 92 Added SMPTE Made Simple to Appendix editing changes Section and Index added Other miscellaneous changes G 7 23 93 Update Advanc
124. S TRACK Figure Appendix 7 Video and VITC Time Code Micro Lynx 06 22 00 SMPTE MIDI Micro Lynx 06 22 00 MIDI is not the same as SMPTE even though both are binary codes They each carry very different types of information SMPTE as we ve seen answers the questions Where are we and How fast are we going MIDI however answers an equally vital but totally different question What do we do now It answers that question for synthesizers drum machines and other electronic music devices MIDI is the language that a computer uses when it tells a synthesizer Play middle C play it mezzo forte and play it now But when is now If we re talking about playing back an electronic composition in concert now is a relative term Now might be the third beat of the fourteenth measure and whether that beat hits at 10 31 or 10 32 PM is something no one usually notices However if that beat has to coincide with the cocking of an assassin s pistol in a feature film thriller or coincide with a soul wrenching wail from a vocalist on audio tape it becomes necessary to pin now down The traditional way is to slave a MIDI sequencer to SMPTE Many popular sequencers can read incoming SMPTE and lock their musical tempos their beats per minute to the time code It works beautifully but it leaves the film or TV composer with the awkward situation of flittin
125. S for information on how to alter the subframe increment value Procedure 1 B RCL OFST 5 bs 2 03 52 03 Ofst 1 22 56 09 Recall the offset for a slave machine 2 TRIM SUBFR Jog Wheel bo 2 03 52 03 Trim by 0 01 Ofst 1 22 56 08 gt 00 The trim arrow points at the subframes Turn the Jog Wheel or use the and keys to trim the offset register in subframe increments STAT b b 2 03 52 03 Trim by 0 01 Ofst 1 22 56 08 gt 79 3 TRIM b 2 03 52 03 eA 0 Exit trim mode The trimmed value is automatically saved to the offset register 4 RCL OFST 5 bs 2 03 52 03 Ofst 1 22 56 08 79 If desired recall the offset register to view the new offset 8 57 Keyboard Controller Status Indicators STATUS TME NE f SYSTEM D ui e REF MIXED e VIDEO e VITC LOCK CODE GEN 9 i600 9 470 48K D 44K STD l ure e e e System 8 58 REF LOCK LED MIXED CODE LED VIDEO GEN LED DIGITAL AUDIO CLOCK GENERATOR 25 Figure Chapter 8 10 Status Indicator This LED indicates the system speed reference status If the LED is on then the system reference is present and the System Unit SU is locked If the LED is flashing it indicates that the reference selected is not present or that the system unit is unable to lock to the reference For example the REF LOCK LED wo
126. SETUP key to leave setup mode 10 Set up AudioVision in Master Mode just as you would if you were using Sony protocol or VLANs You are now ready to synchronize the Micro Lynx to AudioVision Note The Micro Lynx will remember the settings you have programmed when you power down there is no need to repeat the setup steps every time you use the system To Control Multiple Transport Devices with the Micro Lynx Follow the above steps but repeat steps 6 and 7 for each additional deck In Step 6 select A for Deck 1 B for Deck 2 etc To Slave AudioVision from an External Deck Connected to the Micro Lynx Micro Lynx 06 22 00 1 If you are only going to slave AudioVision from an external deck and don t need to operate AudioVision in Master Mode you only need to connect the time code cable from the machine to the Micro Lynx Follow the above directions but set AudioVision to Slave Mode from the Deck Control window AudioVision is now set to slave to the deck connected to the Micro Lynx Advanced Features Using Pro Tools with the Micro Lynx Introduction The Micro Lynx machine control system has special features that make it suitable for use with DigiDesign Pro Tools digital audio workstations The MIDI and SMPTE time code generators can be synchronized with the tape machine group operating as virtual tape machines chasing the reference machine time code numbers If the MTC output is connected to Pro Tools the works
127. Sync source or VTR DTR Video Sync input if TimeLine VSG option installed Micro Lynx 3 6 06 22 00 Installation Connect the Keyboard Controller Cables SYSTEM UNIT BACK PANEL 232 422 po SYSTEM TALLY UDIO CLOCK GENERATOR a EUER 50555550595 p ds TRI SPORT KEYBOARD yx 2 eie MIK027B Figure Chapter 3 3 Micro Lynx System Unit to Keyboard Controller Connection Procedure 1 Insert one end of the telephone style cable 8 pin RJ 45 into the KEYBOARD connector on the System Unit 2 Route the cable to the Keyboard Controller 3 Insert the other end of the cable into the SYSTEM jack on the Keyboard Controller 4 Press the POWER switch on the System Unit front panel 5 The POWER ON and SYSTEM VALID LEDs should light After a few seconds the KEYBOARD DATA and VALID LEDs should light and the Keyboard Controller will initialize Micro Lynx 06 22 00 3 7 Installation Connect the AUX Input KEYBOARD BACK PANEL oj FOOT SWITCH MIK050A Figure Chapter 3 4 Micro Lynx Keyboard Controller to Foot Switch An AUX input socket is provided to connect a foot switch It may be connected to any kind of switch with a toggle on and off function The cable is not supplied with the Micro Lynx Procedure 1 Insert one end of the 1 4 stereo jack into the A
128. Tascam Differential Input Signal Input Level 20 to 10 dBm Input Impedance 10 k ohms Speed Range 1 10 to 60 x play speed Bi directional Automatic Detection of Time Code Type Reshape Output Differential Input Input Impedance 10 k ohms Unbalanced Output Output Level 1 dBm 1 4V pp Output Impedance 100 ohms Differential Input Input Level 5 V nominal to 8 V Input Impedance 1 k ohms Single ended Output Output Level 600 mV nominal unterminated Output Impedance 75 ohms Formats RS422 RS232C Connectors Macintosh II Serial Interface SCSI 9 pin serial communications port Introduction Power Supply Unit Power Supply Mains Input 100 250 VAC at 50 60 Hz Output Physical Size Keyboard System Unit Weight Keyboard System Unit Mounting Keyboard System Unit Options M3 ACG VSG VITC 15 W nominal 30 W max 5 V 3A max 12 V 3A max 12 V 1 0A max x 8 75 x 7 5 D 8cm H x 225 cm W x 190 cm D 1 75 H x 19 W x 11 75 D 4 5 cm H x 485 cm W x 30cm D 1 lbs 7 oz 6 lbs 0 oz Free standing Supplied with mounting hardware for standard 19 rack Machine Expansion Card Synchronized Digital Audio Sampling Clock Interface Video Sync Generator for NTSC and PAL VITC Reader TimeLine Vista Inc reserves the right to change the design and specifications of equipment without notice Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Introduction Cable Requirements Table Chapter 1 1
129. UT BNC 5V TTL level output The Word Clock Out is locked to the system reference with either a fixed or variable ratio to the nominal sample rate connectors and jacks in the Audio Clock Generator section on the back of the System Unit are installed AES EBU 9 pin D socket transformer coupled digital input and output connector It will output a silent AES EBU bit stream locked to the system reference with either a fixed or variable ratio to the nominal sample rate It will also accept an AES EBU input that can be used as a system reference Table Chapter 10 5 AES EBU Connector Pin Description Pin Description 2 11 AESEBUI 1 4 1 0 O 6 CF AES EBU Ins 8 9 AES EBU Out 2 O S OUT BNC 5V TTL level output Oversample Clock Output is locked to the system reference with a frequency determined by the word clock rate and the oversample output multiplier 10 19 Option Cards WORD OUT BNC 5V TTL level output The Word Clock Out is locked to the system reference with either a fixed or variable ratio to the nominal sample rate CLOCK IN BNC 5V TTL level input The Digital Audio Word Clock or Oversample Clock input is used with the oversample input divider to provide a system speed reference This connector is also used to input word clock If word clock is used as the system reference then the Oversample divider should be set to off ACG Card Setup
130. UX jack on the Keyboard Controller 2 Use a three pole jack plug wired so that the switch contacts between the tip and the ring Warning Do not use a mono jack plug connector 3 The footswitch is programmed to punch the Micro Lynx in and out of record Table Chapter 3 3 AUX Connector Pin Description Pm Descrition Micro Lynx 3 8 06 22 00 Installation Quick Test and Initialization Procedure Micro Lynx 06 22 00 This procedure tests the ability of the different pieces of equipment to communicate with each other and initializes the Micro Lynx Upon completing these procedures you will be ready to run the system Procedure On the Tape Machine 1 EXT Place a reel of time coded tape on the machine s Set the Tape Machine to external speed some tape machines will automatically be set to external by the Micro Lynx On the System Unit 2 POWER POWER LED turns on SYSTEM DATA LED on SYSTEM VALID LED on KEYBOARD SIGNAL LED on KEYBOARD VALID LED on Turning on the System Unit power also provides power to the Keyboard Controller System internal communications are operational Keyboard communications are operational On the Keyboard Controller 3 Lamp test Holding memory MOTION CONTROL LEDs are sequentially tested Micro Lynx Keyboard Control Unit Version x xxx The software revision number is displayed Tran A AUTO Serial TRANSPORT Tran B AUTO Serial TRANSPORT Displa
131. able standard oversample output clock multipliers Clock output will track incoming varispeed time code with zero drift or error 10 13 Option Cards ACG 2 Features 10 14 Sample Rate Ratio ACG 2 includes the ACG 1 features and adds the following e Reads incoming word clock oversample clock or AES EBU bit stream e Generates phase locked silent AES EBU bit stream e Incoming digital audio signal can be used as Micro Lynx system reference e Has independent input and output sample rate ratio selections This can be used for example to lock a 44 1K tape in a system with a 48K tape e The input clock rate can be varied in 0 01 steps to allow offspeed devices or program material to be correctly synchronized A Sample Rate Ratio SRR is the number of digital audio samples per frame Instead of the actual sample rate which tends to be an unwieldy number the Micro Lynx LEDs indicate the constant ratio or SRR and if applicable the ratio modifier Sample rate Frame rate Sample rate ratio For example at a nominal sample rate of 48 000 KHz and a frame rate of 30 Hz the SRR is 1600 At 25 Hz the SRR is 1920 The Micro Lynx LED indicators show selected sample rate ratio If the system frame rate increases or decreases speed not code type then the actual sample rate will increase or decrease to an unknown not very useful number However as both frame rate and sample rate change together the SRR stays con
132. access to list functions The MEM or Memory register key is used with the calculator keypad Use STO to store time code numbers to a memory regis ter and RCL or MEM to recall numbers from a memory register Up to 100 memory registers are available in the Micro Lynx The default is 0 9 Use the Setup menu to select 00 99 memory locations If you select 100 registers you must always enter two digits to store or recall a number To recall a memory press the MEM key followed by the memory register number The memory time code value is displayed To store a time code number press STO followed by MEM and the memory register number Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller SETUP MEM Press SETUP followed by to change the memory size Memory size selects the number of memory spaces that will be available for storing values Table Chapter 8 8 MEM Setup Menu KEY MENU SUB MENU RANGE MEM Memory Option Memory Size 0 9 00 99 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 8 27 Keyboard Controller Group Select Keys GROUP SELECT f LOCK r BUSY r REC eA GRP m LOCK BUSY r REC m SOLO LOCK r BUSY r REC rec a LOOP g8 RDY A C TCG MIDI Solo Mode Group Mode 8 28 MIK022A Figure Chapter 8 7 Group Select Keys The Micro Lynx will control up to three machines that are assigned to the Group keys
133. achine Information Time Code A 1 00 20 00 LL gt L gt L 0 lower left lower right Machine Status Calculator 8 4 Machine Information Micro Lynx 06 22 00 A b Time Code 11 27 06 03 LL Machine Status gt L Calculator 0 Keyboard Controller This area identifies which machines are selected and if master or slave status A capital letter A indicates the master an asterisk indicates the reference machine a small letter b indicates a slave machine and a plus sign indicates that a machine has an offset Time code for the selected machine is displayed Leading zeros are not displayed For example 3 minutes 13 seconds and 2 frames 00 03 13 02 is displayed as 3 13 02 Drop frame code is indicated by separating the seconds and frames digits with a comma rather than a colon For example if the time code above is drop frame it would be written as 3 13 02 This area indicates the tape machine transport status L indicates that the machine is in lock Other status mnemonics include Rewind CUE Cueing R Record gt gt FastForward RLB Rollback r Rehearse Jog Shuttle LOC Locate Ch Chase Stop REP Replay NC No Code This area of the display is active whenever any of the calculator keys are pressed or a time code register or memory is recalled 8 5 Keyboard Controller Normal Operating Display 8 6 11 27 06 03 LL The normal operating display is displayed on
134. ailed to initialize correctly Keyboard display and LEDs fail to Check that the SU has correctly turn on powered up Check the Keyboard to SU cable connection Reset the Keyboard by holding Initiate a Keyboard memory clear CLR and pressing SETUP and reset Table Chapter 3 6 Troubleshooting the Micro Lynx communications with the machines Situation Solution Conditions Machine stays in stop or Micro Lynx Check that the transport control Incorrect or cross wired cables does not read time code cable and time code RDR are connected to the correct transport and time code connectors Machine behaves incorrectly or Check if correct transport interface erratically cable installed Check if correct transport type is selected select A C for external control Micro Lynx 06 22 00 3 13 Chapter 4 Getting Started Introduction Once the Micro Lynx system is installed turn it on Use the basic operating procedures in this chapter to demonstrate the Micro Lynx system features and controls This chapter will help you to quickly become familiar with Micro Lynx operation and capabilities Refer to the Keyboard Controller chapter for more detailed information about each of the keys Turn On and Initialization The Micro Lynx has a battery back up memory system Each time the system is turned on it powers up in the same condition as when powered down All of the setup and transport information previo
135. akes a right angle turn the unused connectors on the cable will face the chassis bottom as shown in Figure 10 10 Hold the folded Option Card cable over the cutout in the Option Card bracket tilt and slide the left side of the card into the groove along the top of the Micro Lynx Side Panel As the card slides into the groove lie it flat on the Option Card bracket Slide the ACG Card against the back panel so that the AES EBU connector and the O S OUT WORD OUT and CLOCK IN jacks are seated in the appropriate cutouts in the back panel Insert the washers and nuts onto the BNC connectors Insert two phillips screws through the ACG Card into the Option Card bracket standoffs and tighten If the M3 Card is fitted insert the Option Card cable connector into J1 on the M3 Card If the VITC Card is fitted insert the Option Card cable connector into J1 on the VITC Card 10 23 Option Cards 18 Connect the other end of the cable into J3 on the Main Board The unused connectors will lie in the open area in the middle of the System Unit unless you have option cards installed MIK055A Figure Chapter 10 11 Installation of the ACG Card 19 Replace the top cover and the six phillips screws 20 Power up the System Unit The Micro Lynx will recognize the ACG Card on power up and the ACG LED on the System Unit OPTION Section will turn on Press SETUP ACG to configure the card functions m Install the ACG Option Turn
136. an Setup menu Tran X Sony Serial Cause A serial communications error has occurred with the Checksum Error specified Sony transport Micro Lynx 06 22 00 5 3 Troubleshooting Self Test Messages Running Self Test Checking Ram 8K Checking Rom 64K Checksum Dspl Contrast Verify Lights LED Brightness No keys pressed Annn Bnnn Xnnn 5 4 The Micro Lynx Keyboard has a Self Test procedure that is invoked by pressing GRP SYS and then confirming the key selection The following messages and information is displayed during the self test process Cause The keyboard self test procedure has been initiated Cause The keyboard RAM is being checked Cause The keyboard ROM is being checked Cause The keyboard PROM is read and the checksum displayed Press any key to continue self test Cause The display contrast is ramped from 3046 to 100 Cause All keyboard LED s are lit for verification Press any key to continue self test Cause The keyboard LED s are ramped from 20 to 100 to check brightness matching Cause The keyboard key test routine is entered Press keys to confirm that they are being correctly scanned the associated LED will also be tested Press SETUP CLR to exit the key test routine Cause The Jog Shuttle test routine is entered turn the wheel to check that the encoder values change Press CLR to exit self test When Self Test is complete the Micro Lynx Keyboard will cold boo
137. an be synchronized with the tape machine group operating as a virtual tape machine that chases the reference machine time code numbers X Ifthe MTC output is connected to the serial port on the SGI workstation running Mediasound the workstation will run as if it were a slave tape machine X Mediasound is similar to a video tape machine in that it uses time code in this case MIDI time code for positional synchronization However when Mediasound is in play it releases to an external AES EBU digital audio reference which then controls its speed and position X The Micro Lynx is specifically designed to generate a digital audio clock reference for digital workstations The Audio Clock Generator Card ACG 2 generates locked digital audio clock signals to control the play speed or sample rate of digital equipment Micro Lynx 9 16 06 22 00 Advanced Features X Ifthe Micro Lynx is equipped with a VITC Option Card it will update the MIDI time code position for Mediasound in jog shuttle and still modes from VITC striped on the video tape This allows an accurate method of spotting current VITC frame numbers to Mediasound for sound effects and post production work Unless the feature is specifically disabled Mediasound is automatically configured for correct operation by the Micro Lynx when Mediasound is put into Chase mode The following options are initialized by the Micro Lynx X The time code type 24 film 25 EBU 30 Dro
138. apter 7 2 Front Panel Indicators and Switches OPTIONS ACG VITC M3 MIDI DATA VALID When turned on a Digital Audio Clock Generator Card is installed There are two versions of the card ACG 1 Word Clock and Oversample Clock Outputs ACG 2 The same as ACG 1 but with AES EBU clock inputs and silent output Word clock or AES EBU can be used as a system reference When turned on the VITC Reader Card is installed When turned on the Third Machine Expansion Card is installed and you may add a third transport to the system This LED indicates that communications signals are passing between the System Unit SU and connected MIDI equipment When turned on it indicates valid serial data is present on the link between the System Unit and the MIDI equipment EXTERNAL COMPUTER DATA VALID KEYBOARD DATA VALID This LED indicates that communications signals are passing between the System Unit and an external computer When turned on it indicates valid serial data on the link between the System Unit and external computer equipment When on this LED indicates that communications signals are passing between the System Unit and the Keyboard Controller When turned on it indicates valid serial data on the link between the System Unit and the Keyboard Controller Micro Lynx 06 22 00 SYSTEM DATA VALID POWER ON Video Reference TIME CODE RDR1 RDR2 OUT System Unit W
139. aracter back lit LCD 33 numeric function keys 12 transport control keys RS422 38 4 baud asynchronous Rack mount or free standing Communications Keyboard MIDI Unbalanced Output Output Level Output Impedance Signal Rise Time Time Code Stability Operating Code Pilot Rate Reference Sources Internal Crystal Timing Source External Video Input Lock Stability Lock Time Tach Frequency Range User Adjustment Required Parallel Interfaces Serial Interfaces RS422 38 4 baud asynchronous 31 25 k baud asynchronous 1 dBm 1 4V pp 100 ohms 4 microseconds 2 microseconds max SMPTE 30 FPS SMPTE Drop Frame 30 FPS DF EBU 25 FPS Film Code 24 FPS 60 59 94 50 48 Hz locked to generator 30 29 97 25 24 Crystal 20 ppm 30 29 97 NTSC 25 PAL Black burst 5V 2 0V nominal Composite sync 5V 8V p p lt 50 microseconds 2 8 seconds nominal 4 2000 Hz nominal playspeed None Use TimeLine parallel cables listed under Required Cables Auto configures from transport menus Requires serial interface cable Auto configures from transport menus Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Transports Time Code Reader Aux Inputs Aux Outputs Video Input Video Output Serial In Out Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Introduction Supports transports manufactured by AEG Akai Alesis Ampex Denon Fostex JVC 3M Mitsubishi Otari Panasonic Saturn Sony Stellavox Studer
140. arate sync point register To clear the source machine s sync point register solo a slave machine then simultaneously press CLR and SYNCP The time code value in each machine s source sync point register is used by the Micro Lynx to automatically calculate an offset for a source machine relative to the reference sync point The offset is calculated as follows Offset Source Sync Point Reference Sync Point The result of this calculation is displayed as a positive or negative number with an absolute value of 12 00 00 00 12 hours or less If the reference sync point has a higher time code number than the source sync point the keyboard displays the offset as a small negative number for example 1 10 00 00 rather than the equivalent large positive number which would be 22 50 00 00 If you change a source sync point value in trim mode or enter a new source sync point value the Micro Lynx automatically recalculates the offset for that machine The reference machine can not have a source sync point register 8 43 Keyboard Controller 8 44 A4 Press this key in TRKS mode to select and deselect the A4 track record enable Procedure Set a Sync Point SOLO B SOLO b bs 2 09 55 00 0 Solo a slave machine CAPT STO LED flashes Store reg or mem b 2 09 55 00 2 09 55 00 Enter or capture a time code value and select a register to store the value 4 SYNCP bo 2 09 55 00 Sync 2 09 5
141. ashes Store reg or mem 1 03 47 17 1 03 47 17 A calculator key selects a register or press MEM and calculator key to select a memory 4 7 IN A 1 03 47 17 A In 1 03 47 17 The time code is stored in the in point register 5 MACRO MACRO LED turns off 1 03 47 17 A In 1 03 47 17 The macro is programmed In this sequence each time that Macro 4 is selected the current time code will be stored in the in point register This is the function that Macro 1 F1 performs The CAPT key captures the current time code value for storage in any of the Micro Lynx registers or memories When you press the CAPT key the value of the time code shown in the display is instantly captured Press a register or memory key to store the time code value If you do not want to store or save the value in a register then press CLR or CAPT a second time Procedure 1 A b 03 13 02 23 You would like to capture this value and store it in the point register 2 CAPT CAPT LED flashes STO LED flashes 8 53 Keyboard Controller equal plus Store reg or mem 03 13 02 23 03 13 02 23 The current time code is placed in the data entry buffer 3 IN 7 CAPT LED turns off STO LED turns off A403 13 02 23 A In 03 13 02 23 The time code is stored in the in point register The Equal key is used in conjunction with the and keys to perform time calculati
142. ately there are a number of different Audio Tape Machines ATRs or film dubbers with the finished music dialog and effects These ATRs are locked to the video master using a TimeLine system controller such as the Keyboard Control Unit or Console Control Unit Then the multiple audio sources are balanced by a mixing console to provide a finished audio master for the program Because this can be quite an elaborate process many modern post production facilities use automated mixing consoles which store mix data such as fader moves mutes etc in computer memory These automated systems can also be locked to the video and audio tape machines via the Lynx System Supervisor and Lynx console interfaces CONSOLE AUTOLOCATOR ATR VTR ean 1 SYNC SYNC RS422 CONTROL TIME CODE CONTROL TIME CODE EXT SYNC CE 5 Ea E HG J ee JESOMME mmm LYNX 1 LYNX 2 SYSTEM SUPERVISOR Os KCU POWER CONSOLE SUPPLY KEYBOARD CONTROL UNIT CONTROL UNIT SMPTE010A Figure Appendix A 10 Automated Mixing System The Modern Electronic Recording Studio Today many record projects and other music recording applica tions are as elaborate as video post production with the number of machines involved and
143. ates in combination with the previous output LEDs It indicates that the selected output sample rate ratio has been automatically pulled up or down by 0 146 for example from 48 000 to 47 952 or from 44 100 to 44 056 When the nominal sample rate is selected the ACG Card will automatically adjust the sample rate ratio by 0 1 if the sample rate requested requires a pull up because the system frame rate is running at 29 97 Hz instead of 30 25 24 Hz Or it will automati cally adjust the sample rate ratio by 0 1 if the sample rate requires a pull down because the system frame rate is running at 30 25 24 Hz instead of 29 97 Hz Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Option Cards Audio Clock Generator Outputs i TIME CODE M TiME INE RDR1 RDR2 OUT AUXIN AUXOUT at MIDI um i r AUDIO CLOCK GENERATOR 3 THRU OUT AES EBU O S OUT WORD OUT CLOCKIN POWER VIDEO REF TRANSPORT 1 iN THRU TRANSPORT 2 KEYBOARD asus el VITC 017 Figure Chapter 10 7 Audio Clock Generator Inputs Outputs ACG 1 Outputs ACG 2 Outputs Inputs Micro Lynx 06 22 00 The ACG 1 Card uses the WORD OUT and O S OUT jacks on the back of the System Unit The other ports and jacks in the Audio Clock Generator section are not installed O S OUT BNC 5V TTL level output The Oversample Clock Output is locked to the system reference with a frequency determined by the word clock rate and the oversample output multiplier WORD O
144. ationships will be maintained any offsets will be transferred to the slave machines Press and hold the new master machine key A C TCG followed by SETUP Procedure Change the Master Machine default operation 1 b t 1 09 55 00 0 The normal group operating display 2 SETUP at t B5 1 00 00 00 Si 0 Press and hold B then press SETUP the Master and reference machine will be reselected In this example the B machine is selected as the new master Note The original offset in B will transfer to the a and t machines as the system time code reference machine changes with the Master Separate the Master and Reference Machines Micro Lynx 06 22 00 4 17 Getting Started Do an Edit Procedure 4 18 Note If Setup Group option REF follow MSTR is set to OFF then when the Master is changed the reference machine will remain the same See SETUP in this section and the Keyboard Control section for more information on this feature 3 SETUP t B5 1 00 00 00 0 Press and hold B then press SETUP the Master machine only will be reselected In this example the B machine is selected as the new master Note The Master still has an offset from the time code reference machine Change the Reference Machine 4 GRP SETUP Hold the GRP key and add groups in the order of priority Clear all machines from the group 5 GRP B GRP
145. audio bit stream locked to the Micro Lynx system reference This information is used by the SGI workstation to control the play speed of the digital audio Set the desired sample rate using the Nominal S Rate Out section of the SETUP ACG Menu When Mediasound is in Chase mode it automatically detects and adjusts to this setting On the Micro Lynx Keyboard press the SETUP key followed by the ACG key These two keys are next to each other in the top left corner of the keyboard Pressing SETUP puts the Micro Lynx into setup mode which is used to configure the system The Last Next keys are used to step through setup options and the keys are used to select the required parameters Note In the following instructions it is not necessary to exit setup mode after each step Procedure Set the system sample rate 1 SETUP ACG Selection NOM S Rate Out 44 100 ks s You are in the ACG Setup Menu 2 Use to select the correct sample rate 3 SETUP Exit Setup mode Set the ACG variable rate output option to Off Procedure 1 SETUP ACG Setup ACG Options Selection NOM S Rate Out 44 100 ks s Select ACG setup Micro Lynx 9 20 06 22 00 MIDI Time Code Setup Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Advanced Features 2 Last Next Selection Var Ratio Out Off 3 Use to turn Variable Ratio Output off 4 SETUP Exit Setup mode The Micro Lynx generates MIDI time code which is used by
146. bu zi ola ola gt MIDI OR MAC E 8 E 8 E 8 2 EXT SYNC INTERFACE SE JE JBE MEC 5 VSG EE un ACG WORD CLOCK POWER SUPPLY TIME CODE KEYBOARD CONTROLLER SMPTE009A Figure Appendix A 12 Micro Lynx with a Digital Audio Workstation An excellent solution to the problem is offered by the Micro Lynx Digital Audio Clock Generator ACG Card option It provides a means of referencing the digital audio workstation to the master time code using word clock sample rate data or AES EBU digital audio bit stream which contains timing data The ACG card gen erates a digital audio clock that is locked to the Micro Lynx system reference and DAW uses it to lock and run its internal sample rate clock A 21 The SMPTE Future A 22 It s even possible to varispeed the master tape The Digital Audio Clock Card automatically adjusts the ACGs word clock rate If the tape speeds up or slows down the DAW will adjust to match the new play speed within the limits of the disk system As we enter the digital era time code continues to be an impor tant practical solution to multiple equipment communication and control SMPTE Time Code and MTC are already being used for applica tions far beyond their original purpose Outside the worlds of music recording and video post production SMPTE is used to automate light shows at rock concerts control laser beams
147. c P Rec Play 4 Record Out Pulse Play P Rec Play Pulse Stop P Rec Stop P Play Stop Pulse Opto Special Opto 5 Rehearse In Latch Reh Pulse Reh P Reh Play P Reh Reclog L Reh Reclog Pulse Rec Save as Rec 7 Approach Speed 20 254 8 Bandwidth Limit Off On Serial TC T Timer 1 Until Locked Not Locked NEXT Lock Delay 0 50 10 NEXT Park Window 0 10 10 Resolved The Micro Lynx controls the speed of the machines capstan It is used when synchronizing Wild The machine capstan is set to its own internal reference and the Micro Lynx does not control its speed Use it when striping time code or if the tape has no time code This advanced feature should be used only by an experienced engineer or technician It allows the wild speed of the machine to be adjusted by the operator when a voltage controlled machine does not run at the right speed before synchronizing It can also be used to adjust the wild speed of a tape that was recorded off pitch Capstan speed trim is separately retained in memory for each transport type It is restored when the transport is selected It is NOT erased when CLR TRAN is pressed It is only erased if a complete memory clear is performed CLR SYS Selects the time code source for the machine it is normally set to LTC Selects the conditions when the Micro Lynx will defeat the machines lifters to read time code from the tape it is usually set to Normal In Norma
148. c operation also Clear a Register RCL Recall reg or mem 1 09 55 00 0 Press MEM or a register number 4 B OFST 1 09 55 00 Ofst 1 00 00 00 The register or memory contents are displayed 5 CLR 5 A b t 1 09 55 00 ue m 0 The register display is cleared CLR SYS Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller 6 CLR SYS Press ENTR to confirm Since this key combination resets the System Unit to its default condition you are asked to confirm this action ENTR SHTL System Unit Clearing Now Press any other key to abort the reset CLR SETUP 7 CLR SETUP Press ENTR to confirm Since this key combination resets the Keyboard Controller to its default condition you are asked to confirm this action ENTR SHTL Holding memory unless you press and hold CLR key within 1 second Lamp test Holding Memory The Keyboard resets All memory settings are retained 8 CLR Lamp test Clearing Memory If the CLR key is held within 1 second of pressing ENTR the Keyboard resets and clears memory settings CLR TRAN 9 SOLO A SOLO A 1 00 00 00 0 Select solo mode Select the machine to reset 10 CLR TRAN Transport Clearing Now The selected machine is reset to factory default parameters Remember it is not necessary to reselect the transport 0 TIME VID TIME When not used as a 0 in calculator mode th
149. cally or sequentially by pressing the LAST and NEXT keys Step through the menu options by pressing the and keys The setup key options are provided in the following table Table Chapter 8 2 Setup Key Description GRP GROUP OPTIONS 0 SEARCH MODE T CHASE GROUP REF FOLLOW MSTR TP OFF ON 2 GROUP PARKAHEAD L 0 30 25 3 GRP LED STATUS T NORMAL XL TIMECODE LAST NEXT LOOP LOOP OPTIONS 0 AFTER EDIT T RE EDIT L REPLAY AFTER REPLAY TE END XL REPEAT 2 AFTER END TF STOP XL RECUE LAST NEXT MACRO PROGRAM MACRO L 0 9 1 2 3 8 8 9 MEM MEMORY OPTION L MEMORY SIZE Tr 0 9 L 00 99 MIDI MIDI OPTIONS 0 MIDI OUT JACK OFF MTC MIDI DATA DATA VF THRU 1 I F OUT JACK OFF MTC MIDI DATA DATA MIDI THRU MAC OUT JACK OFF TL MIDI DATA DATA MIDI THRU JACK TE MIDI IN L MIDI OUT MTC SOURCE E MIDI IN JACK X 5 MIDI DATA SRC t MIDI IN JACK X I F JACK MAC JACK MIDI RESOLVE TL OFF L ACG SERVO N LAST NEXT 7 o RDY RECORD OPTIONS 2 0 REC ADV 30 IN L 0 255 1 REC ADV 30 OUT L 0 255 2 REC ADV 15 IN L 0 255 REC ADV 15 OUT L 0 255 REC ADV 7 5 IN L 0 255 5 REC ADV 7 5 OUT L 0 255 LAST NEXT 1 PRESS EVENT KEY THEN DESIRED NUMBER
150. cations using SMPTE time code Quick Reference Guide A graphical chart of the Micro Lynx Setup Options Cable Reference Guide Provides setup and cabling information to help you configure and use the Micro Lynx Auto Serial Transport Table Contains a list of the serially controlled transports currently recognized by the transport menu setting AUTO Serial TRANSPORT Key Combination Guide Provides Key and Key Combination Identification Numbers for stuck key errors Glossary An alphabetic list of terms used during the discussion of the Micro Lynx Micro Lynx 06 22 00 1 2 06 22 00 Introduction Why SMPTE SMPTE Made Simple The Time Code Tutor from TimeLine When the television broadcast industry moved from film and live performance to prerecorded video production a method was re quired to reliably synchronize and edit the new medium Historically film rushes were lined up at the clapper board and rubber stamped with footage numbers and by default film was mechanically held in sync by the sprocket holes Unfortunately video tape had neither of these attributes This created a problem of how to get the music pictures dialogue and effects all to begin and run at the same time The solution was SMPTE time code SMPTE is a signal with spe cific address information that can be recorded on audio or video tape and used to position them accurately In 1971 the Societ
151. ce the Micro Lynx has been initialized For example Solo Mode SOLO A gt L A511 27 06 03 0 Group Mode A A511 27 06 03 LL gt L gt L 0 Indicates which machine is selected Status information is displayed for that machine capital letter indicates that the machine selected is the master Remember any machine can be the master A lower case letter b indicates that the machine selected is a slave An asterisk indicates that the machine is the time code reference A plus indicates that the machine is offset from the reference transport An gt L indicate that it is in play and locked An gt W indicates that the machine is in wild speed That is the Micro Lynx is controlling the machine but not synchronizing it Time code for the group or selected machine Indicates whether the machine or group are in lock and which system reference they are locked to This example uses LL the following reference designations are also used Internal Fix Internal Variable External Video Aux VSO ACG gt In group mode two letters are displayed The first letter indicates that the master machine is locked to the system speed reference The second letter indicates that all of the other machines in the synchronized group are locked Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Calculator Display Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller When any of the Calculator keys 00 9 are pressed the digit is displayed in t
152. cent tracks For this reason many engineers leave a guard band a blank track next to the time code track even when printing at the correct level To remove the need for leaving two blank tracks one track on either side time code is usually printed on the outermost track in multitrack formats i e track 24 on a multitrack machine Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Reshaping Time Code Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Appendix In video and digital audio applications always make sure that the time code generator and machines are properly referenced together when printing time code Your generator must be connected to the same external video sync signal as the video or digital machine otherwise when synchronizing the video machine s will start off in the right place then slowly drift apart With digital audio machines the sample rate or word clock must be locked to the time code This is normally done by using a video sync signal as a common timing reference for the generator and the digital machine Set both to EXT VID before printing time code If you do not have a sync pulse generator the Micro Lynx Video Sync Generator VSG option card can be installed and used to generate a referenced composite sync signal for your video or digital machine Specific types of video sync include black burst color bars and composite These video sync signals are often collectively called house sync or the signal that s universal throughout the productio
153. chine to the system speed reference When the master machine is locked a letter appears after the time code in the display This letter also indicates the specific system speed reference that the machines are locked to Internal Fixed the Micro Lynx internal crystal default Internal Variable the Micro Lynx internal frequency synthesizer External Video source of video sync Aux pilot tone VSO varispeed the master machine s play speed ACG digital input signal to the Audio Clock Generator gt 4 8 13 Keyboard Controller 8 14 REH REC When all machines have achieved lock a second letter is displayed sample sequence might be as follows Procedure i A b c 1 01 14 07 2 0 The default display shows solo or group mode and the current time code location 2 gt PLAY A b c 1 01 42 17 I gt L gt gt 0 Time code should be running The master is locked to the internal fixed reference A b c 1 01 14 07 II gt L gt L gt L 0 A second l is displayed when all machines are locked to the internal fixed reference In solo mode the Rehearse command is issued to the soloed machine if it is record enabled and in lock In group mode the Rehearse command is issued to all machines currently assigned to the group that are record enabled if the group is locked The Rehearse command can be issued manually by pressing the REH key or by pressing the REH and PLAY keys toge
154. command When this prompt is used the command will involve resetting the system Solution Press ENTR if you wish to proceed or any other key to exit Cause The macro programming function has been entered by pressing SETUP MACRO Macros that are available for programming are displayed Solution Press a Calculator key to select a Macro to program Cause MEM has been pressed and Micro Lynx is prompting for a memory selection Solution Select memory number Cause RCL Recall has been pressed and Micro Lynx is prompting for a register or memory selection Solution Select a valid register or press MEM followed by the memory number Cause Trim mode has been selected and an invalid register or no register is present in the calculator data entry buffer Solution Use RCL to select the register you want to trim or CLR to cancel 5 9 Troubleshooting 5 10 Set an in point Solo a grp first Solo the ref group Store reg or mem Cause Edit mode has been entered and no edit In Point has been set Solution Capture or enter a time code value and store it in the In Point register Cause You have attempted to recall or store a sync point or offset register while in group mode Solution These operations may only be performed in solo or group status mode Select solo or status modes and repeat the operation Cause A reference sync point can not be captured in group mode or if a slave machi
155. ction Number The number toggles the track The selected track is cleared CLR TRKS Clears all of the tracks Toggles the track Jog Wheel Selects the track number Micro Lynx 8 36 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller Procedure A B t 1 09 55 07 0 1 TRKS TRKS LED flashes Selected TRAN LEDs flash The selected machine and TRAN LEDs flash Change machine by pressing a different machine select key 2 01 02 03 04 TRAN B 13 TRK 4 24 Press NEXT use the Jog Wheel or enter the track number number less than 10 must be preceded by a zero Track is safe or not available If this message is displayed the track is not available or must be enabled 3 and TRAN B 135 TRK 5 24 Press plus to enable tracks Press minus to disable safe tracks 4 CLR TRKS Press CLR TRKS to make all tracks safe 5 TRKS A B t B5 1 09 55 07 0 Press TRKS or a motion key to return to normal operation Micro Lynx 06 22 00 8 37 Keyboard Controller 8 38 Video Tracks Video Auto Reset SETUP e TRKS Press SETUP followed by TRKS to enter the Tracks option menu The two selections in this menu relate specifically to video machines Table Chapter 8 13 TRKS Setup Menu key menu SUB MENU RANGE Track Options 0 Video Tracks Safe Ready 1 Video Auto Rst Off On Ready allows access to the video insert track enable and assemble mode for vid
156. d interpreted and acted on by a microprocessor A byte is made up of bits which can be either a or 1 On a tape recorder the motor driven spindle that drives the tape across the heads A synchronizer controls the capstan motor to keep the tape in sync See Time Code Type See Setup Mode The process of defining the user selected operational parameters such as defining a specific transport or lifter defeat mode A synchronizing signal on the edge of a tape which provides a reference for tracking control and tape speed Central Processing Unit A computers central microprocessor responsible for all system logic and memory organization Digital Audio Workstation Usually refers to a computer based hard disk recording and editing environment The unit of measurement used to describe a sounds amplitude The measurement is relative and logarithmic Drop frame See drop frame Input amplifier that is designed to amplify the difference between two signals and reject common signals Output amplifier designed to provide two signals that are completely identical but with opposite phase Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Digital Digital Audio Display Drop Frame EBU Edit Decision List EDL EDL ERR EXT VID Filter Foley Format Frame Frame Lock Frame Rate Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Appendix Literally using digits A Computer is a typical digital device Audio signal that has been converted digitize
157. d into a stream of binary numbers for storing or transmitting that are equivalent to the original analog audio signal Numeric display Time Code Message Display Drop frame is one of the two SMPTE code types and is the NTSC color television standard When using this code type 108 specific frame numbers are dropped for each hour of time code See the Appendix for more detailed time code information EBU time code is a 25 frame code running at 25 fps A list either on paper or in computer memory of time code addresses indicating successive scenes of source video footage that make up a complete program See Edit Decision List Error or offset error Indicates that the display shows the difference between the actual position of the machine in relation to where the system expects it to be A source of external video sync used by the synchronizer as a timing reference Can be color black black burst color bars or composite sync A digital or analog process which has the effect of removing unwanted frequencies from an audio signal The process of adding incidental sounds such a footsteps door slams etc to a video program or motion picture See Time Code Format A single image on a motion picture film or a television picture formed from two interlaced fields One complete video scanning cycle one complete SMPTE time code word Frame lock maintains synchronization between the Master and Slave transports using the po
158. d Controller Entering a different value in either the out point in point or duration registers will cause the duration to be recalculated Auxiliary Function Keys RCL 8 50 CALCULATOR STO MACRO CAPT eB 8 8B Omm A4 CUE TC F 4 5 6 SYNCP OFST A2 A3 1 2 3 PRE POST REF VID B m M A gt Figure Chapter 8 9 Auxiliary Function Keys The Auxiliary Function Keys are used to perform arithmetic operations with the calculator keys and in combination with other keys to facilitate Micro Lynx operations The RCL key recalls time code values that are stored in the Micro Lynx registers and memories Some registers are specific to each machine for example sync point and offset To display the sync point or offset for a machine solo the machine or select group stat mode before recalling these registers Procedure 1 RCL RCL LED flashes Recall reg or mem 1 03 47 17 A calculator key selects a register or press MEM and calculator key to select a memory 2 7 IN Micro Lynx 06 22 00 STO Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller 1 03 47 17 A In 1 23 00 00 The in point time code is displayed and the RCL LED turns off The STO key is used to store time code values in the Micro Lynx registers and memories Press the STO key Store
159. d cautions will be displayed with the appropriate text Occasionally information that provides an enhanced understanding of the text will be provided as a Note Note Note provides information about or an explanation of a topic related to the subject being discussed Warning Warnings describe a procedure that if not followed as specified could potentially cause damage to the equipment a loss of data or create an error condition Manual Contents and Use Introduction Applications Installation Getting Started Troubleshooting This manual starts with information that is used most frequently and moves to less frequently used information To use the manual effectively first review the applications and system configurations presented in the Applications chapter to determine your requirements and preferences Then use the Installation chapter to install the Micro Lynx and make the correct equipment connections Follow the initialization and start up tutorial described in the Getting Started chapter to get a hands on demonstration of the Micro Lynx capabilities If you experience any difficulties refer to the Troubleshooting chapter to analyze the problem Refer to the subsequent chapters for detailed information about each of the Micro Lynx functions Provides a high level overview of the Micro Lynx system and a broad feature list Presents common applications and configurations for Micro Lynx audio video and MIDI
160. d hold the SETUP key then press the key A C or TCG of the machine that you want to select as master This LED indicates that the corresponding machine A C is in play and locked to the system reference This LED indicates that the corresponding transport is in motion but not locked Generally one of the following operations is in progress Start of Play Rewind Fast Forward Shuttle Jog If this LED is always turned on then the corresponding machine A C is in wild speed mode In wild speed mode the Micro Lynx is not controlling the machine s capstan and the machine is not locked to the system reference It is used to stripe a new reel of time code or if a tape has no time code See Getting Started for an example of striping time code This LED indicates that the corresponding machine is in Record If it is flashing then the machine is record enabled it will go into record when a REC command is issued The TCG key selects or deselects the Time Code Generator TCG The TCG can be soloed or included in a group like a tape machine Use the TCG options menu in Setup mode to select the time code type and generation method The generator will always jam to the incoming reader code and can be set to either run continuously or follow group transport operation If necessary an offset can be entered 8 29 Keyboard Controller MIDI 8 30 The TCG LED indicates that SMPTE time code is being generated or will be generated when
161. dM 4 18 Reset the System sias sen enne eren s 4 21 CIS M e 4 21 ME Sa Stop io 4 21 _ Micro Lynx viii 06 22 00 Table of Contents CLR SETUP ication eer e HR RETE HE IRE US RISE 4 21 MTS 4 92 Customize the Micro Lynx Setup nee essent e ness inen 4 23 SOLD esae cafes ceri tse ec Acte see cre Mri ot eed 4 24 Chapter 5 gt Troubleshooting eones satses eatae po uie e eee ea aea gei eae eee ue uoa dann 5 1 Introduction aot RET MN NES AMETE 5 1 System Error Messages 2 a i 5 1 Self Test 5 4 Error M s8ages esci en n me n 5 5 innu 5 6 eot nA enint te ete 5 9 Chapter 6 Operational Features 2 66 esee ettet eese eese esset eee eee eese 6 1 Introduction 6 1 SMPTE Time Code Synchronization 2 1 0 0 0 600 0000000000000000000 6 2 Selecting Which Time Code Standard
162. de for sound effects layback The Micro Lynx VITC Option Card can provide Pro Tools with an MTC number based on the current VITC number being decoded from the video machines video output This allows frame accurate update of current time code position in Jog Shuttle and Still modes The operation of the VITC Option Card is simple and automatic as described in the setup operations below Procedure 1 SETUP F3 Setup VITC Options Selection Group Select Off VITC setup option menu 2 and Select the transport that is connected to the VITC card 8 LAST NEXT Setup VITC Options Selection Reader Mode Auto Set correct scan mode The Micro Lynx TCG needs to be set as follows for the MIDI time code generator to operate correctly Procedure 1 SETUP TCG Setup VITC Options Selection TCG Group Mode Play Wind Set the TCG Group mode to Play Wind 2 LAST NEXT Setup VITC Options Selection TCG Still Mode On Set the TCG Still mode to On Micro Lynx 9 8 06 22 00 Advanced Features System Setup And Configuration Pro Tools as Master Micro Lynx 06 22 00 When using Pro Tools as a Master set up Pro Tools and the Micro Lynx for Slave operation as previously described In Master mode the Micro Lynx reads MTC from Pro Tools and will control the transports so they chase and lock to the Pro Tools time code position The Pro Tools System may be used as the master transport in the Micr
163. e and finally tach pulses that are derived from the rotation of the tape machine s capstan motor Synchronizer Essentials A 16 A synchronizer reads time code from two or more machines then by manipulating the speed of each machine s capstan it forces the two machines to play tape at the same speed This process is called locking The Micro Lynx system offers the following synchronization mode Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Phase or Sync Lock Appendix Phase or Sync Lock emulates the old control track or pilot tone method of synchronization The TimeLine system reads the time codes and synchronizes the transport taking into account any de liberate offsets Once the system is locked the slaves only use the speed information that is derived from the time code and specific time code addresses are ignored This allows the tape machines to stay in lock even if the time code relationships change The time code change is reported but the synchronizer makes no corrective action This is the normal method of operation Advanced Applications Video Editing Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Video editing is the process of assembling raw footage into a fin ished television program Shooting the raw footage is part of what s called television production Video editing is part of the post production process Consider an average television program perhaps a sitcom or a documentary The action constantly shifts from one scene to another moving indoors
164. e TIME key provides Micro Lynx 06 22 00 8 41 Keyboard Controller 1 PRE A1 2 POST A2 8 42 VID PRE A1 POST access to the Time register Press RCL or STO then TIME to recall the current value or store a new value in the Time register The current time code of the machine selected will be displayed To display the current time code of a different machine press the appropriate machine select key followed by RCL then TIME Press this key in TRKS mode to select and deselect the video insert track record enable on a video machine When not used as a 1 in calculator mode the PRE key provides access to the Preroll register This register may be accessed during store recall and trim operations The value in the preroll register is used to calculate the preroll position Preroll position In Point Preroll value The preroll position is the time code location that the Micro Lynx uses to cue the master machine during locate and edit functions The default value for preroll is five seconds Press this key in TRKS mode to select and deselect the A1 track record enable When not used as a 2 in calculator mode the POST key provides access to the postroll register This register may be accessed during store recall and trim operations The value in the postroll register is used by the Micro Lynx to calculate the postroll time code position at the end of an edit sequence The postroll position is the time cod
165. e up Set the front of the bracket in place on the threaded stud on the inside of the front panel Set the bracket down and slide it under the left edge of the Back Panel PCB Insert and tighten the screws removed from the back panel and from the Back Panel PCB Place a nut on the threaded stud and secure the bracket to the front panel See Figure 10 9 05 Figure Chapter 10 9 Install the Option Card Bracket Locate and remove the black rubber bumper on the corner of the ACG Card See Figure 10 10 The ACG Card is mounted on the left side of the System Unit If you have the M3 Card or VITC Card already installed in the Micro Lynx remove the Option Card cable before installing the ACG Card Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Option Cards The Option Card Cable is a ribbon cable with four connectors attached On one end of the cable the second connector is about 3 5 from the end Insert this end into connector J1 on the component side of the ACG Card The connector should be attached so that the cable falls away from the ACG Card as illustrated in Figure 10 10 REMOVE RUBBER BUMPER p 056 Figure Chapter 10 10 Option Cable Installation Position the ACG Card component side down with connector J1 toward the front of the System Unit Approximately 1 25 from the J1 connector bend the Option Card cable under so that it m
166. e ballistics of the particular machine Shuttle is most effectively used in the solo mode to accurately position a single machine for setting sync points in points and out points If you use the Shuttle function in group mode the wheel controls only the master machine all other machines will chase the master machine and attempt to maintain their correct park ahead offset The EN TR key is used to confirm operations that may cause a loss of data or setup information For example CLR SYS will reset the System Unit ENTR is used to confirm this action 8 17 Keyboard Controller Device Select Keys SETUP 8 18 DEVICE SELECT SETUP SYS L ACG e Fi 1 F2 21 Figure Chapter 8 6 Device Select Keys The Device Select keys determine the system operating mode set system transport GPI and Audio Clock Generator card operating parameters and other system functions The Micro Lynx has a comprehensive setup procedure for customizing the system for a particular mode transport or application The setup options are organized by function in a menu type format with 14 option categories Key Category ACG Audio Clock Generator SYS System TRAN Transport EVNT Events MEM Memory TCG Time Code Generator amp System Reference GRP Group LOOP Loop RDY Record Ready TRKS Tracks KEY Rollback REH REC Operation EDIT Edit MACRO
167. e location that the Micro Lynx will roll the transports to at the end of an edit The default value for postroll is five seconds Postroll position Out Point Postroll value Press this key in TRKS mode to select and deselect the A2 track record enable Micro Lynx 06 22 00 3 REF A3 4 SYNCP A4 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 REF A3 SYNCP Keyboard Controller When not used as a 3 in calculator mode the REF key provides access to the Reference Sync Point register This register may be accessed during store recall and trim operations Press CLR and REF simultaneously to clear the reference sync point register The time code number in the reference sync point register is used by the Micro Lynx to automatically calculate offsets for any source machines with source sync points entered The offsets are calculated as follows Offset Source Sync Point Reference Sync Point If you change the reference sync point value in Trim mode or enter a new reference sync point value the Micro Lynx automatically recalculates and stores the correct offset for all source machines with active source sync point values Press this key in TRKS mode to select and deselect the A3 track record enable When not used as a 4 in calculator mode the SYNCP key provides access to the Source Sync Point register for a specified machine This register may be accessed in store recall and trim operations Each source machine in the system has a sep
168. e not the same thing they make a powerful combination when the Micro Lynx or System Supervisor puts them together Any SMPTE time code application involves three basic functions First you need a generator to produce the actual SMPTE signal that goes onto tape Second you need a reader to read the SMPTE time code from tape Finally there s the job itself what you want to accomplish SMPTE can be used with a resolver to ensure that a single tape machine runs at a consistent speed It can also be used with an autolocator that stores a number of SMPTE addresses in memory and chases to those addresses on command or when you want to lock one or more devices to a master tape machine with a synchronizer In the early days a different device was quite often required to perform each of these functions Today TimeLine has several products that perform them all the Lynx Time Code Module with a Keyboard Control Unit compact high end high performance units and the Micro Lynx a high performance project or smaller studio system Things To Know About Generating Time Code A 14 Time code generated and striped on tape must ultimately be played back and read so you must determine the optimum level for your master tape before generating the time code Master tapes are generally printed at about 6 dB If you print code at too low a level the reader will have trouble reading it but if you print it too hot it will bleed audibly onto adja
169. e transport will change with it The default time in frames 0 30 that the slave transports will park ahead of the Master in stop This value is modified by the system to optimize lock time unless set to zero when the machine will always park at the Master position The GRP LEDs can be set to indicate e Normal status the machines selected to the group Time code present Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller In normal status the GRP LEDs A C TCG will be on if a machine is selected to the group In time code status the GRP LEDs turn on when a machine is in play and time code is present The LEDs turn off in stop and if a machine is in play with no time code present If time code present status is selected when the GRP key is pressed the LEDs will switch to normal status and turn on to indicate those machines selected to the group GRP SETUP Press and hold the GRP key then press the Setup key to clear all machines in the group and select a new reference machine The first machine selected becomes the new time code reference machine All positional information is retained and any offset information is correctly transferred to the new slave machines Remember The time code reference machine does not have to be the master machine See Setup A C to select a new master machine Procedure 1 GRP A b t 1 03 47 17 m ket 0 A is the reference machine 2 GRP SETUP Hold the GRP
170. e you re starting from Be sure to write down your Macro key presses so that if they get erased you can easily reenter them There are ten Macro registers Several are loaded with instructions from the factory although these can also be written over with your own Macros The F1 and F2 keys recall the Macros stored into Macro registers 1 and 2 These two Macros can be recalled with the touch of only one key F1 F2 while the other eight Macros require two key presses the MACRO key and the register number 0 9 to be recalled There is a limit of approximately 40 key presses for each Macro so choose your Macros carefully to minimize the number of key presses required CAUTION When recalling Macros be sure to always release the MACRO key completely it will flash before pressing the register number key as inadvertent Macro erasure can occur Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Deleting a Macro Operational Features To enter new information in a Macro it must be cleared first To erase the contents in a Macro register press and hold the MACRO key Then press the register number 0 9 to delete the contents See the above Caution to prevent accidentally erasing a Macro Using the Preprogrammed Macros Register 0 Register 1 Register 2 Register 3 Register 4 Register 5 Register 6 Register 7 Register 8 Register 9 Five of the nine Macro registers come preprogrammed with commonly used functions To use t
171. eLine VSG if an External Video reference is selected To select the external or internal video reference source see the Keyboard Section of this manual 7 3 System Unit Transport Connectors POWER VIDEO REF AUDIO CLOCK GENERATOR f 0 5 OUT WORD OUT CLOCKIN AES EBU TRANSPORT 1 TRANSPORT 2 Figure Chapter 7 4 Transport Connectors MIK012B TRANSPORT 1 2 40 dual inline headers All machine control signals pass through this 40 pin input output port The transport control signals capstan servo signal and machine tallies needed for the transport to correctly operate and synchronize are on this connector See the Installation Chapter or TRAN under SETUP in the Keyboard Controller chapter for information on how to select the transport type and configure this connector for your machine Table Chapter 7 1 Transport Connector Pin Description Pin Description Description 5 FastFowad TC Rewind 7 Mute 1 7 08 Pulupcommon 5V 12 Servo relay B normally closed contact 13 Video Track Enable INS 15 17 Audio Track Enable A2 19 21 23 25 27 29 Servo Relay B Normally Open 30 Capstan Control Voltage Contact Audio Track Enable A1 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 System Unit Time Code Readers and Generator ae ie POWER VIDEO REF Micro Lynx 06 22 00 TIME CODE AUDIO CLOCK GENERATOR j O S OUT WORDOUTCLOCKIN RDR1 RDR2 OUT AUXIN
172. eatures Controlling One Transport Device with the Micro Lynx Micro Lynx 06 22 00 1 10 11 With all of the hardware powered down connect a machine control cable and a time code cable between the Micro Lynx and the deck you want to control The machine control cable goes from the Micro Lynx s Transport 1 connector to the deck s remote control input The time code cable goes from the deck to the RDR 1 input on the Micro Lynx Connect a video sync source to the Video Ref port on the Micro Lynx and to the video machine you are controlling If you do not have an external video sync source connect the Micro Lynx Video Ref port to the VTR ref input and see step 6 below Analog audio tape transports do not require the video sync connection Turn on the Micro Lynx On the Micro Lynx Keyboard the group select keys will flash Press machine key A Next you need to specify the type of machine you are using Enter setup mode by pressing the SETUP key on the Micro Lynx keyboard Press the TRAN key to select the type of machine you are going to synchronize Use the Next Last and keys to select the correct type of machine from the menu Note If your deck does not appear in the menu refer to the Micro Lynx Manual Appendix Table 2 for alternate choices The Micro Lynx has an internal video sync source If you did not connect an external video sync source in step 2 press the TCG key and use the Next Last and
173. ed Typical Uses Multiple transport and audio post production work Expands the Micro Lynx system to three transports providing you with a larger system and greater flexibility The Third Machine M3 card also includes an interface for the Sony VO 5850 Considerations The M3 card supports all transports and is required for interface with the Sony VO 5850 Install the Micro Lynx VSG card if an external video sync source is not available Micro Lynx 2 6 06 22 00 Applications Micro Lynx with a Digital Audio Workstation ATR ATR DTR DIGITAL AUDIO WORKSTATION CONTROL TIME CODE CONTROL TIME CODE MIDI OR MAC INTERFACE WORD CLOCK TIME CODE POWER SUPPLY 55555 0 55 acces am 007 KEYBOARD CONTROLLER Figure Chapter 2 5 Micro Lynx with a Digital Audio Workstation Typical Uses Music composition post production and Digital Audio Workstation With the Audio Clock Generator ACG card installed the Micro Lynx can synchronize a Digital Audio Workstation with the rest of your system Micro Lynx accomplishes this by providing the Digital Audio Workstation with word and oversample clocks locked to any of the available system references including varispeed Considerations Your Digital Audio Workstation should be able to receive an external word or oversample clock Micro Ly
174. ed Features Section Pro Tools to include VITC revise VITC Option Card Section and miscellaneous editing changes H 1 27 93 1024 or Updated Option Cards Section to reflect card installation in new metal work Updated TOC and higher Index accordingly 2 22 94 N A Updated all Setup Menu tables added Code Only Master in Operational Features section Key Combinations in Appendix and minor editing throughout Updated TOC and Index accordingly K 8 1 95 Advanced Features Using Mediasound with the Micro Lynx and Appendix SMPTE Made Simple revised TOC and Index updated accordingly M 5997 Remove FCC Notice Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Limited Warranty Labor and Parts Parts Only Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Preface TimeLine Vista Inc TimeLine warrants this product against defects in material or workmanship as follows 1 For a period of ninety 90 days from the date of purchase TimeLine will at it s option either perform necessary repairs at it s expense or pay the labor charges of others it authorizes to repair the defective product After the initial 90 day period labor charges are the responsibility of the purchaser 2 In addition TimeLine will supply at no charge new or rebuilt replacements for defective parts for a period of one 1 year from the date of purchase To obtain warranty service the purchaser must notify TimeLine in writing during the initial ninety 90 day period TimeLine will then auth
175. egrated system that works with both SMPTE and MIDI Major studios and post production houses require exacting performance specifications long term durability and technical support Micro Lynx not only meets these requirements but also offers easy installation guaranteed system compatibility and cost effectiveness for a complete system solution The Keyboard Controller allows remote control of up to three machines plus generation of locked SMPTE and MIDI time codes Editing and control commands are entered on the keyboard Time code status and register contents appear on the 80 character LCD display The Keyboard Controller serially communicates command and system status information to the System Unit over a telephone type cable The System Unit has wideband high speed 1 10 to 60x play speed bi directional time code readers and a multi standard time code generator There are two machine controller synchronizers with software parameter selection for over 120 different transport types MAC and IBM computer control ports MIDI ports GPI and mute relays and system status outputs Setup menus provide convenient user access to configure the system for specific applications Introduction Features Micro Lynx Keyboard Controller KBD Independent CPU with battery backed up RAM retains all time code and system setup data when powered down Menu driven tape transport selection from the Keyboard Supports subframe offsets Full transpo
176. elect the frame rate and code type These options should be the same as the code type and rate you want to use in Mediasound SETUP Exit Setup mode 9 23 Advanced Features Setting Time Code Generator Mode You also need to set the generator mode in Micro Lynx TCG Setup options menu This setting ensures that time code will be transmitted to Mediasound when the attached video transport is jogging or shuttling Procedure 1 SETUP TCG Setup TCG Options Selection System Ref IntFix Select time code generator setup 2 LAST NEXT Setup TCG Options Selection TCG Group Mode Play Mute Select the Group Mode option 3 m Setup TCG Options Selection TCG Group Mode Play Wind Select the Play Wind mode 4 SETUP Exit Setup mode Note The Micro Lynx remembers the settings you programmed After powering down you do not need to repeat the setup steps every time you use the system Micro Lynx Operation Controlling Mediasound with the Micro Lynx 9 24 1 Put Mediasound into Chase mode by clicking the Chase button in the Group Display Area 2 On the Micro Lynx press SOLO then the TCG group select key 3 Use the Micro Lynx calculator keypad to enter the program start time and press STORE TIME to enter a TCG start time 4 Pressing the PLAY key starts the Micro Lynx time code generator TCG and transmits MIDI time code for Mediasound to chase Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Advanced F
177. eliable as the incoming master time code source Any irregularities in speed will be applied to the synchronized slave machines Note video transport CANNOT be slaved to a time code only master with VSO Master as the system reference If the time code source is from a video deck or a video deck will be slaved to the incoming time code source then the System Reference must be EXTVID In this mode the time code source must run at the proper video speed Note A digital audio transport can only be slaved to a code only master source when the time code source AND the digital machine are both referenced to the same external sync In some cases the ACG 2 option card can be applied to this type of operation Setting the Master Machine Type Micro Lynx 06 22 00 In a code only master operation it is generally assumed that the time code source machine cannot be synchronized by the Micro Lynx This can occur for several reasons the time code source generates from a remote location or the machine is not remotely controllable by the Micro Lynx In either case the Master machine transport setup menu selection becomes important The transport menu selection for the code only master machine MUST be set to an analog machine type setting Do not select a video or digital transport type Any analog setting will do 6 19 Operational Features Transport Control In a code only master setup group machine control will originate from the
178. eo machines This option defaults to safe and is inhibited in track select Video Auto Reset works in conjunction with setup menu option 0 Video tracks If Video auto reset is set on and Video tracks is set to ready access is permitted to the video tracks for a single record pass The Micro Lynx allows one record command to be issued to the video machine and then automatically resets the video tracks option back to safe These two options are designed to protect the audio facility from inadvertently recording on the video portion of a work tape However in some circumstances video track enable may be necessary For example when a transfer is being done from one machine to another Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Calculator Keys 00 CLR Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller CALCULATOR EN ASM n 8 9 CUE TC L 97 1 2 AS is E 2 3 UJ 5 REF VID T n 0 ee 00 TIME ETE FR M A o gt Figure Chapter 8 8 Calculator Keys The Micro Lynx Calculator keys perform multiple functions Number Keypad e Register amp Memory Locations e Auxiliary Function When a numbered key is pressed the calculator is active Calculator numbers are entered left to right with the most significant digit first leading zeros are ignored Aux
179. equipment Describes how to install and configure the Micro Lynx system for your specific application Presents initialization start up procedures and basic operating instructions An alphabetic list of error messages that may be displayed including the cause and solution Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Preface Operational Features Contains a description of the basic operational features of the Micro Lynx System Unit Provides a detailed description of the Micro Lynx System Unit front panel LEDs and back panel connectors Keyboard Controller Provides a detailed description of the Keys LEDs Display and operating information for the Micro Lynx Keyboard Controller Advanced Features Provides detailed operating information for some advanced synchronization applications Option Cards Provides information on the Micro Lynx Option Cards Appendix Provides miscellaneous information to help you setup or use your Micro Lynx SMPTE Made Simple Provides basic information and various applications using SMPTE time code Quick Reference Guide A graphical chart of the Micro Lynx Setup options Cable Reference Guide Provides setup and cabling information to help you configure and use the Micro Lynx Auto Serial Transport Table Contains a list of the serially controlled transports currently recognized by the transport menu setting AUTO Serial TRANSPORT Key Combination Guide Provides Key and Key Combination Identification Numbers f
180. es will be locked to When a system reference is selected the Micro Lynx will synchronize all machines including the Master as slaves to this timing reference This provides fast and stable locking because each machine is independently controlled and locked The REF LOCK LED will light if the selected reference is valid If the selected reference is not present or the Micro Lynx can not lock to it then the REF LOCK LED will flash The Micro Lynx time code generator is also locked to the system reference This guarantees that when generating time code the code rate speed not code type is the same as that used by the rest of the system There are six reference selections I Internal Fixed Micro Lynx internal crystal i Internal Variable Micro Lynx internal frequency synthesizer L External Video external composite or black burst video sync signal P Aux Input A pilot tone connected to the Aux input V VSO Master Variable speed determined by vari speeding the Master transport A ACG The Micro Lynx Audio Clock Generator card The Micro Lynx reference defaults to Internal Fixed 1 The system speed or rate defaults to 29 97 Frames and the generator time code type to 30 Frames SMPTE 30 Frame Unless you use a different frame rate for example 25 Frame EBU a video or digital machine that should be referenced to video sync then you should use this reference to get started Use the following procedure to change the system reference
181. ey to display the register value For example to examine the in point register press RCL followed by IN 7 The register contents will be displayed in the calculator data entry area Procedure 1 RCL RCL LED flashes Recall reg or mem 10 00 00 00 Enter recall mode 2 IN 7 A510 00 00 00 A In 11 27 06 03 Look at the value stored in the in point register RCL LED turns off Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Setup Display Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller In Setup mode you may access any of the user preference option menus to customize the Micro Lynx Setup System options Selection LED Brightness 100 To access the individual menus press SETUP then the appropriate menu select key On the Micro Lynx you can select the following keys to access their respective menus ACG SYS TRAN EVNT MEM TCG GRP LOOP RDY TRKS ROLLBACK EDIT REC REH MACRO To move through the Setup menus use the following keys LAST NEXT Selects the next or previous item in a top level menu i e machine manufacturers e Selects the next or previous item in the selected menu i e machine types Procedure 1 SETUP Setup Selection You have entered Setup mode 2 REC Setup Key options Selection Record by Play Rec Select the REC Key there are 2 options and 3 Setup Key options Selection Record by REC only Dual key record operation begins by pressing R
182. ference time code offset number of frames 02 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 41 hour offset When a machine is offset the machine letter is marked with a to show that an offset is present Note Offsets cannot be set for the reference machine In the following example A is the master and reference and B is the slave machine A B and TCG are grouped A b t bs 1 09 22 23 0 1 SOLO amp A SOLO LED on A LED on SOLO A 1 09 32 03 I 0 Solo the Master machine 2 gt PLAY SOLO A gt 1 09 32 03 II 0 The A machine goes into play 3 STOP 2 00 00 00 Err 0 Locate the machine to a point and stop 4 13 Getting Started B amp PLAY SOLO LED on BLEDon SOLO b 1 09 32 03 0 Solo the Slave machine gt PLAY SOLO b gt 1 09 32 03 II 0 The b machine goes into play STOP 2 03 52 03 Err 0 Locate the machine to a point and stop CAPT CAPT LED flashes STO LED flashes The slave time code position is captured Micro Lynx prompts for a register to store it in Store reg or mem b 2 03 52 03 2 03 52 03 OFST 5 2 03 52 03 Ofst 3 52 03 Press Calculator key 5 OFST The slave offset is automatically calculated and stored GRP A LED on BLEDon GRP LED on TCG LED on MIDI LED on A b t 2 00 00 00 sc Auli 0 Return to group mode The B transport is marked with a t
183. g signals that are well outside the audio bandwidth An extremely stable synchronization signal that is used to control A 41 the rate at which digital audio data is converted or transmitted Workstation See DAW Micro Lynx A 42 06 22 00 xr 8 55 GEKeynicssosuuueseg QUE OUO gi 8 54 EPS TINGED 8 61 HOUT LED eH 8 61 Keystone d RR 8 54 0 TIME VID 8 41 00 Key itor peer 8 39 LPRE AT Key coo RE R Uer 8 42 2 POST A2Z K6ey ie Ere 8 42 S REE AS K6y 5 o ane oett orate S 8 43 4 SYNCP A4 Key 5 eene 8 43 OPST CUE Key ede E 8 45 6 ERR TC 8 47 tonto oe i ee 8 48 SOUT REJ aie ein 8 48 9 DURJASM Key Rn 8 48 AT Key ottenere 8 42 Key vise ice eter 8 42 gd 8 43 AA Key een RUSSE 8 44 ASCKeyS ioi omae 8 28 2 1 2 7 7 2 2 1 Audio Clock Generator 9 15 2 1 2 7 2 8 2 1 2 7 Purpose se hls aoe eae 9 16 ACG Catd entities 10 1 10 12 8 18 8 20 AES EBU time 9 15 ALL STOP Key eunt eere 8 11 ASM sani CERE 8 49 Assemble 0 240 0 0 8 49
184. g This port supports GPI 1 and GPI 2 events relays mute relay and the system lock tally indicator light Table Chapter 7 12 System Tally Connector Pin Description 1 4 socket differential input Used for the Pilot In reference signal Table Chapter 7 13 Aux In Connector Pin Description Pin Description Auxiliary reference In Auxiliary Reference In 1 4 socket unbalanced output This output signal has a fixed output level of 1 dBm 1 4V pp and is software selectable Selections include Reshape time code RDR 1 Reshape time code RDR 2 Reshape time code RDR e Pilot out e Dialog beep out 7 9 System Unit 7 10 See TCG options under SETUP in the Keyboard Controller chapter for information on how to select the Aux Output signal Table Chapter 7 14 Aux Out Connector Pin Description Pin Description AUX Output Ground Ground The Pilot Output signal is locked to and at the same rate 60 59 94 50 48 Hz as the system reference The dialog beep output is a 1 kHz oscillator that follows the pulsed timing parameters set for Events GPI 2 See SETUP TCG options under SETUP in the Keyboard Controller chapter for information on how to select the Aux Output signal Micro Lynx 06 22 00 System Unit Third Machine Interface TIME CODE MIDI T si E AUDIO CLOCK GENERATOR RDR1 RDR2 OUT AUXIN AUXOUT HAC 0 5 OUT W
185. g continually between two highly dissimilar sets of numbers While his sequencer counts beats and measures his work print cue list director s instructions and everything else that pertains to the visual side of the equation all talk of hours minutes seconds and frames The two sets of numbers never coincide neatly forcing the composer to pull all sorts of tricks on his sequencer MIDI is a computer code that uses 8 bit data words or bytes that cannot contain SMPTEs 80 bit word This is the reason for the in vention of MIDI Time Code quite simply takes SMPTE time code and translates it into the MIDI data format To translate SMPTE into MIDI the MIDI time code format transmits a MTC message byte every 1 4 frame The first two 1 4 frame bytes contain only the frames The next two MTC bytes convey the seconds the next two the minutes the next two the hours and so forth This whole process takes exactly two SMPTE frames to complete As soon as one complete SMPTE address is transmitted the MTC generator updates the time code by 2 frames and starts again A 13 Using SMPTE The TimeLine Micro Lynx and Lynx System Supervisor Unit can take SMPTE from a master tape and generate MTC Thanks to this the film TV composer can now use a cue sheet style program as well as conventional music and if desired deal exclusively in the realm of hours minutes seconds and frames Although SMPTE and MTC ar
186. gisters eee Enero 6 14 8 27 Storing to a location 4 9 6 15 8 27 8 51 8 53 Micro Bynx iz con nce RIS ME ene 6 1 Code only operation sees 6 19 Components 1 2 2 3 Connection to VTR csee eese nnn 9 19 Controlling Mediasound sse 9 24 Controlling multiple devices 9 3 Controlling one device 9 2 Controlling one transport sees 9 25 Customizing 2 4 23 8 0 Defined epe Reto 1 1 9 15 Expanding to three machines 10 4 Front Panel 7 2 Getting Started 0 2 121 4 1 Keyboard Controller sess 6 1 MIDI 7 2 9 11 Synchronized with Mediasound 9 15 System configuration eseseeeeeeeeee 1 3 System Unit sn on oie RERO RR 6 1 Using with Mediasound sues 9 16 With 5 9 3 With Pro Tools eene 9 4 Data source c ce Rees 9 22 MTEC Output epe e ertet 9 16 MTC synchronizing 2 9 16 MTC transmitted eese 9 26 Time code setup eee 9 2 2 5 2 8 MIDI 7 6 MIDEKey eS Ideen 8 18 8 28 8 30 MIDI Options 8 18 9 11 MIDI iiit hr e tte eerte eines 7 2 MIDI with Micro
187. h register requires only one key press the ten registers are labeled 0 through 9 Using the one hundred memory register option requires a two digit entry for every register the registers are labeled 00 to 99 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Operational Features Storing Numbers in the Memory Registers Before storing numbers check the current memory size setting by pressing the SETUP then the MEM key The display will show the current memory size Setup Memory options Selection Memory Size 0 9 Use the and keys to select between the ten memory option 0 9 and the one hundred memory option 00 99 Press SETUP to exit this mode To store a time code number in a memory register 1 Press CLR to clear any numbers in the calculator display 2 Type in the time code number to be saved 9 Press the STO store key 4 Press the MEM memory key 5 Press one key from 0 9 if using the ten memory option Press two keys 00 99 for every register when using the one hundred memory option Note the 00 key cannot be used for memory location 0 or 00 Recalling Memory Register Contents Programming Macros Micro Lynx 06 22 00 To transfer the memory contents to the calculator display press MEM the MEM and RCL lights will flash and the register number The display will show the memory register number and its contents in the calculator display area Mem00 1 00 00 00 The number can then be used as a locate
188. hand number refers to the actual speed in frames per second while the right hand number refers to the type of time code being used Anytime video is used as either a reference or if the audio may be laid back to video in the future the 29 97 Hz 30 setting should be used This is the default setting and should be used in virtually all cases in the USA Japan and Canada In other countries where PAL SECAM is the broadcast standard then the 25 Hz 25 setting should be used If only audio recording and playback is involved with no possibility that the audio tracks would need to be synced up with a video machine or when working in a film only environment then the 30 Hz 30 setting can be used Only use the 30 Hz 30 setting when absolutely necessary Again if a video transport is involved anywhere in the production or if one may even possibly be involved at a later date then either 29 97 Hz 30 NTSC or 25 Hz 25 PAL should be your standard SMPTE frame rate The Micro Lynx also provides a 24 Hz 24 setting that can be used in the unusual circumstances that a tape is required with code running at film frame rate then the 24 Hz 24 setting would be used to match the frame rate of film projection systems Note that the Micro Lynx cannot control film playback devices Micro Lynx 6 2 06 22 00 Operational Features SMPTE Time Code in the Audio only Studio Up to the last few years the biggest use for synchronization in the audio only s
189. he Micro Lynx Power Supply close to the System Unit Warning Do NOT add an extension to the 5 pin DIN cable between the Power Supply and the System Unit 3 Insert the four mounting screws into the front panel of the System Unit and secure it to the equipment rack 4 If required use an AC MAINS with ground extension cable Micro Lynx 06 22 00 for the Power Supply Unit Installation Cabling The Micro Lynx can control and synchronize an entire Studio system Use the following table to determine what equipment will be connected to the Micro Lynx and to verify that the correct cables are available Cabling connections are critical Bad or poorly routed cables are often the cause of installation problems It is essential that the correct high quality cables are used to ensure reliable and trouble free operation Table Chapter 3 1 Cable Requirements Keyboard Controller KBD Between Equipment Connector Supplied By KBD to SU 8 pin RJ 45 Keyboard to System Unit System Unit SU Between Equipment Connector Supplied By SU to Power Supply DIN 5 System Unit to Power Supply Unit 40 pin System Unit to each transport remote or synchronizer connector SU and Transport time 1 4 stereo Customer System Unit RDR 1 2 3 OUT amp Aux to Transport time code inputs and outputs code output time code input and appropriate Aux transport inputs and outputs SU to EXT Video BNC Customer System Unit to Video Reference
190. he calculator scratch pad located in the lower right area of the display A A510 00 20 00 gt L 11 27 06 03 The calculator can be used to perform time code additions or subtractions In the following example an addition is performed Procedure 1 1 1 2 7 0 6 0 A 10 00 00 00 11 27 06 03 Enter a time code number 2 plus SOLO A A510 00 00 00 plus 0 Select a calculator mode The operation selected is displayed 3 1 0 0 0 SOLO A 10 00 00 00 10 00 Enter time of 10 seconds 4 A510 00 00 00 11 27 06 03 The sum is displayed in the lower right 8 7 Keyboard Controller Register Contents STO Store RCL Recall 8 8 The Calculator keys also provide access to time code register values Values may be stored to or recalled from any of the 10 registers A400 00 00 00 A In 11 27 06 03 Press STO in the calculator key section to store a time code value to a Micro Lynx register Next press the appropriate calculator register key to select the register to store the value in The time code to be stored can be determined in one of several ways it may be captured entered or calculated If the CAPT key is used to capture a time code value then the store function is automatically invoked Press RCL in the calculator key section to recall and display values stored in a Micro Lynx register Next press the appropriate calculator register k
191. headings that define the loop process after edit and replay passes Press a calculator key 0 2 for direct access to the menu headings Table Chapter 8 11 LOOP Setup Menu KEY Lr LOOP EN 0 EE Edit Re Edit Replay 1 After Replay End Repeat 2 After End Stop Recue Micro Lynx 06 22 00 RDY TRKS Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller The RDY key is used to record enable tape machines Press and hold the RDY key followed by a machine select key A C to record enable a specific machine When the machines REC LED flashes it is record enabled When a transport record command is issued machines that are in play and locked will enter record and the REC LED stops flashing and turns on To disable record enable status for an individual machine press and hold the RDY key then press the machine select key again To disable all machines that are record enabled press and hold CLR followed by RDY SETUP e RDY Press SETUP followed by RDY to enter the record timing options menu Table Chapter 8 12 RDY Setup Menu KEY MENU SUB MENU RANGE Record Options 0 Rec Adv 30 In 0 255 1 Rec Adv 30 Out 0 255 The record command advance timing is automatically set for each transport when it is selected If necessary use this menu to further advance or retard the record command at each tape speed for a particular machine Use the TRKS key to record enable specific tracks on a tape or
192. hen on this LED indicates that communications signals are passing internally between the control processor and the other processors in the System Unit When turned on it indicates valid internal serial data communications When on this LED indicates that power is being supplied to the System Unit Note Ifa DATA LED is flashing or turned off this indicates that there is a hardware problem First turn off the power and check all cables and connections It should be corrected after powering up the system If a VALID LED is flashing or turned off there is a software or communications problem Press CLR SYS then CLR SETUP to reinitialize the SU and KBD Verify that the external control devices are correctly configured MIDI THRU OUT EL THRU POWER VIDEO REF TRANSPORT 1 i TRANSPORT 2 KEYBOARD heeded VITC MIKOS6B Figure Chapter 7 3 Video Reference VIDEO REF BNC single ended input This combined input output supports Micro Lynx 06 22 00 PAL and NTSC video sync references If the TimeLine internal composite Video Sync Generator card VSQ is installed then the connector is used as an output to provide video reference for DTRs VTRs and Digital Audio Workstations connected to the system If the system is selected to EXT VID reference then this connector is used as an input Use a black burst or composite video sync source to reference the system to video It is not possible to select the Tim
193. hese function simply press F1 F2 or F3 for registers 1 and 2 To recall registers 8 and 9 you must first press MACRO then the number The registers contain the following instructions from the factory Blank Capture and store the current transport time code number upper right part of the display in the IN register Capture and store the current transport time code number in the OUT register Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank Exits the time code striping mode Resets the transports back to their normal mode capstan resolved Time code striping mode Sets the transports connected to the Micro Lynx ready to be prestripped with time code their capstans are set to WILD It stops with the SETUP TCG 1 menu displayed Programming Your Own Macros Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Press SETUP and then MACRO to list the Macros that are available for programming The numbers that are displayed are those that are free and can be programmed The dash indicates that Macro has information stored in its register and is not available for programming unless it is cleared first 6 17 Operational Features Program Macro 0 45 67 Press of the number keys that is available The display will return to normal view and the MACRO light will flash Perform the function s you d like to store in the Macro your key presses will be stored in the selected Macro Press the MACRO key again to complete programming the Macr
194. hine individual machine status can be viewed by pressing the specific machine key 1 GRP GRP and machine LEDs flash Hold the GRP key and add groups in order of priority This is the machine selection prompt It is assumed that you have not grouped the machines yet 2 GRP A GRP B GRP TCG A LED turns on BLED turns on TCG LED turns on MIDI LED turns on Press GRP hold it and press the Machine Select key The master machine is displayed as a capital letter and the slave machines as lower case letters When TCG is included in the group MIDI is also automatically grouped A b t 1 03 47 17 0 Time code and machine letters are displayed and the A machine is the Master Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Getting Started B b 1 03 47 17 Err 0 Put the slave machine b into group status mode In group status mode you may check the time code and error for that machine B or GRP A b t 1 03 47 17 0 Press the machine key B again or GRP to return to Group mode Remove a machine from the Group 5 Locking in a Group GRP B A t A 1 03 47 17 0 Press GRP and the machine select key to remove a machine from the group In this example b is removed GRP B A b t 1 03 47 17 0 Put the slave machine b back into the group Before being used in the system each machine controller must individually resolve and lock its associated tape machine This is
195. hine configurations semi pro 16 track machines using 1 2 tape for instance where this may not be acceptable even though high frequency EQ or a noise gate are used to minimize SMPTE time code leakage onto the adjacent track s audio Each reel of tape should be prestriped with time code before audio production begins so that there is always a continuous sequence of code on each reel This will simplify machine control and editing and minimize having to use Jam sync mode later on during playback Jam sync is a method used to recover usable time code from a tape that has time code dropouts poorly recorded time code or discontinuous time code numbers Micro Lynx 06 22 00 6 3 Operational Features Striping the Tape To stripe a tape with time code the time code output connector on the back panel of the SU must be connected to the tape machine s time code input for a center track time code machine or to the edge track dedicated to the time code for a multitrack machine When recording time code its important that the capstan be set for WILD rather than RESOLVED mode meaning that it will run under its own internal speed control To switch to WILD mode use the pre programmed Macro 9 or press SETUP then the TRAN key twice to view the Capstan Mode menu Press the key to change from RESOLVED mode to WILD mode Make sure the time code format is properly set Press SETUP TCG and the LAST NEXT keys to select the Syste
196. hree phillips screws through the VITC Card into the Option Card bracket as show in Figure 10 17 and tighten MIKO80A Figure Chapter 10 17 Securing the VITC Card Micro Lynx 06 22 00 10 29 Option Cards Install the VITC Option Card New Metal Work 10 30 12 13 14 15 Insert the Option Card cable connector into J1 on the VITC board Connect the end of the cable into J3 on the Main Board The unused connectors on the left of the cable will lie in the open area unless you have option cards installed Replace the top cover and the six phillips screws Power up the System Unit The Micro Lynx will recognize the VITC Card on power up and the VITC LED on the System Unit OPTION Section will turn on Turn off the power and place the Micro Lynx System Unit on a static safe workstation Ground yourself and the workstation anti static mat On the back of the System Unit remove cover labeled VITC READER Remove the six phillips screws securing the top cover to the System Unit Position the System Unit so that the front panel faces you and remove the top cover Locate and remove the black rubber bumper on the corner of the VITC Card The VITC Card is mounted to the left of the Main Board component side up The VITC Card will lie flat in the chassis If you have the M3 or ACG Card already installed in the Micro Lynx remove the Option Card cable from J3 on the Main Board before installing the
197. icro Lynx 06 22 00 Introduction Automatically detects time code type Supports both 10 dB and 4 dB input signal levels 1 10 to 60x speed Bi directional Reshaped time code output derived from the reader Two transports plus full chase capability for MIDI Supports over 120 different audio and video transports Selectable master independent of machine cabling VTRs can be slaves Select and set up transport from resident menus No internal adjustments Universal machine interface supports both master and slave operation Supports parallel serial and combined machine interfaces Synchronizes MIDI systems to ATR VTRs Converts SMPTE to MIDI Time Code Converts MTC to SMPTE making MIDI the system master In out and thru out MIDI jacks DIN8 mini circular connectors for direct Macintosh MIDI connection Two programmable GPI relay closures GPI relay modes Either GPI relay may be pulsed or latched One GPI has dialog beep mode with menu selections for 9 or 4 beeps beep spacing and beep duration Selectable Aux output Reader 1 2 3 reshaped time code Pilot output ADR beep System lock tally standard RS 232C or RS422 serial I O Computer control port allows comunication with personal computers for full remote computer control Introduction Specifications Keyboard System Unit Time Code Generator Synchronizer Free Standing Display Type Keys Jog Shuttle wheel Communications 80 ch
198. ignal is present When the display reads ACG Output lost lock it indicates that the ACG Card has not locked to the signal because it is out of range can t lock or no signal is present Installation Instructions Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Note If your Micro Lynx System Unit Serial Number is 1024 or higher you have new metal work Please turn to instructions with new metalwork later in this section for instructions on installing the ACG Card 1 Turn off the power and place the Micro Lynx System Unit on a static safe workstation Ground yourself and the workstation anti static mat 2 Onthe back of the System Unit remove the cover labeled AUDIO CLOCK GENERATOR 3 Remove the six phillips screws securing the top cover to the System Unit 4 Position the System Unit so that the front panel faces you and remove the top cover 10 21 Option Cards Install the Option Card 5 Bracket Install the Option 8 Card 9 10 10 22 The Back Panel PCB is located at the top back of the chassis horizontal to the back panel Remove the L shaped bracket supporting the Back Panel PCB by removing the phillips Screws one on the left side of the board and the other on the back panel to the right of the SYSTEM TALLY connector The bracket is no longer needed keep the phillips screws 052 Figure Chapter 10 8 Remove Support Bracket Hold the Option Card bracket so that the large cutout is fac
199. iliary function keys and are used with the calculator When a numbered key is pressed after TRIM CAPT RCL or STO the auxiliary function of the numbered key becomes active This key is similar to the double 0 key on a calculator it inserts two zeros into the display This is particularly useful when entering time code numbers This is a multiple mode Clear key It clears the data entry area of the display window 8 39 Keyboard Controller 8 40 Press CLR to perform the following 1 Exit calculator mode and return to the normal operating display 2 Clear incorrect entries for any key or function Clear the data entry buffer If a number is entered but not yet stored to a register the original register value is retained 4 Clear registers To clear a specific register simultaneously press the CLR key and the calculator key for the register that you wish to clear For example hold down the CLR key and press OFST to clear the offset register for a slave machine 5 The CLR key is also used in combination with the Device Select and Group Select keys to cancel or reset system parameters Procedure CLR 1 12 A b t 1 09 55 00 1 23 The numbers entered are displayed in the calculator display the lower right quadrant of the display 2 CLR A b t 1 09 55 00 S cu 0 The calculator display is cleared It will be cleared during any arithmeti
200. ime Code 7 5 TRANS POPE 7 4 Video Syne dn etka 7 3 PAV 7 3 10 2 PLAY ERInEeRDS 8 13 Playback Variable 6 18 PlUS Key Rees ee ee 8 54 E ESF 8 42 Register Accessing 8 42 Postroll Adjusting sennen 6 12 POWER BED 7 3 Power Supply eee 1 8 3 1 3 2 PREKey iiec uePIERRREPRSMReSEPSEREDE 8 42 Preroll Register Accessing 8 42 Preroll Adjusting eee 6 12 Preroll Creating erre 6 5 Pro Tools Rr ere prp 9 4 9 9 Procedure Changing register values 8 55 8 56 Changing the master machine 4 17 Changing the reference machine 4 17 Configuring Pro Tools as master 9 9 Configuring Pro Tools as slaves 9 5 Controlling a transport device 9 2 Customizing Micro Lynx sees 8 9 Displaying messages eee 8 10 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Editing wha ee hee 4 18 Generating time code sees 4 7 Grouping machines 4 10 4 11 8 31 Recalling register
201. in the Micro Lynx system is the sum of three components 1 The actual clock difference between the two time code numbers 2 Acorrection to this clock offset based on the difference in frame counts between the two time code formats 3 Acorrection for the accumulated frame count difference since 00 00 00 00 time code midnight For example if you want to synchronize 1 00 00 00 non drop frame with 1 00 00 00 drop frame it actually requires an offset of 3 seconds and 18 frames to account for the difference in running frame count since midnight As shown by the complexity of this drop frame example the simplest method of calculating offsets is to use sync points or capture the frame count and let the Micro Lynx calculate the correct time code offset value Press this key in TRKS mode to select or deselect the CUE track record enable on a video machine Micro Lynx 06 22 00 6 ERR TC Micro Lynx 06 22 00 ERR TC Status Mode Keyboard Controller When not used as a 6 in calculator mode the ERR key provides access to the machine offset Error register The error register does not store any numbers it provides a display of the positional error of a machine Press RCL then ERR to display the error register for a selected machine The error is automatically displayed in status mode Press this key in TRKS mode to select and deselect the time code track record enable for a video transport
202. instance if the time code 1 00 20 00 was entered and the tape was located to this time using the LOC key the actual stop time of the tape would be 1 00 20 00 minus the preroll time or 1 00 15 00 when using the default preroll setting of five seconds When play is pressed the tape begins rolling from the preroll time so that all transports are properly locked together by 1 00 20 00 Adjusting Postroll Time The postroll default setting is also set to five seconds 5 00 This is the amount of time that the tape will continue to roll at the end of an edit sequence Its value is held in the postroll register 2 POST The current setting can be viewed by pressing the RCL and 2 POST keys If the value needs to be changed simply enter the new value using the calculator keypad then press the STO store and 2 POST keys to enter the new value into the register memory How To Edit Loop a Group of Machines If the Micro Lynx is set to group mode initiating loop play will play all machines in the group There are three loop option questions that need to be answered before initiating loop play What should happen after an edit is performed redo the edit sequence or simply replay the edited sequence What should happen after a replay does the machine stop or does it continue to repeat the replay And what happens if the machine is set to stop after a replay should the machine simply stop or rescue itself Micro Lynx 06 22
203. ions 1 Connect the ACG 1 or 2 O S OUT to the SLAVE CLOCK IN on the first Pro Tools Audio Interface 2 When the Micro Lynx is on the ACG card will automatically generate word and over sample clock locked to the system reference The Pro Tools Audio Interface switches internally from Master Sync mode to Slave Sync mode Use the ACG Setup menu in the Micro Lynx to set the Oversample Output to 256 this is the default Note DigiDesign strongly recommends that the BNC cable from the O S OUT to the Pro Tools Audio Interface be no longer than four feet Procedure 1 SETUP ACG Setup ACG Options Selection NOM S Rate Out 48 000 ks s You are in the ACG setup menu 2 LAST NEXT Setup ACG Options Selection Oversample Out 256 Select Oversample menu 3 and Use to select the correct Oversample rate Check that only the SLAVE CLOCK LED on the Pro Tools interface is on If both Slave and Master LEDs are on the digital input has been selected as the clock source For correct operation set digital input to OFF in the Pro Tools software Confirm that the Nominal S Rate Sample Rate Output on the ACG matches that of the Pro Tools Session sample rate Procedure 1 SETUP ACG Setup ACG Options Selection NOM S Rate Out 48 000 ks s You are in the ACG setup menu 2 and Use to select the correct sample rate 9 5 Advanced Features Micro Lynx to Computer Connections 1 Co
204. is always locked to the Micro Lynx system speed reference If the speed reference is set to VSO variable speed 12 5 then the ACG Card will lock to off tape code The Card will generate stabilized digital audio clocks with the selected SRR that are referenced to the incoming frame rate of the Master machine time code with 0 00046 drift or error 10 15 Option Cards Setup Options Nominal Sample Rate Out amp In Var Ratio Out amp In Var Ratio Out amp In 96 Oversample Variable Out amp In Reference In 10 16 Access to the Setup Options is available after the ACG Card is installed Press SETUP then ACG to access the option menu If the ACG menu is not displayed then verify the ACG Card installation Table Chapter 10 4 ACG Setup Options MENU SUB MENU ACG ACG Option 0 Nom S Rate Out RANGE so 000 44 056 44 100 47 952 48 000 Ks s 1 Var Ratio Out Of On 2 Var Ratio Out 96 8596 11596 Of OF aoe 100 00 3 Oversample Out 128 192 256 384 47 952 48 000 Ks s 87 5 112 5 100 00 Used to select the nominal sample rate output and input at the selected system frame rate The output may be different from the input Used to select a variable output or input sample rate ratio When set to off the system uses the selected nominal sample rates If variable ratio is selected is used to vary the output or input sample rate with respect to the system reference frame rate
205. is selected the VITC reader will only read these lines Selecting VITC lines To display or select specific VITC lines press the F3 key the display will show the numbers of the lines that the VITC reader has found on the video tape The lines se lected by the automatic line select mode are indicated by A s in the display and the fixed lines indicated by f s To select lines in fixed mode use the LAST NEXT keys to choose line 1 or line 2 and then the keys or the Jog Shuttle wheel to pick a specific line The number of lines displayed is automatically adjusted for NTSC or PAL operation so only correct lines are available for selection VITC Display and Status 10 32 The keyboard VITC LED status indicator will come on when any matching pair of VITC lines is detected on tape whether the lines are selected not A lower case is placed in the display next to the machine letter when the displayed machine or group time code is being updated by the VITC reader board The time code display is normally LTC Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Option Cards and will automatically switch to VITC when the video tape machine is in still mode or moving at less than 1 8rd play speed Micro Lynx 06 22 00 10 33 Appendix Introduction The appendix has four sections SMPTE Made Simple Setup Quick Reference Guide Cabling Reference Guide Error Messages and Glossary SMPTE Made Simple Provides basic information and various appli
206. isplays information specific to the machine selected Status mode is indicated on the display as follows 23 59 32 22 Err 0 The time code and offset error for the selected machine is displayed The group LEDs stay lit in both GRP and STAT modes 8 31 Keyboard Controller 8 32 Group Search Mode REF Follow MSTR Group Park Ahead Group LED Status To display machine status perform the following Procedure 1 GRP A b t 1 03 47 17 2 5 0 2 B Select the appropriate machine key Status information for B is displayed 3 B A b t 1 03 47 17 amu d 0 Exit status mode by pressing the machine key or GRP SETUP e GRP Press SETUP followed by GRP to enter group options in the setup menu There are four headings Table Chapter 8 10 GRP Setup Menu KEY MENU SUE MENU RANGE GRP Group Options 0 Search Mode Chase Group 1 Ref Follow Mstr Off On 2 Group parkahead 0 30 25 3 GRP LED Status Normal Time code If Group search is selected the machines will locate independently If Chase search is selected they will chase the master machine Whether you select chase or group depends on the machines selected and your normal method of working Ifa lot of manual locating will be performed then the system time to lock may be improved by selecting chase search When Reference follow Master is set to on then each time the Master machine is changed the referenc
207. ith the NON STD and LEDs If this LED flashes it indicates that the ACG Card has not locked to the incoming signal This LED indicates that an ACG output sample rate ratio of either 1600 samples per frame at 30 Hz or 1920 samples per frame at 25 Hz has been set This is a nominal sample rate of 48 000 Ks s This LED should be read in conjunction with the NON STD and LEDs If this LED flashes it indicates that the ACG output is not locked This LED indicates that an ACG input sample rate ratio of either 1470 samples per frame at 30 Hz or 1764 samples per frame at 25 Hz has been set This is a nominal sample rate of 44 100 Ks s This LED should be read in conjunction with the NON STD and LEDs If this LED flashes it indicates that the ACG Card has not locked to the incoming signal This LED indicates that an ACG output sample rate ratio of either 1470 samples per frame at 30 Hz or 1764 samples per frame at 25 Hz has been set This is a nominal sample rate of 44 100 Ks s This LED should be read in conjunction with the NON STD and LEDs If this LED flashes it indicates that the ACG output is not locked If only this LED is on it indicates that an ACG input sample rate ratio of either 1066 2 3 samples per frame at 30 Hz or 1280 samples per frame at 25 Hz has been set This is a nominal sample rate of 32 000 Ks s If this LED flashes it indicates that the ACG Card has not locked to the incoming signal If the LED
208. jam new time code in Setup TCG set the TCG mode to Play run Make the transport that needs new time code the Reference transport and put the machine and the TCG in a group Play the machine the TCG will jam to the machine time code numbers and output new code record this code on a new track on tape Solo Mode Single Machine Control Functions Micro Lynx 06 22 00 To individually control only one transport or to check the status of one machine solo mode is used When solo mode is selected the upper left display indicates SOLO followed by the machine letter that is currently being soloed a b c or t The master machine letter will be in caps the slave machines will be in lower case letters To select only one machine press the SOLO key This turns off the GRP LED and turns on the SOLO LED Press the individual transport key a b c or t to solo that machine To solo the B transport for instance press SOLO and then B The resulting display SOLO b b 10 01 Err 0 shows the current time code setting for the transport b 10 01 If the machine is in motion by pressing the machine key again the machine error register will be displayed The error register shows resolve error in play and distance to LOC or Cue in wind modes SOLO b bo 10 01 6 12 00 Solo mode is also useful for capturing the current time code of the soloed machine to use as a CUE point edit point or to calculate an OFFSET All three
209. k of the chassis horizontal to the back panel Remove the shaped bracket supporting the Back Panel PCB by removing the phillips Screws one on the left side of the board and the other on the back panel to the right of the SYSTEM TALLY connector The bracket is no longer needed keep the phillips screws 052 Figure Chapter 10 15 Remove the Support Bracket Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Option Cards 6 Hold the Option Card bracket so that the large cutout is face up Set the front of the bracket in place on the threaded stud on the inside of the front panel Set the bracket down and slide it under the left edge of the Back Panel PCB 7 Insert and tighten the screws removed from the back panel and from the Back Panel PCB Place a nut on the threaded stud and secure the bracket to the front panel See Figure 10 16 MIKO53A Figure Chapter 10 16 Install the Option Card Bracket Install the VITC Option 8 The VITC Card is mounted to the right of the Option Card Card bracket component side up 9 If you have the M3 or ACG Card already installed in the Micro Lynx remove the Option Card cable from J3 on the Main Board before installing the VITC Card 10 Place the VITC Card under the lip on the mounting bracket and slide against the back panel so that the VITC IN and VITC THRU jacks are seated in the appropriate cutouts in the back panel Insert the washers and nuts onto the BNC connectors 11 Insert the t
210. l the Micro Lynx defeats the lifters only as the machine slows to park to check that it has located correctly Selects the command method or logic to put the machine into 10 5 Option Cards Record Out Rehearse In Rehearse Out Approach Speed Bandwidth Limit Lock Threshold Lock Delay Park Window 10 6 record Selects the command method or logic to drop the machine out of record Selects the command method or logic to put the machine into rehearse Selects the command method or logic to drop the machine out of rehearse Sets the approach speed or deceleration point for a machine as it slows to park Use it to adjust machine performance if the park point is consistently over shot or under shot Increase the value to slow the transport later Decrease the value to slow the transport earlier Selects a time code reader input RDR filter circuit that bandwidth limits the input time code signal frequency range It is used when time code sources are noisy and is most commonly applicable to video machines The time code window or threshold in subframes 0 50 sfr which the machine has to be within before the lock delay starts running The lock window setting can be adjusted when time to lock may be more critical than lock accuracy This can be used to fix problems with unstable machines bad or misframed time code or to cause a Digital or Video tape transport to release with a looser lock toler ance The setting
211. l the current offset value or to store a new value in the offset register If an offset is required there are three ways to calculate the value by sync points manually or by capturing the offset Procedure 1 SOLO B SOLO b b 2 09 55 00 0 Solo a slave machine 2 RCL 5 RCL LED flashes bo 2 09 55 00 Ofst 3 01 Recall the contents of the offset register 3 TRIM TRIM LED flashes b 2 09 55 00 Ofst 3 02 Turn the Jog Wheel or press or to change the offset value 8 45 Keyboard Controller 8 46 CUE 4 TRIM TRIM LED off SOLO b bs 2 09 55 00 3 02 Exit trim mode the new offset is automatically saved The Micro Lynx handles offsets correctly in either drop frame or non drop frame time code as well as in mixed time code situations Offsets are always stored and displayed in the code format of the reference transport s time code regardless of the type of code that is present on each source machine For example if the reference time code is drop frame all offsets are handled and displayed by the Micro Lynx as drop frame time code values even if a particular offset is related to a machine with non drop frame code Remember drop frame code is displayed on the keyboard with the frames digits separated from the seconds digits by a comma rather than a colon 03 20 40 00 In mixed code situations the actual offset value necessary to achieve the desired synchronization
212. led by the Micro Lynx In many cases a standard serial cable is all that is required while in others a custom interface cable is required In each instance the correct cable can be ordered through your TimeLine dealer If your tape machine is remote controllable yet it does not show up on the list contact Technical Assistance see the Preface for the Technical Assistance contact information with the machine s manufacturer and model number to see if it is compatible with the Micro Lynx system Other standard features of the Micro Lynx includes versatile time code reader and generator functions MIDI SMPTE interfacing built in video sync option and expansion to include M3 ACG and VITC Reader option cards 6 1 Operational Features SMPTE Time Code Synchronization Please read through the Appendix section SMPTE Made Simple for more information about SMPTE time code Selecting Which Time Code Standard is Right for Your Application The Micro Lynx can be set to follow or generate all of the major time code standards currently in use throughout the world The time code standard that is correct for your application will be determined by whether you are required to have to lock the audio to film or video To set the time code type enter the Time Code Generator Setup mode press SETUP TCG and 1 PRE This will bring up the System code menu Setup options Selection System Spd Code 29 97Hz 30 The left
213. lly using alone A tape transport in solo will be controlled by itself without affecting other transports in the system Speed Frame Rate and Rate are synonymous Time code speed is counted in frames per second fps SMPTE time code has two speeds 30 fps and 29 97 fps A 39 SU SUBF UBITS Sync Lock Sync Word Synchronizer System BUS System Unit TCA TCG Time Code Format Time Code Generator Time Code Reader Time Code Type Toggle Track A 40 See System Unit Sub frame user bits See Phase Lock Included at the end of every 80 bit time code word is a 16 bit Sync Word The sync word provides direction and Phase lock speed information and marks the end of each time code word A device that reads time codes recorded on two or more tape machines compares the codes and adjusts the machine s tape positions and speeds based on the results of that comparison When two or more synchronizers are used to form a system a communications link must be established between the modules This is done by looping from one module to the next via the RS422 ports on the rear panel of the system unit The rack mounting part of the Micro Lynx machine control system The unit contains the control CP and machine control microprocessors Time Code Address The HH MM SS FF bits of the TC word See Time Code Generator Time code format defines both the frame rate and code type being
214. lows e Serial TC The Micro Lynx asks the transport for either longitudinal or VITC time code Arbitration between the two is performed by the transport itself Synchronization is achieved using serial time code only and the local longitudinal reader is completely disabled All numeric information in the time display is collected over the serial port It is essential if serial time code lock is to be used that both the Micro Lynx and the serial transport are referenced to the same video reference source as time code requests to the transport must synchronize to this reference This selection will revert internally to LTC SerTC if the selected transport is not capable of serial time code locking e Serial TT1 The Micro Lynx requests only tape timer information from the serial transport Synchronization is Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 EVNT Keyboard Controller performed using control track data alone without the assistance of a time code track The tape timer time code defines tape position absolutely and may be reset or preset from the keyboard When in this mode all operations are performed exactly as if actual time code were present Notes a The new time code selections apply to transports using Sony protocols only For Ampex transports no distinction is made between LTC VITC LTC and VITC b The default serial time code selection for any transport is loaded when the transport is selected It
215. lug or jack Typically wired T R 2 S shield See Time Code Type See User Bit Each time code frame or word consists of 80 bits that convey SMPTE EBU time code information Thirty two of those bits are user bits and are available for storing information such as IDs reel numbers session dates or another time code number Values are generally time code addresses They may also be a custom user bit IDs A reference video signal generated by an extremely stable source This signal is used to control the speed of video machines digital audio machines and is used as a timing reference to ensure accurate synchronization Used to describe any circumstance whereby the method for reproducing audio tracks is not directly analogous to the linear tape track format Hard disk systems DAW s and MIDI sequencers are typical examples MIDI performance commands can be stored in a sequencer Because the sequencer can play these parts in real time synchronized to tape they can be regarded as extra or virtual tracks not on the tape but present nonetheless Vertical Interval Time Code An alternative to the LTC format of SMPTE time code It is recorded in the blanking interval of the video signal which is not used for the picture Variable Speed Override Variable Speed Oscillator Video Tape Recorder A signal that is distributed over most or all of the frequency spectrum wide band input amplifier is capable of processin
216. m Spd Code menu to verify the setting Press SETUP to go back to normal view mode Solo the time code generator to view the current time code value The time code generator will run from this number If it is necessary to change it press CLR and then enter the desired start time for the generator typically 59 45 00 You must then store this new number in the TIME CODE START register by pressing STO store and 0 TIME Set the transport into the record ready mode press and hold the RDY key and then press the transport key A C Now when you press gt PLAY and REC the soloed machine will drop into record and the generator will start sending out time code starting at the 0 TIME register setting Press gt PLAY and REC to start recording time code Keep in mind that the time code is simply a modulated midband frequency recorded on the tape This means that it is subject to all the same problems that other audio signals encounter when recorded to magnetic tape including tape dropouts level shifting frequency response variances and distortion caused by dirty worn or out of spec heads transport or electronics These problems will limit the maximum range over which the time code can be read as the transport is shuttled and then stopped Since the time code changes relative pitch until it is too low as the tape comes to a stop or too high as it is fast shuttled to be read ensuring that the heads and electronic
217. many solutions for your time code controller system and synchronization requirements Third Machine Expansion Card M3 The Micro Lynx is designed to accommodate a third machine control an additional tape transport simply plug this card into the System Unit to expand your system The M3 card supports ATR DTR and VTR machines The Sony VO 5850 requires the special interface circuitry in the M3 card for operation with the Micro Lynx Digital Audio Clock Generator Card ACG Micro Lynx 06 22 00 The Micro Lynx is designed to generate synchronized digital audio word clock to integrate a digital audio workstation into your system There are two variations of the ACG card The ACG 1 provides Word Clock and Oversample Clock Outputs The ACG 2 has the same features as ACG 1 and adds an AES EBU Silent Output and an external clock input It allows the AES EBU and clock input signals to be used as a system reference 2 1 Applications Video Sync Generator Card VSG When synchronizing a system that includes VTR or DTR machines the Micro Lynx and the machines must be referenced to a common video sync source If you do not have an external sync pulse generator TimeLine s VSG card can be used as a system reference This card generates both PAL and NTSC composite sync VITC Reader Card VITC 2 2 The Micro Lynx System Unit is designed to accept a VITC reader card When you synchronize a VTR that does not support serial time
218. match the video standard 29 97 Hz 30 for NTSC 25 Hz 25 frames for PAL SECAM To check and adjust the time code standard press SETUP TCG 1 Use the and keys to step through the frame rate selections Another requirement for syncing to video is the connection of a video sync reference to the Micro Lynx s Video Ref jack a single BNC connector for either input or output In industry terms this is called the house sync connection To use house sync as the reference press SETUP TCG O TIME and then press the and keys until the external video selection is displayed Press SETUP again to exit this mode Setup TCG options Selection System Ref ExtVid If there is no house sync and this option is selected the REF LOCK LED will flash indicating there is no reference coming into the BNC connector If this occurs the optional Micro Lynx VSG card should be installed so that the Micro Lynx can generate common house sync for the video equipment in the studio In this case select the IntFix internal reference option rather than ExtVid then enable the VSG using SETUP TCG and 6 If a common house sync is not used then video edits will not be stable 6 5 Operational Features If highly accurate video positioning is required in pause or still frame mode then the optional VITC pronounced as vitsee Vertical Interval Time Code card should be installed in the Micro Lynx This card reads the VITC
219. mation by the factory if you are unable to correct the problem 3 SYS 2 System Frames changed Press SYS again to see the next error message and to exit when the list is done The Micro Lynx holds error messages in a stack when the top message is removed the next one is displayed Repeat step 3 until all messages have been read 4 CLR SOLO A gt L AS 11 27 LL 0 Press CLR to exit SYS mode at any point without erasing the list Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller Transport Controls Micro Lynx 06 22 00 LOC Locate CUE ALL STOP ROLLBACK i i TME NE E ES EN EN MOTION 2 Figure Chapter 8 4 Motion Control Keys In solo mode Micro Lynx will locate the soloed machine to the time code in the calculator data entry area minus the system preroll In group mode it will locate all transports currently assigned to the group to the time in the calculator data entry area minus the system preroll In solo mode Micro Lynx Cues the soloed machine to the time code in the cue point register In group mode it cues all machines currently assigned to the group to the time code stored in the cue point register If a cue point is not set then the Micro Lynx will use the in point register If there is no cue point or in point set the following message is displayed No in point or cue point set The ALL STOP key
220. me counts down 2 The edit command is displayed and the duration counts down the postroll counts down and the machines stop 3 Ifloop is selected the edit recues and repeats In edit record and rehearse the Micro Lynx GPT s and dialog beep oscillator can be selected to operate at the edit in point see EVNT under Device Select key for further information on the GPI relays In edit replay these GPI s are disabled In solo mode the Rewind command is issued only to the machine that is soloed In group mode the Rewind command puts all machines currently assigned to the group into rewind or chase In solo mode the Fast Forward command is issued only to the transport that is soloed In group mode the Fast Forward command puts all transports currently assigned to the group into fast forward or chase In solo mode the Stop command is issued only to the machine that is soloed Pressing 8 stop in group mode initiates an intelligent stop function The master machine stops immediately Then each slave machine is parked at a position that corresponds to the master machine s position taking individual offsets into account The system is cued and ready to synchronize In solo mode the Play command is issued only to the machine that is soloed In group mode the Play command puts machines currently assigned to the group into play In play the Micro Lynx synchronizes and locks each of the machines including the master ma
221. n facility or house To reference your generator to video sync set it to EXT VID mode and connect a video sync signal This ensures that the tapes you are striping will have a common reference and on playback will sync properly Reshaping or cleaning up the time code signal should always be performed when dubbing time code from one tape to another If you simply copy time code from one tape to another without re shaping it will deteriorate quickly due to generation loss and will eventually become unusable Reshaping is not recommended when the time code on tape has begun to deteriorate badly TIME CODE IN LYNX MODULE RESHAPED TIME CODE SMPTE007A Figure Appendix A 8 Reshaping Time Code When reshaping existing code is passed through the reader which puts out squared up code If a tape has been copied several times or is very worn then it is likely that the time code will have dropouts or bad spots that a time code reader will not be able to read The reshape output of a time code reader can only put out a clean copy of its input So if the code drops out completely the reshaped output will have a corresponding dropout overcome this the code must be regenerated rather than reshaped A 15 Regeneration or Jam Sync Jam Sync is a generator function that is a better alternative to reshaping It is used to create a new time code that is related to
222. n point register The Micro Lynx has 10 programmable Macro keys They can be programmed to execute any key sequence Press MACRO followed by a number 0 9 to execute a macro sequence The F1 and F2 keys are short cut keys to macros 1 amp 2 They are programmed by the factory to capture and store in out and cue points Macro s 8 and 9 are also factory programmed to switch the Micro Lynx in and out of the correct mode for striping time code It is possible to clear and reprogram these keys however they will default to the factory settings if the keyboard is reset The message Macro executing is displayed whenever a macro key is pressed SETUP e MACRO Press SETUP followed by MACRO and the macro number that you wish to program Enter the key strokes in the correct sequence that the macro will run Press the MACRO key again to save the sequence and exit macro setup A macro sequence may not be included or nested within another macro sequence To clear a macro press and hold the MACRO key while pressing the number of the macro that you wish to clear Procedure 1 SETUP MACRO MACRO LED flashes Program Macro Qe 5 67 The macros that are not programmed are listed Select a macro number Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller 2 4 SOLO A 1 03 47 17 Select macro 4 to program the display returns to normal operation 3 CAPT CAPT LED fl
223. n register Clearing the duration register automatically cancels the out point register The number in the duration register is the length of the current programmed edit Duration Out Point In Point Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 ASM Keyboard Controller If either the in point or out point are changed the duration is automatically recalculated Press this key in TRKS mode to select or deselect the Assemble function for a video machine Procedure Enter In Point 1 1 2 00 00 1 09 55 00 1 23 00 00 Use the calculator keys to enter an in point or press RCL and select a register or memory 2 STO Store reg or mem 1 09 55 00 1 23 00 00 Store the value displayed in the calculator display area in the in point register 3 7 IN 1 09 55 00 A In 1 23 00 00 The value is stored in the register Enter Out Point 4 3 2 1 00 00 1 09 55 00 3 21 00 00 Enter a value or use RCL to recall a value from a register or memory 5 STO Store reg or mem 1 09 55 00 3 21 00 00 Store the value in the out point register 6 8 OUT 1 09 55 00 A Out 3 21 00 00 The value is stored in the out point register The duration is automatically calculated and stored in the duration register Verify the Duration register contents 7 RCL 9 DUR 1 09 55 00 Dur 1 58 00 00 8 49 Keyboar
224. n sync On playback a SMPTE time code reader reads time code from one tape recorder and passes the timing data to a synchronizer con nected to the other tape recorder Based on this incoming time code the synchronizer regulates the playback speed of the slave so that it always stays in perfect sync with the master ATR MASTER ATR SLAVE TIME READS TIME CODE CODE CONTROLS SPEED LYNX MASTER TIMING DATA LYNX SLAVE SMPTE001A Figure Appendix A 1 Basic SMPTE Time Code Setup This simple example is the basis for all SMPTE applications For instance if you are locking to film or video using a digital audio workstation or a sequencer you d just substitute the appropriate controlling device to suit the equipment for that application Micro Lynx 4 06 22 00 Locking to Picture Appendix Suppose you have footage on videotape and you need to create an audio track to go with it It could be music dialog effects or all three How do you lock the sound to picture Use SMPTE and a Micro Lynx or two Lynx modules exactly as de scribed in the previous audio example SMPTE works just as well with video as it does with digital or analog tape You can use SMPTE to lock video to analog digital to analog in fact just about anything to anything even sound sources that don t use tape ATR TV MONITOR VTR CONTROL CONTROL TIME CODE TIME CODE GENERATOR POWER SUPPLY KEYBOARD CONTR
225. n that the system will use All the other machines in the group follow the reference machine position Thus unless all the machines have the exact same starting time code like 01 00 00 00 each machine will need to have an offset added or subtracted to properly track the reference machine The system also uses and slaves the reference machine s time code numbers when entering any locate start stop or punch in out times for the group The master machine is indicated by a capital letter while all the other machines in the group will be in lower case In addition to listing which machines are in a group and which machine is the master and which is the reference the display also indicates with a any machines that have offsets applied to them To create a completely new group you must first erase the group Press and hold GRP group select then press SETUP This will erase any previous group settings and cause the GRP A B C if the M3 card is installed and the TCG LEDs to flash The display will read Hold the GRP key and add groups in order of priority 6 9 Operational Features The first machine that is selected in this new group will now be the reference machine for the group It is selected by holding down the GRP key while pressing A B C or TCG This first machine is also the master machine for this group Continue holding the GRP key and select the remaining machines for this gr
226. n the System Unit so that the front panel faces you and remove the cover 4 Locate connector J1 the Video Sync Generator 20 pin plug in the right front corner of the main board 5 Hold the VSG Card component side up and position socket J1 so that it can be placed into the J1 plug on the main board Align the two standoffs on the main board with the holes in the VSG Card Warning CAREFULLY align the male and female connectors together See Detail B in Figure 1 Insert all pins into the appropriate holes failure to do so will DESTROY the VSG Card Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Option Cards TWO STANDOFFS SEE DETAIL B MAIN BOARD DETAIL A WARNING POSITION THE V8G CONNECTOR PROPERLY ENGAGING ALL PINS VSG CARD SEE DETAIL A RIGHT WRONG DETAIL B J1 CONNECTOR 043 Figure Chapter 10 1 Video Sync Generator 6 Press connector J1 and the standoffs into place 7 Replace the top cover and the six phillips screws Power up the unit The Micro Lynx will recognize the VSG Card on power up To turn the VSG on press SETUP TCG 6 then Press SETUP again to return to the normal display Micro Lynx 06 22 00 10 3 Option Cards M3 Option Card Transport Options 10 4 The Third Machine Card M3 expands the standard two machine Micro Lynx to a three machine system which permits more complex multiple transport control The M3 Card s
227. nce Otherwise select IntFix The Micro Lynx has an internal video sync generator VSG that it uses when no external video sync is available Set the system reference for your specific application The ACG output and each of the tape machines in the system will lock to the selected system reference which ensures correct synchronization Micro Lynx 9 22 06 22 00 Advanced Features Procedure 1 2 3 SETUP TCG Setup TCG Options Selection System Ref IntFix Setup Options Selection System Ref ExtVid Select the system reference required SETUP Exit Setup mode Time Code Generator Setup The Micro Lynx time code generator is used to set the system code type and frame rate The options are set according to the type of work you are doing If you are working with NTSC video set the system code to 29 97 Hz 30 Consult the Micro Lynx Manual for more detailed description of the code types and rate options Setting Time Code Generator System Speed Code Type Set the required frame rate and code type in the Micro Lynx TCG Setup options menu When Mediasound is in Chase mode it automatically detects and adjusts to this setting Procedure 1 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 SETUP TCG Setup TCG Options Selection System Ref IntFix Select time code generator setup LAST NEXT Setup TCG Options Selection System Spd Code 29 97 Hz 30 Select system Speed Code option S
228. nchronization reference mode press SETUP and 0 Use the and keys to step through the selections IntFix IntVar ExtVid Aux VSO In the IntVar mode the speed can be varied between 87 5 and 112 5 of nominal speed To set the Int Var varispeed press the 2 POST key to bring up the Varispeed menu Press the or keys or use the jog wheel to change the speed press SETUP again to exit the TCG setup menu Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Operational Features Code Only Master Operation Sometimes it becomes necessary to synchronize a machine or group of machines to a time code source This type of operation is commonly referred to as code only master allowing a Master machine s time code source to position slave machines into resolve and lock This section explains the various methods of operation available with the Micro Lynx that will allow code only master operation Selecting the System Reference Two reference choices are available for code only master operation VSO variable speed operation and External Video The correct selection will depend on the types of machines being used If the time code source will come from an analog or non video referenced machine then the System Reference selection will be VSO Master This mode will allow the time code source to provide the speed reference for the transports being synchronized Please be aware that this type of reference selection will only be as r
229. nd is issued The MIDI Time Code generator is automatically selected with the time code generator When MIDI is selected as a machine the MTC source automatically becomes the group master This is a special synchronization case that is only used when it is required to operate the system in MIDI time code chase Micro Lynx 06 22 00 GRP GROUP Micro Lynx 06 22 00 GRP Status Mode Keyboard Controller SETUP MIDI The Micro Lynx provides a comprehensive MIDI routing capability Please refer to the Advanced Features section for detailed information Press GRP to operate selected tape machines as a synchronous group When group is active the GRP LED and the selected machine keys A C TCG will turn on See the Getting Started section for a complete example Procedure To assign a tape machine to a Group 1 GRP GRP and machine LEDs flash Hold the GRP key and add groups in order of priority This is the machine selection prompt You have not grouped any machines 2 GRP A A LED turns on A A 1 03 47 17 0 Press GRP hold it and press the Machine select key Time code and machine letters are displayed the A machine is the master Remove a machine from the Group 3 Hold the GRP key and add groups in order of priority Press GRP and the machine select key to remove a machine from the group The machine keys A C are used to access status mode Status mode d
230. ne Card M3 The M3 Card plugs into a Micro Lynx expansion slot permitting control of a third machine The M3 Card also has the special hardware required to operate the Sony VO 5800 and VO 5850 Digital Audio Clock Generator Card ACG The Digital Audio Clock Generator Card plugs into a Micro Lynx expansion slot and is used to generate digital audio sample rate clocks The digital audio signals can be used to lock a digital audio workstation or digital tape transport to the Micro Lynx system VITC Reader Card VITC The VITC Card is a state of the art microprocessor based Vertical Interval Time Code VITC reader that plays into a Micro Lynx expansion slot The VITC Card integrates directly with the Micro Lynx machine controllers and provides VITC reading capability when the VTR or VCR is not equipped to supply serial time code to the synchronizer 10 1 Option Cards Video Sync Generator VSG Card Installation Procedure 10 2 The Video Sync Generator Card generates composite video sync in NTSC or PAL The VSG Card is a small daughter card that plugs directly into the mother board and generates Video Sync in NTSC or PAL The video signal is referenced to the Micro Lynx system speed reference 1 Turn off the power and place the Micro Lynx System Unit on a static safe workstation Ground yourself and the workstation anti static mat 2 Remove the six phillips screws securing the top cover of the System Unit 3 Positio
231. ne is selected in solo mode Solution Solo the reference machine Cause The CAPT or STO keys have been pressed Micro Lynx is prompting for a valid register or memory number Solution Select a valid register or press MEM followed by the memory number Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Introduction Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Chapter 6 Operational Features The Micro Lynx System Unit SU and Keyboard Controller KBD are used to remotely control two tape machines in the standard system configuration using prestriped SMPTE time code for extremely accurate and repeatable transport control With the optional M3 card a third tape machine can be added to the system All machines can function as either master or slave when used in a group Also any machine within a group can be selected as the time code reference machine and or the Master machine In addition to controlling basic tape movement play rewind fast forward stop the Micro Lynx system can also be used to control editing functions including automated punch in out for insert recording multiple memory position autolocate functions looping and synchronization functions such as offset timing chase and search In order to control individual tape transports the correct interface cable must be used to connect the Micro Lynx to each model tape machine The Appendix lists the remote controllable audio and video tape transports by manufacturer and model that are currently control
232. ned You may also use the and keys to change the offset Offset trimming can also be done in the stop mode To check the offset for any machine solo or stat that machine then press RCL 5 OFST This will display the offset in plus or minus time code numbers from the reference machine In a group the master machine is always started first and the slaves follow and lock to the master As the slave tape machines take a finite amount of time to catch up and lock to the master a pre roll time can be set to compensate for this delay which varies considerably between machines 6 11 Operational Features Adjusting the PreRoll Time The preroll time is the amount of time one sets for the tape machines to get up to speed and in sync with the master before the desired audio play record start point The default preroll setting is five seconds 5 00 This setting is stored in the preroll register 1 PRE key Its current setting can be checked by pressing the RCL recall register and the 1 PRE calculator key The lower right section of the display will then show the preroll setting PRE 5 00 the default If instead four seconds of preroll is all that is required for slave machines press the 4 0 and 0 calculator keys to enter 4 00 then press the STO store and 1 PRE keys to store the new preroll time The preroll setting is subtracted from whatever time code location the tape is being shuttled to For
233. nnect a standard Macintosh printer cable to the Macintosh modem port and the Micro Lynx MAC computer port or MIDI I F connector 2 For Pro Tools to receive MIDI time code several routing op tions are available MTC can be sent directly to the Macintosh printer or modem ports via the MAC or I F connectors This eliminates the need for a MIDI Translator If required for other MIDI system reasons MTC can be simultaneously generated from the 5 pin DIN MIDI OUT or THRU OUT connectors Procedure 1 SETUP MIDI Setup MIDI Selection MIDI OUT Jack Select MIDI port setup 2 LAST NEXT Setup MIDI Selection OUT Jack Select the port you wish to use for MTC 3 and Use to select chosen port for MTC 9 Add the TCG to the Micro Lynx machine group The time code generator TCG of the Micro Lynx now transmits MIDI time code based on the time code from the Reference machine Use the TCG options menu in setup mode to select the time code type and generation method 4 The generator will always jam to the incoming reader code and should be set to Play Wind to follow group transport operation Refer to TCG Option Menu in the Keyboard Controller section of the Micro Lynx Manual for option setting choices Note Anytime the TCG is put in the group or put into play MTC will be transmitted from the selected MAC or MIDI connectors Micro Lynx 9 6 06 22 00 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 5 10
234. number in the in point register is the record in point time code value of the currently programmed edit it is expressed in terms of the master machine s time code If there is no in point set then it will be automatically calculated when you enter an out point and a duration In Point Out Point Duration The edit in point is used to calculate source machine offsets if no reference sync point is entered When not used as an 8 in calculator mode the OUT key provides access to the Out Point register This register may be accessed during store recall and trim operations Press CLR and OUT simultaneously to clear the out point register The number stored in the out point register is the record out point of the currently programmed edit it is expressed in terms of the master machine s time code The out point is automatically calculated and stored when you enter an in point and a duration Out Point In Point Duration Altering the value of the duration will also cause the out point to be recalculated Conversely altering the out point automatically recalculates the duration When not used as a 9 in calculator mode the DUR key provides access to the Duration register This register may be accessed in store recall and trim operations Whenever there are active values in the in and out point registers there is a calculated time code value in the duration register Press CLR and DUR simultaneously to clear the duratio
235. nx 06 22 00 Troubleshooting during operations This may have occurred inadvertently Solution Verify that the correct reference source is selected by checking TCG Option menu in Setup mode System Err XXXX Cause An internal communications inconsistency has occurred The error type XXXX is a Hex number that will assist the factory in locating the problem System error codes are specific to different parts of the Micro Lynx system The first two characters define where the error was produced The second two characters are the type of error For example 00XX is System 88XX is ACG card AOXX is machine A A2XX is machine B A4XX is machine C EOXX is VITC Solution Note the system error number and contact the factory for further information System Fps Changed Cause The system frame rate has been changed at some point during operations This has probably been caused by a change in the reference machine time code type Solution Verify that the correct time code is present on the tapes Check that the correct frame rate and code type are selected by checking TCG Option menu in Setup mode Tran X Ampex Serial Cause A serial communications error has occurred with the Checksum Error specified Ampex transport Tran X Serial NAK Error Cause The specified serially controlled transport has responded with a negative acknowledge NAK to a Micro Lynx command Solution Verify that the correct transport type has been selected in the Tr
236. nx 06 22 00 2 7 Applications Micro Lynx with the Studio System AUTOLOCATOR ATR ATR DTR DIGITAL AUDIO WORKSTATION TIME CODE CONTROL TIME CODE TIME CODE MIDI OR MAC INTERFACE WORD CLOCK TIMECODE POWER SUPPLY 815555 Geese 2855 Bg m CONSOLE COMPUTER KEYBOARD CONTROLLER MIKOO8A Figure Chapter 2 6 Micro Lynx with the Studio System Typical Uses Using the Micro Lynx to it s full potential will give unparalleled control over your audio video MIDI and console automation system Because it is an integrated synchronization system everything can be controlled from a single location the Micro Lynx Keyboard Controller Considerations The Micro Lynx system is extremely flexible but it is limited to three ATR VTR transports plus the ACG MIDI and time code outputs Micro Lynx 2 8 06 22 00 Introduction Hardware Supplied Chapter 3 Installation This chapter will help you install the Micro Lynx system hardware The first part of the chapter describes the different hardware elements The second part of the chapter is an Installation Quick Check The Micro Lynx system includes the following items 1 Keyboard Controller KBD 1 System Unit SU 1 KBD to SU Cable 1 AC to DC Power Supply System Setup Planning
237. o As an example here s how to program the PRE roll time for ten seconds and the POST roll time for two seconds and then store these changes in the Macro 4 register 1 Press SETUP MACRO 4 this tells the Micro Lynx that you want to store the following key presses in the Macro 4 register 2 Press CLR to zero out the calculator display Press 1 0 00 STO 1 PRE this enters 10 00 into the calculator and then stores it into the Preroll register 4 Press CLR to zero out the calculator display Press 2 00 STO 2 POST this enters 2 00 into the calculator display and then stores it into the Postroll register 6 Press the MACRO key this ends the Macro entry and stores the key presses into the Macro 4 register To recall this key sequence again press MACRO then 4 and the new Preroll and Postroll times will be entered into the appropriate registers The calculator display will show the Postroll time since that was the last action entered in the Macro Setting Variable Speed Playback 6 18 There are two system reference settings that can be used for variable playback speed VSO where the system follows the master machine s time code speed or the Micro Lynx Internal variable mode which can be selected as the reference speed source In the display window these two selections would show up as V for VSO mode or i for the Internal variable mode To select the system sy
238. o Lynx In this configuration the MIDI machine selection on the Micro Lynx is put into the group and the tape machines will chase as slaves to the incoming MIDI time code With MIDI in the transport group the Micro Lynx requires that MIDI be the master Once GRP MIDI is pressed MIDI will automatically become the master machine The Micro Lynx ACG 1 amp 2 cards provide the speed reference for the Pro Tools System With MIDI Resolve ACG Servo option selected the ACG clock signal is servoed so that the incoming MIDI time code edge is aligned with the system reference for example EXT VIDEO The ACG Servo option is only required when Pro Tools is used as a Master If Pro Tools has be to locked to video then the MTC generated by Pro Tools in MIDI Master mode must have a fixed relationship with video sync The ACG Servo option is used to accurately advance or retard the position of the Pro Tools digital Audio so it has a precise and repeatable relationship with the video thus ensuring perfect MIDI time code synchronization For the Micro Lynx to receive MTC from Pro Tools you must select the MIDI input you wish to use Procedure Set MTC Source 1 SETUP MIDI Setup MIDI Options Selection MIDI Out Jack MTC Enter MIDI options setup menu LAST NEXT or 4 Setup MIDI Options Selection MTC Source MIDI In Jack Press 4 or Last Next until the MTC source menu is displayed 9 9 Advanced Features
239. o show that an offset is present PLAY b t 2 00 00 00 II gt L gt L gt L 0 The machines go into play and lock with the offset Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Getting Started 10 STOP A bt t 2 00 00 00 0 Offset calculation using sync points 11 SOLO A amp gt PLAY SOLO LED on A LED on SOLO A gt L 1 00 00 00 Err 0 00 Solo the Master machine 12 CAPT amp REF 3 CAPT LED flashes STORE LED flashes SOLO A gt L 13 B BLEDon SOLO LED on Solo the Slave machine 14 CAPT amp SYNC 4 CAPT LED flashes STORE LED flashes Capture the sync point The offset is automatically calculated and stored in the Offset register 15 RCL amp OFST 5 RCL LED flashing bs 2 03 52 03 Ofst 1 03 52 03 Use the RCL key if you wish to verify that the correct offset was stored in the Offset register Micro Lynx 06 22 00 4 15 Getting Started Trim an Offset Procedure Sometimes an offset must be trimmed The frame or subframe count can be increased or decreased in any register The default trim values are 1 frame and 1 subframe To change the trim increment value refer to SYS under SETUP in the Keyboard Controller chapter Trim Frame The value can be adjusted between 1 and 10 frames Trim Subframe The value can be adjusted between 1 and 25 subframes 1 RCL amp 7 OFST SOLO A b t bo 2 03 52 03 Ofst 1 03 52 03
240. o vd 8 19 Group Select Keys 5 eee 8 28 A C TOCGC MIDI 8 28 Dolo Mod st sd ecd tbt ented 8 28 Group Mode een aen eed ES SE Es 8 29 LEOCK CED e equ 8 29 BUSY LED 8 29 REC LED aaa eae tesoros 8 29 jer MIEL 8 81 MIDT ive de tob NIIT INR 8 82 GRP GROUP fob ta cach Lob coma cu uve 8 36 NC AOE eee NUNC KRUGER EON 8 36 DOOR detenta do ef cero 8 37 RON Com 8 87 TREKS cineca IE 8 87 Calc latofe Keys saco ai tom Eden cutus etin IM Eco atu ete 8 41 2 2 SR teas EC ONERE 8 41 CLR 8 41 EVID vae Dive I s ait Mu tee M Eque 8 43 1 PRE AT uut losen true e 8 44 2 POSTA D
241. ocation PLAY A b t b 1 30 40 01 L L L 0 Press gt The Group will lock Lock status is indicated by the II to the right of the time code Offsets are used if the time code on two or more tapes are not coincident For example if tape A starts at 00 00 00 00 and tape B starts at 02 00 00 00 then a record in point of 00 30 00 00 cannot be correct for both machines Use the Micro Lynx to enter an offset to automatically compensate for the time code difference between tapes The Micro Lynx always calculates a machine s offset from the reference machine The Micro Lynx indicates the reference machine with an the master machine with a capital letter and Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Procedure Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Getting Started slave machines with lower case letters In this example the A transport is the reference and master machine A b t 1 09 22 23 Err 0 To change the reference machine clear the group Press SETUP hold down the GRP key and reselect the machines the first machine selected is the reference machine If required the Master machine can be different from the reference machine In this case the Master machine can have an offset from the reference machine See Change the Master Machine The offset is the difference in the number of frames between the reference and slave or master tape at the point where they are to be synchronized For example Slave time code Re
242. ode The SETUP LED will flash Next press the MIDI key After modifying the selected op tions exit setup mode by pressing SETUP a second time Each menu can be accessed directly by selecting it numerically or se quentially by pressing the LAST and NEXT keys The individual options are stepped through by pressing the and keys Table Chapter 9 1 Micro Lynx MIDI Setup Selections KEY MENU SUE MEUU RANGE MTC Data I F Thru 1 I F Out Jack Off MTC MIDI Data ee 2 MAC Out Jack Off MTC MIDI Data eee 3 MIDI Thru Jack MIDI In MIDI Out Jack I F Jack 6 MIDI Resolve Off ACG Servo 9 11 Advanced Features Description Of Settings Midi Out Jack I F Out Jack MAC Out Jack MIDI Thru Jack MTC Source MIDI Data Source Please note that MIDI time code output from the Micro Lynx is a function of the time code generator You must group the TCG with the other machines in the group for MTC output Off Connector will not output any signal MTC Connector will output MIDI time code MIDI Data Connector will output Micro Lynx MIDI data Not available at this time Data Connector will output MIDI time code and MIDI data simultaneously Not available at this time IF Thru Connector will thru put MIDI information that has been input to the 8 pin I F connector Off Connector will not output any signal MTC Connector will output MIDI time code
243. oll time defaults to 5 seconds Cue point IN PREROLL WARNING No Active Transports Enabled The group goes into play and locks A prompt describing the machine record status is displayed Hold the RDY key and press machine keys A C as required to record enable each machine In 5 00 55 00 00 Dur 20 00 A Out 1 00 20 00 Preroll time counts down Record 1 00 00 00 LL Dur 20 00 A Out The Group goes into record at the in point DONE 1 20 00 00 LL Post 5 00 A Out The Group drops out of record at the out point and post rolls The Post roll time defaults to 5 seconds Getting Started 4 20 EDIT EDIT LED on CUE LED flashes REPLAY LED flashes REC LED flashes REH LED flashes Select edit mode 1 00 00 00 A Out 1 00 20 00 Enter Edit mode Edit mode selection LEDs flash to prompt a selection REPLAY EDIT LED on CUE LED on REPLAY LED flashes WARNING No Active Transports Enabled The group goes into play and locks A message describing the machine record status is displayed In 5 00 A 55 00 00 Dur 20 00 A Out Preroll time counts down REPLAY 1 00 00 00 LL Dur 20 00 A Out The Group goes into replay at the in point DONE 1 20 00 00 LL Dur 5 00 A Out The Group drops out of replay at the out point and post rolls The Post roll time defaults to 5 seconds LOOP Cue 55 00 00 55 00 00 CueCue A Out
244. on Keys eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee eene 8 50 XV Table of Contents Figure Chapter 8 10 Status 8 58 Figure Chapter 9 1 MIDI Routing Z1 3 039 or ape 9 13 Figure Chapter 9 2 Micro Lynx with an SGI Workstation eese 9 17 Figure Chapter 9 3 Micro Lynx to SGI Workstation 9 18 Figure Chapter 9 4 Micro Lynx to VTR 9 19 Figure Chapter 10 1 Video Sync Generator 10 3 Figure Chapter 10 2 Remove the Support 4 4 4444 1 10 8 Figure Chapter 10 3 Install the Option Card 10 9 Figure Chapter 10 4 Installation of 10 9 Figure Chapter 10 5 Installation of 10 10 Figure Chapter 10 6 ACG Block 10 13 Figure Chapter 10 7 Audio Clock Generator Inputs Outputs 2 10 19 Figure Chapter 10 8 Remove Support Bracket cccccccsssssseccccceeceeeesseeeccccseeeeasessseeees 10 22 Figure Chapter 10 9 Install the Option Card 10 22 Figure Chapter 10 10 Option Cable Installation 10 23 Figure Chapter 10 11 Installation of the ACG 10 24 Figure Chapter 10 12 Relocati
245. on of L 10 25 Figure Chapter 10 13 Install the ACG Option Card 2 10 25 Figure Chapter 10 14 Install the ACG 10 26 Figure Chapter 10 15 Remove the Support 10 28 Figure Chapter 10 16 Install the Option Card 10 29 Figure Chapter 10 17 Securing the VITC 10 29 Figure Chapter 10 18 Securing the VITC 10 31 Figure Appendix 1 Basic SMPTE Time Code Setup essere 4 Figure Appendix 2 Synchronize to 5 Figure Appendix A 3 MIDI Sequencer and Time A 6 Figure Appendix 4 Complete Studio System eese 6 Figure Appendix 5 Two Sine Wave Signals in A 8 Figure Appendix 6 Time Code A 9 Figure Appendix 7 Video Tape and VITC Time Code eese A 12 Figure Appendix 8 Reshaping Time Code eese A 15 Figure Appendix 9 Jam 16 Figure Appendix A 10 Automated Mixing A 19 Figure Appendix 11 The Modern Electronic Studio eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee A 20 Fig
246. on with the previous output LEDs It indicates that the selected output sample rate ratio has been automatically pulled up or down by 0 146 for example from 48 000 to 47 952 or from 44 100 to 44 056 When the nominal sample rate is selected the ACG card will automatically adjust the sample rate ratio by 0 1 if the sample rate requested requires a pull up because the system frame rate is running at 29 97 Hz instead of 30 25 24 Hz Or it will automatically adjust the sample rate ratio by 0 1 if the sample rate requires a pull down because the system frame rate is running at 30 25 24 Hz instead of 29 97 Hz Micro Lynx 06 22 00 8 61 Chapter 9 Advanced Features Using AVID AudioVision with the Micro Lynx Micro Lynx 06 22 00 AudioVision Version 2 0 includes support of TimeLine Vista Inc s Micro Lynx synchronizer Using the Micro Lynx with AudioVision will enable you to control many external decks that cannot be directly controlled using Sony 9 pin protocol The Micro Lynx also allows you to output time code from AudioVision and slave AudioVision from an external time code source This section outlines the basic steps necessary to connect the Micro Lynx to AudioVision and use it to control one or multiple decks It is assumed that you are familiar with operating the Micro Lynx or that you have read the Getting Started section of the user s manual If you are not already familiar with the Micro Lynx read the appropriate sections befo
247. ons It is used to complete a calculation sequence and when pressed the sum or difference will be displayed The answer is always displayed in the time code format of the master machine Procedure 1 RCL 7 IN 3 13 02 23 A In 3 47 17 Enter a value into the calculator display If adding a value to an existing register recall the register contents first 20 A bt A 3 13 02 23 kw plus 20 Enter number to be added 3 A b 3 13 02 23 3 48 07 The answer is displayed in time code Press or to begin a new calculation or CLR to return to the normal operating display The 4 or addition key is used with the 2 key to add two values together Additions are computed in frames and displayed in the code type or format of the master machine Press CLR to begin a new calculation or to return to the normal operating display The arithmetic is correctly performed even if the numbers entered are Micro Lynx 06 22 00 minus Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller incorrectly formatted For example if you enter 1 65 43 it will be translated to 2 06 13 30 frame calculation during the calculation The 4 plus key is also used in setup to select the next option in a menu It is used TRIM mode to bump or increase the numeri cal value stored in a selected register by the trim register value Procedure 1 1 6 5 4 3 A b 3 13 02 23 ED 1 65
248. or stuck key errors Glossary An alphabetic list of terms used during the discussion of the Micro Lynx Conventions Used for Examples This manual uses the following conventions Press Press a key generally a movement key or function key such as CLR Select Press or adjust the indicated key or wheel to obtain a result or display Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Preface You see CLR LED Key Display vi A key word indicator or number that you can see on the front panel or display This indicates a particular key on the Keyboard Controller such as the clear key in this example This is one of the lights on the System Unit front panel or Keyboard Controller Each of the buttons switches or keys on the Keyboard Controller that you press to cause something to happen The 80 character alphanumeric LCD display In examples the display will be illustrated by a double box 1 00 20 00 LL gt L gt L 0 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Table of Contents Chapter Tl JIntroductionio osos ated ina cera ocius 1 1 Mhastds4he Micro esce Ps ave ata 1 1 System Components ree a re D VESPERE VT 1 2 Gunter CE 1 2 System Config UPALIOR EG bae db od de 1 3 Keyboard Controller ar dest Qoid oou se Ve ute ou vx det ER a 1 3 Syst m UBI ctos cba cue acuta
249. or a soft reset in the Keyboard Controller All local keyboard variables are re initialized no information is lost and the Keyboard Controller returns to normal operation To completely reset or cold boot the keyboard press CLR SETUP followed by the ENTR key Press then press and hold the CLR key Any information that is stored in the System Unit will be restored However any data that is stored in the Keyboard Controller will be erased See the Keyboard Controller chapter for a more detailed explanation 4 21 Getting Started CLR TRAN Procedure 4 22 This key combination resets a specific machine back to the default transport parameters First solo the machine then press CLR TRAN the following message is displayed Transport Clearing Now CLR 1 1 2 3 B t 1 09 55 00 1 23 The numbers entered are displayed in the calculator display the lower right quadrant of the display 2 CLR Bet 1 09 55 00 0 The calculator display is cleared CLR SYS 8 CLR SYS Press ENTR to confirm Since this key combination resets the System Unit to its default condition you are asked to confirm this action ENTR SHTL System Unit Clearing Now Press any other key to abort the reset CLR SETUP 4 CLR SETUP Press ENTR to confirm Since this key combination resets the Keyboard Controller to its default condition you are asked
250. ording Punch in punch 400201 6 13 Setting Optlons eerte eee 6 13 With footswitch esee 6 13 8 43 REE COCK LED 8 58 Reference 6 10 Reference Sync Point Register Accessing 8 43 Registers ACCESSIDB es RAIS hs ie 6 15 8 8 Cle rng eee pU eris 8 39 8 48 Ead 6 14 8 27 Recalling values eee 8 8 8 50 Storing 8 8 8 51 8 53 Trimming values 8 16 8 55 8 56 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Index Key incites cele eons 8 12 8 14 8 18 REH LED ANS 8 14 Rehearse Options sess 8 18 REPLAY Key reni to ong 8 12 Reset Group Status e UR UE EE 6 10 Keyboard Controller sess 4 21 Machine Select Key 2 2 4 42 2221 8 22 Machine to default parameters 4 22 System Unit cere n dp 4 21 8 21 Track record 4 21 2 4 REWIND Key iiec eei ertet net 8 13 ROLLBACK Key eee 8 11 8 18 Rollback Options eeeeeeee 8 18 RS232 422 7 7 S Sample rate Parameters cisco tette e REOR 9 17 Setting for system 9 20 With 9 22 2 1 Select GPI 202
251. orize the purchaser to take or deliver prepaid the product to TimeLine or it s authorized Service Center During the remainder of the warranty period any defective part will be replaced if the purchaser will take or deliver the product prepaid to TimeLine Labor incurred in the repair is at the purchaser s expense This Warranty does not cover any damage due to accident misuse abuse or negligence We suggest that the purchaser retain the dated sales receipt as evidence of the original date of purchase This warranty is not transferable and applies only to the original registered purchaser REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE PUR CHASER TIMELINE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW AND EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY DESCRIBED ABOVE TIMELINE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE USA Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of inci dental or consequential damages or allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts so the above limitation and exclusions may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state Preface Safety To assist identification of potentially hazardous circumstances or procedures warnings an
252. ory clear is performed CLR SYS This allows 8 23 Keyboard Controller 8 24 the information to be retained for a machine when selecting another machine Lifter Defeat Selects which condition allows the Micro Lynx to defeat the machines lifters to read time code from the tape it is usually set to Normal In Normal the Micro Lynx defeats the lifters only as the machine slows to park to check that it has located correctly Record In Selects the command method or logic to punch the machine into record Record Out Selects the command method or logic to punch the machine out of record Rehearse In Selects the command method or logic to punch the machine into rehearse Rehearse Out Selects the command method or logic to punch the machine out of rehearse Approach Speed Sets the approach speed or deceleration point for a machine as it slows to park Use it to adjust machine performance if the park point is consistently over or under shot Increase the value to slow the transport later Decrease the value to slow the transport earlier Bandwidth Limit Selects a time code reader input RDR filter circuit that bandwidth limits the input frequency range This should be used if the time code source is noisy This is usually only required with video machines Reader Mode Selects the time code source for the machine it is normally set to LTC Serially controlled video machines will be set to read serial time code as fol
253. oup The remaining machines will display as lower case letters indicating their slave machine status Changing the Master Machine Resetting the Group 6 10 If required the Reference and Master can be different machines Set the Group option Ref follow Master to off and then select a new master machine by holding the SETUP key and then pressing the desired new master machine key A B C or TCG Since this does not affect the reference machine the stays with the original transport See the Getting Started and Keyboard Controller sections for more information Note By default the Ref follow Master option is set on If the Master is changed the Reference machine will also change There can only be one master machine in a group The master machine is the one that is activated by the motion controls When it starts to move the slave machines will immediately start up as well in order to lock up to the master The current group status can be reset by holding the GRP key and then pressing the SETUP key This allows the user to designate a new group from the default display The display will read Hold the GRP key and add groups in order of priority Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Machine Offsets Setting the Offsets Machine Control Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Operational Features In almost all but the basic application the time code at the start of the tape on the reference machine will not match the time code at the s
254. oup ou cU ae NR ed 8 32 Ryu 8 20 8 58 Lifters Defeating sese 8 24 LIST Key i Seed bae Ur ue rtt ERN 8 27 LOG Rey zin 8 11 LOCK LED rs 8 29 Locking Machines eere 4 11 Longitudinal Time 8 24 10 27 EQOP K6y 8 18 8 34 Loop Optlons ems 8 18 Play PRESS IER 6 12 M 2 1 10 4 2 1 2 6 M3 Card teneo tens 10 1 M3 EEDZz eta CRI 10 4 MAC Connector pene tic eh 7 7 Machine Information Display 8 5 Machine Select Options esee 8 18 Machine Start Point sess 6 8 Machine Status Display sees 8 5 Macro Defined oki eer tie 6 15 8 52 Deleting rper ee este 6 17 Preprogrammed doen 6 17 Programming eene 6 17 Setting Up eet 8 52 Short Cut Keys esee 8 20 MACRO ee 8 18 8 52 Master Machine 8 6 10 6 19 Changing itn ert tee ete 4 17 Mediasound Synchronized with Micro 9 15 Using with Micro Lynx eene 9 16 MEM KByte ee HERE 8 18 8 27 Memory Changing SIZ6 Lee e ERR UE ES 8 27 Index PRG COP Gn 8 18 Recalling a 4 0 6 15 8 27 Re
255. ovide direction in formation and mark the end of the 80 bit frame The time code reader uses the direction sense bits to determine whether the tape is running forwards or backwards The sync word is a series of preset 1 s that allow the speed and phase of two time codes to be read and compared by the Lynx or Micro Lynx module to establish synchronization START OF FRAME KnAMES USER BITS DIRECTION SENSE BORDER BITS FRAMES USER SEC USER SEC USER MIN USER MIN USER HOURS USER HOURS USER SYNC BITS BITS BITS BITS BITS BITS BITS WORD JU LTU wu FULT LPL UL 12 16 las 24 28 m 36 n 44 lie 52 le 60 64 s L 2047A Figure Appendix A 6 Time Code Address SMPTE words one for each frame are recorded along the length of the tape hence the name Longitudinal Time Code LTC The code s design and organization make it suitable for use over a very wide range of play speeds both forwards and backwards The frequency of the LTC signal is always proportional to the tape speed However the signal cannot be read in stop or freeze frame mode Consequently video frequently uses another form of time code Vertical Interval Time Code VITC which can be reliably read in stop and at very slow play speeds Micro Lynx 06 22 00 A
256. p or Non Drop SMPTE codes X The system frame rate 24 25 29 97 or 30 frames per second The sample rate 32 000 44 100 or 48 000 kHz If an NTSC 0 196 pull down is selected the sample rates will be 31 968 44 056 and 47 952 kHz Non standard and variable rates can also be set To complete the system configuration you need to select the type of video or tape transport to be controlled by the Micro Lynx ATR DTR VTR 0 WORKSTATION SUNG d ag B 2j MIDIVFORMAC 9 T g2 EXT SYNC INTERFACE 5 Cmm MICRO LYNX 2 SYSTEM UNIT ACG S AES EBU CLOCK 2 POWER SUPPLY 00555 5555 anan 5558 3 Es 8 Ex ex e i9 MICRO LYNX KEYBOARD CONTROLLER MDS002A Figure Chapter 9 2 Micro Lynx with an SGI Workstation Micro Lynx 06 22 00 9 17 Advanced Features Micro Lynx to Computer Connections X Connect the ACG AES EBU output to the SGI workstation Digital I O jack using the supplied cables Note The workstation s digital audio output is available at the unattached plug of the supplied Y cable X Connect a standard Macintosh printer cable supplied between the SGI workstation Serial Port 2 and the Micro Lynx MIDI I F connector MICRO LYNX BACK PANEL 8 PIN 9 PIN MDS001
257. port Note Be sure to use a standard Macintosh printer cable to connect the Mac to the Micro Lynx not a Mac to 9 pin cable Connecting the Mac to the Micro Lynx s 9 pin port can result in inaccuracies in time code when digitizing material into AudioVision Connect a black burst source to the Video Ref port on the Micro Lynx and to the video machine you are controlling Use a BNC cable to connect the ACG 2 card s OS OUT on the Micro Lynx to the first Digidesign Audio Interface s Slave Clock input Power on the Micro Lynx On the Micro Lynx Keyboard the group select keys will flash press machine key A Next you need to specify the type of machine you are using Enter setup mode in the Micro Lynx by pressing the SETUP key on the keyboard Press the TRAN key to select the type of machine you are synchronizing Use the Next Last and and keys to select the correct type from the menu Note If your deck does not appear in the menu refer to the Appendix Table 2 for alternate choices While in setup mode the default option settings initialized by AudioVision can be checked by pressing the respective option key and the Last Next keys to step to the desired menu For example press the TCG key and use the Last Next keys to select the System Ref menu This should normally be set to Ext Vid For a complete list of setup options please see the Appendix Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Advanced Features 9 Press the
258. port controls Later we ll explain how SMPTE is used to build large multi machine networks for video editing and music recording AUTOLOCATOR ATR ATR DTR DIGITAL AUDIO WORKSTATION EXT SYNC CONTROL TIME CODE CONTROL TIME CODE POWER SUPPLY ix cx CONSOLE z KEYBOARD CONTROLLER COMPUTER SMPTE011A Figure Appendix A 4 Complete Studio System Micro Lynx 06 22 00 How Does SMPTE Do It If you know precisely where a piece of program is and how fast it is playing then it is possible to use this information to control other machines so that they are all in the right place at exactly the same time SMPTE does just this it is an absolute timing reference that indicates both the speed and position of a tape as it travels across a tape machine transport What You Can Do with a Speed Reference Many pre SMPTE sync codes could only indicate speed The most widely used was control track or pilot tone Pilot tone is an audio signal derived from a stable source historically 60 Hz AC wall cur rent By reducing the voltage with a suitable transformer the resultant continuous sine wave could be recorded on tape Machine speed is normally regulated by monitoring tach pulses from the tape machine s capstan motor They indicate how many times the capstan revolves
259. ppendix for the machines supported 7 B Setup AUTO Serial TRANSPORT Tran Select the second transport B Transport 2 repeat steps 4 6 until all machines A C have been set up 8 SETUP 2 Hold the GRP key and add groups in order of priority Machine selection is complete and the setup is saved Initialization Procedure 9 SOLO SOLO a a 1 01 14 07 0 In Solo mode only one transport is controlled Use the transport controls to check motion 10 gt PLAY SOLO a gt L 1 01 14 07 0 Put the machine into play time code should be running Micro Lynx 06 22 00 4 3 Getting Started RWD SOLO a 1 00 00 03 0 Puts the machine into rewind time code should run backward gt gt FFD SOLO a gt gt a501 07 14 09 0 Puts the machine into fast forward time code should run forward STOP SOLO a 1 01 14 07 0 Transport should stop 11 B b 1 01 14 07 Err 0 Solo the next machine Use the transport controls to check motion If the M3 card is installed repeat steps 9 and 10 but select machine C gt PLAY SOLO b gt L 1 01 14 05 Err 0 Puts the machine into play time code should be running 12 STOP SOLO b bs 2 09 10 03 Err 0 You are ready to use the Micro Lynx Micro Lynx 4 4 06 22 00 Getting Started Set the System Reference Before using the system decide what system speed reference your machin
260. r Oversample Clock input is used with the oversample input demultiplier to provide a system reference ACG 2 Option card only Micro Lynx 06 22 00 System Unit VITC TIME CODE jj AUDIO CLOCK GENERATOR MEE RDR1 RDR2 OUT AUXIN AUXOUT MAC be 5 0 5 OUT WORD QUT CLOCK IN POWER VIDEO REF TRANSPORT 1 TRANSPORT 2 KEYBOARD 018 Figure Chapter 7 11 Interface IN BNC differential input Connected to the output from the video machine THRU BNC Loop through of the video input connector Power SYSTEM UNIT BEEN PANEL COMPUTER 2 pan WOO CLOCK GENERATOR ine ron none 5 5 N our mmuour i DESEE DET db d 5999 coe 090 POWER VIDEO REF TRANSPORT TRANSPORT KEYBOARD E ind DRS TRANSPORTS POWER SUPPLY MIK009B Figure Chapter 7 12 Power POWER 5 DIN socket Power is supplied to the Micro Lynx System Unit by an external power supply Do NOT add an extension to the 5 pin DIN cable between the Power Supply and the System Unit Table Chapter 7 17 POWER Connector Pin Description Pin Description pt 2 0 5 4 727 5 Power Supply The Power Supply Unit is a switched mode type which automati cally adjusts to the correct AC voltage for your area It is suitable for operation at any vol
261. r message After the last error is displayed all messages are cleared and the Micro Lynx automatically exits the error mode Pressing CLR also exits the error mode Refer to Troubleshooting for a complete list of error messages CLR SYS Hold the CLR key and press the SYS key to cold boot or reset the System Unit This clears all user setup options and returns to the factory defaults Before this command is executed the following warning message and prompt is displayed Press ENTR to confirm If you are sure that you want to reset the System Unit press the ENTR key SETUP e SYS Press SETUP followed by SYS to enter the system options menu There are seven headings in this menu Use it to set the following system operating parameters Table Chapter 8 5 SYS Setup Menu KEY MENU SUB MENU RANGE System 0 LED Brightness 20 100 100 Options 1 DSPL Contrast 30 100 70 2 DSPL Timeout Off 1 5 10 20 min Never 3 Jog Speed 1 10 5 01 10 01 5 Trim Subframe 01 25 01 6 Port Select MAC MIDI 422 ES MAC ES 422 Off TRAN The TRAN key is used to display current machine status TRAN A B or C Press TRAN followed by a machine select key A C The display shows the selected transport type the time code frame rate capstan control resolved or wild and whether the time code reader bandwidth limit is selected Tran A AMPEX ATR 124 TC 30 Resolved BWL Off Micro Lynx
262. re attempting to use it with AudioVision On power up AudioVision automatically configures the Micro Lynx for correct operation The following setup options are initialized by AudioVision e The Mac computer port is set for ES bus operation e Park Window is set to zero e Group park ahead is set to zero e Ref follow master is set to on e The System reference is set External Video unless a VSG video sync generator board is fitted then it will be set to Internal fixed The ACG card input and output is set to 44 100 KHz and the Oversample rate to 256 To complete the configuration all that has to be selected is the type of transport to be controlled 9 1 Advanced Features The Avid system requires that a transport be selected for an Avid node to be active If it is intended to use AudioVision in slave mode to a time code feed with no transport connected we recommend that an ATR transport be selected To Control One Transport Device with the Micro Lynx 1 With all hardware powered off connect a machine control cable and a time code cable between the Micro Lynx and the deck you want to control The machine control cable is connected from the Micro Lynx s Transport 1 connector to the deck s remote control input and the time code cable is connected from the deck to the RDR 1 input on the Micro Lynx Use a standard Macintosh printer cable to connect your Macintosh s modem port to the Micro Lynx s Macintosh
263. ready machine into record Step on the switch a second time to turn off recording Setting Record Ready Options Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Setting a machine to drop into record is a two step process you must first record enable the machine by pressing and holding the RDY key and then the appropriate transport letter key A B or C This will flash the red record ready LED for that machine To deselect a single machine press and hold the RDY key and then select the machine a second time To take all machines out of record ready press and hold CLR then press RDY On machines that accept individual track enables tracks must now be put into track ready mode by pressing TRKS and then the appropriate machine letter A B or C to bring up the track select display Since ATRs and DTRs may have anywhere from 2 to 48 tracks and VTRs may have from one to four audio channels in addition to individually being able to record video time code or 6 13 Operational Features sync there will be several variances between displays depending upon the model of machine selected In any machine individual tracks are selected by simply using the calculator keypad to select the tracks after selecting the machine using the TRKS and machine letter key In a VTR pressing 0 by itself will set the video ready to record pressing 6 will set the time code track ready to record pressing 5 puts the machine into record ready on the sync or cue
264. reg or mem will be displayed Press one of the calculator keys to store the value in the calculator data entry buffer to the corresponding register Press the MEM key followed by a memory number to store the value in a memory location Press CLR or STO again to cancel the command The STO key can be used to store a value to any of the following registers Time In Point Out Point Duration Sync Point select a machine first by pressing A C TCG Offset select a machine first by pressing A C or Preroll Postroll Reference If the currently selected machine is the reference machine it is not possible to store an offset or sync point value The following error message will be displayed Must be slave Press a machine select key A C TCG to change the current machine to a slave transport The store function is automatically selected when you press the CAPT key Requiring only the selected register or memory key to be pressed to store the time code value Procedure 1 S 1 S 0 2 2 3 1 03 47 17 3 13 02 23 Enter or recall a time code value 3 13 02 23 2 STO STO LED flashes 8 51 Keyboard Controller MACRO Store reg or mem 1 03 47 17 3 13 02 23 Press a calculator key to select a register or press MEM and a calculator key to select a memory 3 7 IN STO LED turns off 1 03 47 17 A In 3 13 02 23 The time code is stored in the i
265. rify that the machine setup is correct Cause The VITC reader is in auto mode and has switched to a new pair of lines because the previously used line pair is no longer available Solution Select the required pair of lines using VITC fixed line mode operation Cause The VITC reader is in fixed mode and the time code on the currently selected line pair does not match Solution Select a matching pair of lines Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Prompts Hold GRP key and add groups in order of priority Macro is already programmed To clear MACRO 0 9 Press ENTR to confirm Program Macro 0 45 6789 Recall mem Recall reg or mem Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Select valid reg Troubleshooting Cause Micro Lynx requires that machines are selected to a group for synchronization If no machines are selected to the group then this prompt is displayed The GRP LED and the available machine select keys A C TCG will flash Solution Hold the GRP key and press machine select keys A C to make a group Remember the machine key selected first will be the reference machine Cause You have selected a Macro for programming that is already programmed or has been pre programmed Solution Select a Macro that is blank or press and hold the MACRO key and the macro number 0 9 to clear the macro Cause A data loss function has been selected Micro Lynx prompts for a confirmation before performing the
266. rm DTR 900 2 Capst Ris 71C049 Otari MX 5050 3 MX 5050 3 MX 5050 MkIII Series 16 pin older machines 71C050 Otari MX 5050 3 MX 5050 3 MX 5050 Series 34 pin current machines 71 051 Otari MX 5050 3 MX 5050 3 MX 5050 MkIII Series 34 pin Y current machines Y Cable 71C062 DTR 90 DTR 90 Micro Lynx Serial 71 062 Panasonic AG 7750 AG 7750 Micro Lynx Serial AG 7700 AJ D360 71C07 824 a k a Soundcraft Saturn 71 052 Sony PCM 3402 3402 Par Capst Norm Sony Type A 3402 Par Capst Rls 3402 Ser Par Capst Norm 3402 Ser Par Capst hls APR 24 APR 24 APR 5000 APR 5000 No longer BVU 800 BVU 800 Par BVU 800 Parallel interface available 71 054 or Sony JH 24 JH 24 JH 110 JH 24 or 71C069 JH 114 Late Model JH 24 Machines with 12 pin JH 16 Autolocator connector Y Cable 71 055 or Sony JH 110 ABC JH 110 or 71 074 JH 114 Early JH 110 Machines with 21 pin Model Synchronizer connector Y Cable 71 056 Sony PCM 3324 PCM 3324 Capst Norm PCM 3324 Hi Prec PCM 3324 Capst Rls PCM 33248 PCM 3324s Capst Norm Hi Prec PCM 3324s Capst Rls 71391 PCM 7030fm PCM 7030 fm PCM 7030 FM Vari speed operation Micro Lynx A 26 06 22 00 Table A 3 Cable Reference Guide continued Micro Lynx Transport Control Cables Machine TimeLine Transport Part No Manufacturer Model 71 075 5850 71 062 Sony PCM 7030 PCM 7030 PCM 7050 VO 9800 VO 9800 VO 9850 BVU 800 BVU 800 Ser BVU 95
267. ro Lynx 06 22 00 7 11 System Unit Audio Clock Generator RDR1 RDR2 OUT AUXIN AUXOUT tee 7 SING 2 POWER VIDEO REF TIME CODE TRANSPORT 1 AES EBU OUT WORD OUT CLOCK IN MIDI m sca AUDIO CLOCK GENERATOR 3 THRU OUT AES EBU O S OUT WORDOUTCLOCKIN 017 Figure Chapter 10 Audio Clock Generator The Audio Clock generator is a multi input output digital audio clock card that can be either locked to or generate the Micro Lynx system frame reference See ACG under SETUP in the Keyboard Controller Chapter for information on how to set up the ACG options Table Chapter 7 16 AES EBU Connector Pin Description Ground Grund AES EBU In Grund Ground AES EBU Out 9 pin D socket transformer coupled AES EBU digital input and output connector Will output a silent AES EBU bit stream locked to the system reference with either a fixed or variable ratio to the nominal sample rate Will accept an AES EBU input which can be used as a system reference ACG 2 Option card only BNC 5V TTL level output The Oversample Clock Output is locked to the system reference with a frequency determined by the word clock rate and the oversample output multiplier BNC 5V TTL level output The Word Clock Out is locked to the system reference with either a fixed or variable ratio to the nominal sample rate BNC 5V TTL level input The Digital Audio Word o
268. roup is in record then the REC LED is turned on Keyboard Controller Jog Shuttle Jog Shuttle Wheel TRIM LAST TRIM 8 16 EY NEXT ENTR JoG F SHTL JOG WHEEL 26 Figure Chapter 8 5 Jog Shuttle The Jog Shuttle Wheel has three modes Trim Jog and Shuttle It can be used to Spool machines at controlled wind speeds e Nudge or bump a tape one frame at a time Trim the offset of a source machine in real time to achieve a precise time relationship between the master and slave machines The TRIM key selects Trim mode use the Jog Wheel and the 4 and keys to adjust register values You may adjust the values in most registers After selecting trim recall a register then press the or keys or use the Jog Wheel to increase or decrease the time code value Holding or down will cause the key to auto repeat Press the SUB FR key to enter subframes and use the Jog Wheel or and keys to adjust the subframe value For example you may need to finely adjust an offset value Select a slave machine and recall the offset press SUB FR then TRIM Use the Jog Wheel to adjust the value Press TRIM again to exit trim mode Micro Lynx 06 22 00 JOG NEXT SHTL ENTR Micro Lynx 06 22 00 LAST JOG NEXT SHTL ENTR Keyboard Controller Each time that you press TRIM the Micro Lynx selects the last register that you trimmed Press a
269. rt control of up to 3 audio and or video transports Full editing capability with transport controls keypad input and special function keys Solo or Group operation of transports or MIDI devices User selected master for group operations of audio or video transports and MIDI controlled devices Computer guided entry prompts displayed for next entry Direct entry and calculation of time code numbers Supports register store and recall operations 100 memory locations Shuttle wheel for shuttle and frame jog operations with VTRs and many ATRs Trim mode to trim time code register values frames amp subframes using a wheel rather than the calculator Locate mode to position all selected transports to a specified time code minus preroll Programmable edit sequences with rehearse in out record in out and replay Edit loop mode allowing a programmed edit sequence to be repeated indefinitely Micro Lynx System Unit SU Time Code Generator Time Code Reader Generates all world wide standards SMPTE drop frame and non drop frame EBU and Film Reference sources internal crystal MIDI time code external sync input and digital audio clock External sync reference input accepts black burst or composite sync Jam sync Pilot field rate output 60 59 94 50 48 Hz locked to generator Two wideband high speed readers three with option card Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Synchronizer MIDI Outputs Computer Interface M
270. ry for Video 2 9 15 Using Mediasound with the Micro Lynx eese enne eene 9 16 Micro Lynx to Computer 7 9 18 Micro Lynx to VTR Connections 9 19 Micro Lynx Setup ueni 9 20 Audio Clock Generator 9 20 MIDI Time Code Setups nitce iie i en ii e i ii ae i i 9 21 MIDI DataSource Setup xtti ete teen teen tee Ee I TENN 9 22 System Reference Setup cccccccccccssssssseccccceccccuesssseecccsececauuesesecceeeceeseeeeauaseeeceeeeeenaas 9 22 Micro Lynx xii 06 22 00 Table of Contents Time Code Generator Setup 4 nenne essen 9 23 Micro Lynx EEEE E E 9 24 Controlling Mediasound with the Micro Lynx eene 9 24 Controlling One Transport Device with the Micro 9 25 Chapter 10 Option AREE VAR p RR 10 1 Video Sync Generator VSG 2 0000000000000000000000044 0 0 000 10 2 Installation Proceqdube zu oie aee seas Ede Ge Que 10 2 M3 Option Card eodera E MONS 10 4 Transport Qptlons EEUU PONENS A ES 10 4 Card Initialization
271. s If not the current register and memory values will be retained Cause A keyboard cold boot operation is in process The keyboard will reinitialize to default parameters Some information will be cleared Cause keyboard warm boot operation is in process The keyboard variables will re initialize No information is cleared Cause A CUE command to locate the transports to the Cue Point has been issued and no Cue or In Point is set Solution Set a Cue or In Point by using the F3 or F1 keys Time code values can also be entered and stored to these registers by using STO and CUE or STO and IN Cause A transport or device has been selected that is not available Solution Select a different transport Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Old offset used Out must be later than in System Unit Clearing Now Transport Clearing Now Tran X Play Speed 30 ips Tran X Play Speed 15 ips Tran X Play Speed 7 5 ips Track is safe or not available WARNING open end WARNING No active transports enabled Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Troubleshooting Cause When trimming an offset the trim process was exited by pressing CLR Solution This message informs you that the new offset was not saved and the old offset will be used the offset wasn t changed or adjusted by the aborted trim operation Cause An Edit command has been issued when the Out Point is before the In Point Solution Set a new Out Point after the
272. s 8 3 Table Chapter 8 2 Setup Key 022020 2000000000 8 19 Table Chapter 8 3 ACG Setup Menu cccccccccccccsssssssseecceeeeeeesesseesseeeecceeeeeausaeseeeeceeeeeeaaa 8 20 Table Chapter 8 4 Setup 9 8 20 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 xvii Table of Contents Table Chapter 8 5 SYS Setup 002220200001 nnne 8 21 Table Chapter 8 6 TRAN Setup nene eene nnne rne nensis nennen 8 23 Table Chapter 8 7 EVENT Setup Menu eene nnne ennt eene ntn nnn 8 26 Table Chapter 8 8 MEM Setup Menu cccccccssssscccccccccccssssseecccceecceseeessseeseeeececeseeeuaaesees 8 27 Table Chapter 8 9 TCG Setup 8 30 Table Chapter 8 10 GRP Setup Menu cccssscccccccccccsssseeeccccceeceseeeeauaeseeeccesseeeeuaeanees 8 31 Table Chapter 8 11 LOOP Setup 8 34 Table Chapter 8 12 RDY Setup 2 0 22000000000000000000000000011100 8 35 Table Chapter 8 13 Setup Menu cccccccccccccccccssssseeeccceeccesecesauaenseeececeseeauaaanses 8 38 Table Chapter 8 14 Error Register ccccccccccssssssseecccceecccssssssssesecccceeeeesaueeseeecccceeeeauaaenses 8 47 Table Chapter 9 1 Micro Lynx MIDI Setup 1
273. s an audio signal on a designated track of a VTR or an ATR Machine refers to the generic concept of tape record playback hardware The wide ranging field of transport control This covers basic transport operation synchronization and more complex functions such as electronic editing Preprogrammed or user programmed keys permitting complex key sequences to be stored and executed by pressing a single key Sometimes known as smart keys Musical Instrument Digital Interface This serial data language is used by microprocessors in synthesizers sequencers drum ma chines signal processors and computers It provides musical pitch and rhythm information synthesizer performance parameters song position markers stop start continue commands for sequencers and computers and synchronizing data called MIDI Clock which is based on 24 pulses per quarter note MIDI is frequently used with SMPTE for sync to tape functions MIDI is transmitted between microprocessors at 32 125 kBits per second It can also be used by lighting systems and mixing consoles A MIDI system real time message that assigns a unique address for a specific moment in time MIDI Time Code takes two frames to transmit a complete address in bursts of data that are transmitted every 1 4 frame The basic set of six transport control keys Play Stop Rec Reh Rwd amp FF and the six additional transport control functions Loc Cue Allstop Rlb replay amp Edit See MI
274. s are clean and properly aligned will give the maximum performance from the time code track Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Operational Features Why Start at 59 45 00 Starting at 59 45 00 or before some people like to start at 59 30 00 or earlier ensures that there will be at least fifteen seconds of time code recorded on tape before the code hits 1 00 00 00 one hour which is the default record start point for most projects although there are those that like to start at 10 00 00 00 in which case the 0 TIME register would be set to 09 59 45 00 It s essential that you leave at least fifteen seconds of time code at the head of the tape before where the first recording will occur This blank time code section will be used as the tape s preroll area Preroll is the amount of time the tape machines roll before the start of audio playback or recording It s needed to ensure that all the slave tape machines are locked in sync with the master before the start of audio or video For more information on preroll time see Adjusting the PreRoll Time in Playback Features later in this section SMPTE Time Code in the Integrated Video Audio Production Studio Micro Lynx 06 22 00 In most cases the master and or reference machine will be the video tape machine VTR rather than the audio tape machine ATR However as all machines connected to the Micro Lynx are synchronized any machine can be made the master The frame rate selected must
275. safe workstation Ground yourself and the workstation anti static mat 2 Onthe back of the System Unit remove the cover labeled THIRD MACHINE EXPANSION 3 Remove the six phillips screws securing the top cover to the System Unit 4 Position the System Unit so that the front panel faces you and remove the top cover Install the Option Card 5 The Back Panel PCB is located at the top back of the chassis 10 8 Bracket horizontal to the back panel Remove the L shaped bracket supporting the Back Panel PCB by removing the phillips Screws one on the left side of the board and the other on the back panel to the right of the SYSTEM TALLY connector The bracket is no longer needed keep the phillips screws 052 Figure Chapter 10 2 Remove the Support Bracket 6 Hold the Option Card bracket so that the large cutout is face up Set the front of the bracket in place on the threaded stud on the inside of the Front Panel Set the bracket down and slide it under the left edge of the Back Panel PCB Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Option Cards 7 Insert and tighten the screws removed from the back panel and from the Back Panel PCB Place a nut on the threaded stud and secure the bracket to the front panel See Figure 10 3 5 Figure Chapter 10 3 Install the Option Card Bracket Install the Card 8 The Card is mounted on the left side of the System Unit component side up 9 If you
276. serial transports Please refer to the Appendix for a complete listing of available transports Micro Lynx 06 22 00 10 11 12 13 14 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Installation Setup AMPEX ATR 124 Tran Press and keys to select the machine type Refer to the Cable Reference Guide in the Appendix for the machines supported B Setup NO TRANSPORT Tran Select the second transport B Transport 2 repeat steps 8 11 until all machines A C have been set up SETUP 2 Hold the GRP key add groups in order of priority Machine selection is complete and the setup is saved SOLO SOLO a as 0 0 Use the transport controls to check motion gt SOLO a gt L Puts the A machine into play time code numbers will advance if time code has been striped onto the tape lt lt SOLO a lt lt a400 00 00 00 0 Puts the machine into rewind time code should run backward gt gt SOLO a gt gt a400 00 00 00 0 Puts the machine into fast forward time code should run forward STOP SOLO a 1 01 14 07 0 Stops the A machine s transport and displays the final time code number received Installation 15 B SOLO b gt L 2 09 10 07 0 Solo the b machine Use the transport controls to check motion STOP SOLO b 2 09 10 03 0 If the M3 card is installed repeat step 14 and 15 but select machine C 16 GRP A
277. sing fluctuating electronic voltages to replicate audio waveforms Audio Tape Recorder A device that can hold multiple tape locations in memory and chase to those locations on command using SMPTE addresses tach pulses or control track pulses to find a desired point on tape The frequency range of a signal A system for expressing numerical values using two digits 0 and 1 The binary system is used in digital audio SMPTE MIDI and other microprocessor related data formats A 33 Biphase Encoding BIT Blanking Interval BNC Byte Capstan Code Type Configuration Control Track CPU DAW Decibel dB DF Differential Input Differential Output A 34 The way in which SMPTE time code gets encoded onto tape It expresses binary T and binary 0 Biphase encoding reverses the signal polarity halfway through a bit to represent a T and leaves the bit polarity unchanged to represent a 0 Short for BInary digiT a number which is either one or zero The blanking interval occurs at the end of a frame Video information is absent during the blanking interval The interval occurs when the CRT electron gun scanner goes from the bottom right corner of the screen to the beginning of the next field in the top left corner Bayonet Nut Coupler Used for the connection of video and high frequency clock signals A group of related binary data or a word which can be rea
278. sition information available in the time code address The number of frames that go by in one second of audio film or video tape Film and different types of video all have different frame rates 30 90 fr s Monochrome TV amp audio A 35 Frequency Generate Generator GEN REF Groups GRP Guard Band HH MM SS FF Initialize INT XTAL Jam Sync Jam Time Code KCU LCD LED Lifter A 36 NTSC 29 97 fr s Color videotape TV operations PAL 25 fr s European TV European Broadcast amp audio Film 24 fr s Film cameras amp projectors The number of wave cycles that occur in a given period of time one second The unit of measurement is the Hertz Hz Running the system time code generator so that time code is available at the rear panel GEN OUT jack A time code generator Each synchronizer has a time code generator This generator receives its speed reference from one of the internal or external sources Generator reference May also be referred to as reference source A group of machines that have a defined positional relationship Machines are placed in group mode for synchronization Machines in a group will operate together as if they were a single transport See Groups A track of multitrack tape adjacent to the sync track such as SMPTE or Control Track which is left unrecorded in order to prevent the time code from bleeding onto the audio program material Hours
279. speed The ACG Card gives a not locked error message if the cumulative system speed change exceeds the ACG output range You can use the Micro Lynx Keyboard Jog Wheel or the and keys to adjust the ratio Used to select the oversample output multiplier or input clock divider Oversample In must be set to off if word clock is used as the input signal Oversample ratios can be set to one of four standard ratios Used to select either the AES EBU or TTL BNC clock input that will be used if the ACG is selected as the system speed reference source in the TCG Option menu The Clock In BNC connector can be used for Word Clock or Oversample Clock Use menu item 7 to select Word Clock or the required Oversample modifier Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Option Cards Digital Audio Clock Generator LEDs Micro Lynx 06 22 00 IN 1600 1920 OUT 1600 1920 IN 1470 1764 OUT 1470 1764 NON STD IN The Digital Audio Clock Generator LEDs located on the Micro Lynx Keyboard Controller indicate the ACG Card status The LEDs directly reflect the parameters that have been set in the ACG options under the Setup menu There are two rows of LEDs the upper row is for ACG inputs and the lower row is for ACG outputs This LED indicates that an ACG input sample rate ratio of either 1600 samples per frame at 30 Hz or 1920 samples per frame at 25 Hz has been set This is a nominal sample rate of 48 000 Ks s This LED should be read in conjunction w
280. stant Table 10 2 shows the actual sample rate ratios generated by the ACG Card Table Chapter 10 3 ACG Card Sample Rate Ratios Kss 30 2997 25 24 44 100 1470 00 1471 47 1764 00 1837 50 44 056 1468 53 1470 00 1762 23 1835 66 32 000 1066 66 1067 73 1280 00 1333 33 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Operation Off Tape Time Code Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Option Cards The ACG Card once installed is active all the time The ACG setup configuration can be adjusted during any Micro Lynx operation without affecting the current operation since the ACG Card processor operates independently from the other Micro Lynx functions The Keyboard ACG LED will light to indicate that the ACG Card is installed Ratios on both ACG Cards can be configured by the operator using the Micro Lynx Setup menus All of the known fixed ratios are supported and the Card will automatically generate the standard pull ups and pull downs For example if you are working with NTSC video at a frame rate of 29 97 the ACG Card can supply either 48 000 or 47 952 samples per second dependent on the application Additionally the number of samples per frame can be set to any non standard ratio to allow for those situations where it is neces sary to run a digital system off speed for it to play back in sync Use the ACG variable ratio in and out to generate double pull up or pull downs if these are required to correct previous transfer errors The ACG Card
281. t PLAY SOLO t gt L t 1 00 00 00 Err 0 00 The generator runs locked to the system reference 6 STOP SOLO t t 1 00 00 00 Err 0 00 The generator stops running Micro Lynx 06 22 00 4 7 Getting Started 7 MACRO 8 OUT The transport s are returned to resolve mode and ready for normal operation To start the generator at a specific time code value 8 1 00 00 00 to 1 03 45 19 1 00 00 00 One hour is entered into the Data Entry register 9 STO STO LED flashes Store reg or mem ts 1 03 45 19 1 00 00 00 The Micro Lynx is ready to store register or memory information 0 TIME t 1 00 00 00 Time 1 00 00 00 One hour is now stored in the Generator Time register 10 gt PLAY 1 00 00 00 Time 1 00 00 00 The generator will generate time code starting at 1 hour locked to the system reference Micro Lynx 4 8 06 22 00 Getting Started Capture and Locate Procedure Micro Lynx 06 22 00 The Micro Lynx can capture and store in memory up to 100 time code numbers These can be retrieved and used as auto locate positions or for other time code operations 1 A SOLO A 1 03 52 17 0 For this example we will Solo a machine Capture and Locate can be done in both Solo and Group mode Capture a value 2 gt PLAY CAPT LED flashes STO LED flashes Play to the time code that you want to capture and save The Micro Lynx has cap
282. t and return to normal operation Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Error Messages Can t do this Must be slave Tran X Capstan Error Tran X No serial communications Tran X Tape Out Tran X Transport in Local Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Troubleshooting Cause You can t capture to the pre post or duration register Solution Repeat the capture sequence and select a different register or memory Cause An operation has been selected that is only relevant to a slave transport There are several operations that can only be performed on slave machines not the reference or master machine For example setting an offset or a source sync point is done on a slave machine Solution Select a slave machine Cause The capstan of the specified transport is not responding to synchronization control Solution Make sure that the transport is set for external control Cause The specified transport is not responding to serial control Solution Make sure that the cable is properly connected to the transport Check that the correct transport type has been selected in the transport setup menu Cause The specified transport is not responding to a Micro Lynx motion command The most common cause of this message is that the tape has spooled off the machine Solution Check that there is a tape threaded on the machine Cause The specified serially controlled transport is switched to local Solution Check that the Remote switch is set to remo
283. t Mfgr Machine Model 02 0 Capstan Mode Wild Resolved 1 Capst Spd Trim 128 to 127 0 2 Lifter Defeat Never Normal Not Stp Play Always 3 Record In Pulse Rec P Rec Play 4 Record Out Pulse Play P Rec Play Pulse Stop P Rec Stop P Play Stop Pulse Opto Special Opto 5 Rehearse In Latch Reh Pulse Reh P Reh Play P Reh Reclog L Reh Reclog Pulse Rec 6 Rehearse Out Unlatch Reh Pulse Play Save as Rec 7 Approach Speed 20 254 8 Bandwidth Limit Off On T Timer 1 Not Locked Threshold NEXT Lock Delay NEXT Park Window The transport option menu parameters operate as follows Capstan Mode Resolved The Micro Lynx controls the speed of the machines capstan It is used when synchronizing Capstan Mode Wild The machine capstan is set to its own internal reference and the Micro Lynx does not control its speed Use it when striping time code or if the tape has no time code Capstan Speed Trim This advanced feature should be used only by an experienced engineer or technician It allows the wild speed of the machine to be adjusted by the operator when a voltage controlled machine does not run at the right speed before synchronizing It also adjusts the wild speed for a tape that was recorded off pitch This adjustment is retained in memory separately for each transport type It is restored when the transport is selected It is NOT erased when CLR TRAN is pressed It is only erased if a complete mem
284. tage in any country Micro Lynx 06 22 00 7 13 Chapter 8 Keyboard Controller DEVICE SELECT SETUP GROUP SELECT a F a E Introduction CALCULATOR a a B ASM DUR CUE TC 5 6 OFST ERR A2 2 3 POST REF ES 9 MOTION Micro Lynx Keyboard STATUS r SYSTEM REF VIDEO LOCK Cot GEN IN 1600 1470 NON jue m J OUT DIGITAL AUDIO CLOCK GENERATOR LAST NEXT ENTR TRIM JOG SHTL JOG WHEEL MIKO37A Figure Chapter 8 1 Front Panel This chapter identifies the eight functional blocks for the Micro Lynx Keyboard The function of each key and indicator is described in detail The functional blocks described are Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Display Jog Shuttle Wheel Group Select Auxiliary Function keys Transport Controls Device Select Calculator Status Indicators 8 1 Keyboard Controller Micro Lynx Keyboard 8 2 Figure Chapter 8 2 Keyboard Key Locator DEVICE SELECT CALCULATOR STATUS SYSTEM 3 OACG OF1 2 ors ORCL OSTO OMACRO OCAPT OREE MIXED OVIDEO oob bO IO CO mee Jigen ga je OSYS
285. tandard 3 4 U matic beta S VHS VHS open reel and digital VTRs With Micro Lynx the video machines are always resolved so they can be run as either Master or Slave If the VTR uses Sony Serial Protocol serial time code can be used as the time code source Considerations Use an external video sync source as a speed reference source for the Micro Lynx and VTR Install the Micro Lynx Video Sync Generator Card VSG if an external sync source is not available Micro Lynx 2 4 06 22 00 Applications Micro Lynx with MIDI MIDI SEQUENCER ATR CONTROL TIME CODE CONTROL TIME CODE TIME CODE GENERATOR POWER SUPPLY MIK005A KEYBOARD CONTROLLER Figure Chapter 2 3 Micro Lynx with MIDI Typical Uses Use whenever MIDI and SMPTE must work together to produce music composition sampled sound effects or layup Micro Lynx has MIDI capabilities allowing a Sequencer or other MIDI device to be synchronized with the transports as Master or Slave Considerations Your MIDI device should have the ability to read and use MTC and or SMPTE Micro Lynx 06 22 00 9 5 Applications Micro Lynx with Third Machine Card Installed ATR ATR DTR CONTROL TIME CODE CONTROL TIME CODE TIME CODE TIME CODE GENERATOR POWER SUPPLY MIKOO6A KEYBOARD CONTROLLER Figure Chapter 2 4 Micro Lynx with Third Machine Card Install
286. tart of the other machine s tapes Because even a small difference will cause locating problems when the machines are put into a group the reference machine s start point time must be subtracted from each machines start point time code to come up with an amount of time to use as an offset Once the reference master and slaves are designated in a group each machine must be soloed and moved to their starting point This can be done fairly roughly right now to just get them close to their starting points Once each transport is set at their start time press to transfer their time code to the calculator display and then 5 OFST to automatically calculate the offset from the reference machine You will still see the original time code numbers in the display for each machine since the Micro Lynx does all the offset calculations internally To fine tune the offsets press the GRP key to regroup the machines and play the group When the machines have locked press the machine A C TCG key that needs to be fine tuned This will change the display to STAT Press TRIM to activate the jog wheel The machine offset register is automatically selected Rotate the jog wheel clockwise or counter clockwise to adjust the offset in one frame steps until the sound or picture or event matches the reference machine If one frame steps are too big then press SUBFR sub frame This changes the jog wheel to 1 100 frame steps as it is tur
287. tation anti static mat On the back of the System Unit remove the cover labeled THIRD MACHINE EXPANSION Remove the six phillips screws securing the top cover to the System Unit Position the System Unit so that the front panel faces you and remove the top cover The M3 Card is mounted on the left side of the System Unit component side up The M3 Card will lie flat in the chassis If you have the ACG Card already installed remove the card from the bracket before installing the M3 Card Slide the M3 Card against the back panel so that the TRANSPORT connector and RDR jack are seated in the appropriate cutouts in the back panel MIKO88A Figure Chapter 10 5 Installation of M3 Card Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 10 11 12 13 14 Option Cards Insert four phillips screws through the M3 Card into the chassis and tighten See Figure 10 5 If the ACG Card was removed reinstall the card Insert the second connector of the Option Card Cable into J1 on the M3 Card and connect the other end of the cable into J3 on the Main Board The unused connectors will lie in the open area in the System Unit unless you have option cards installed Replace the top cover and the six phillips screws Connect the transport cable and reader cables between the Micro Lynx and third transport Power up the System Unit The M3 LED on the System Unit OPTION Section will turn on Press SETUP TRAN
288. tation will run as if it were a tape machine This also holds true for MIDI synthesizers and MIDI mapping systems The Micro Lynx is specifically designed to generate a digital clock speed reference for digital work stations The Audio Clock Generator option cards ACG 1 amp 2 generate locked digital audio clock signals to control the play speed or sample rate of digital equipment Pro Tools is very similar in operation to a video tape machine in that it uses time code for position but when in play releases to an internal or external reference which then controls its speed and position The ACG can be used as the Pro Tools reference If the Micro Lynx is equipped with a VITC Option Card it will update the MIDI time code position for Pro Tools in Jog Shuttle and still modes from VITC stripped on the video tape This allows an accurate method of spotting current VITC frame numbers to Pro Tools for sound effects and post production work The Micro Lynx provides two operating modes for the Pro Tools System First the Pro Tools System may be slaved to the Micro Lynx system reference and Master time code Secondly the Pro Tools System can run as the master transport thereby slaving the machine group in the Micro Lynx Both methods are described here in detail Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Advanced Features System Set Up And Configuration Pro Tools as Slave Micro Lynx 06 22 00 ACG to Pro Tools Audio Interface Connect
289. te Warnings are displayed if an illegal combination of commands is entered access is attempted to a device that doesn t exist or a condition exists that the operator may need to be aware of Prompts are displayed as a reminder when a specific keyboard entry sequence is required System Error Messages Micro Lynx 06 22 00 System error messages are not automatically displayed When an error occurs normal operation can continue provided that communications between each piece of the system have not been completely dropped The SYS key will flash to indicate that a system error has occurred The Micro Lynx can generate and save multiple error messages Each time an error condition occurs such as losing communications between the Micro Lynx Keyboard Controller KBD and System Unit SU an error message is added to the stack The error message stack is a list of errors created by the Micro Lynx program which can be read at any time 5 1 Troubleshooting ACG input lost lock ACG output lost lock Communications error Reference Not Present Reference Src Changed 5 2 Procedure 1 SYS LED flashing When the SYS LED flashes a system error has occurred 2 SYS Comm error The first error message in the error stack or list is displayed Note down the message as you will be asked for this information by the factory should you be unable to correct the problem Communications error is used in this example 3 SYS
290. te and code selection is displayed Setup TCG options Selection System Spd Code 29 29 Hz 30 Go back and select the appropriate code speed SETUP b 1 01 14 05 Err 0 Exits setup mode and returns to the normal operating display Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Getting Started The Micro Lynx generates SMPTE and MIDI time code Two macro keys have been programmed to automate the process of generating and striping time code Pressing MACRO then 9 DUR runs a macro which makes the Micro Lynx ready to generate time code All machines are deselected from the group all transports are set to wild speed and the Micro Lynx is placed into TCG Setup mode Pressing MACRO then 8 OUT runs a macro which exits the time code striping mode and returns the Micro Lynx machine to resolve mode Procedure 1 MACRO 9 DUR Macro 9 automatically sets the Micro Lynx to generate time code It ungroups any group sets all transports to wild speed and leaves the Micro Lynx in TCG setup mode Note To select a reference speed other than the default the group must be ungrouped or the reference must be the master 2 TCGLED on Setup options Selection System Spd Code 29 29 Hz 30 Use the and keys to select the system speed and code type to generate 3 SETUP SETUP LED off The normal operating screen is visible 4 SOLO t t 0 00 00 00 Err 0 00 The current time code generator value is displayed 5 g
291. te at the machine 5 5 Troubleshooting Warnings All groups not locked Edit aborted All groups not locked Q C off Cue point after normal preroll ignored Edit ended early Holding memory unless you press and hold CLR key within 1 second Lamp test Clearing memory Lamp test Holding memory No in point or cue point set Not Available 5 6 Cause All machines within a group have not locked before the In Point in an Edit sequence The system will retry the Edit unless Edit Q C has been set to Stop in the Edit Options menu Solution Establish which transport is not locking and rectify the problem Lengthen the preroll or if it is the master machine try operating in Group Master Slave mode Cause All machines within a group have not locked before the In Point in an Edit sequence The system will continue to roll the edit as Edit Q C has been disabled in the Edit Options menu Solution Establish which transport is not locking and rectify the problem Cause An Edit command has been issued and the Cue Point is after the In Point minus the system preroll Solution Clear or set a new Cue Point Cause An Edit sequence ended before the machines had reached the Out Point This normally is the result of pressing stop or play Cause The Keyboard Controller has been reset by pressing CLR SETUP and confirmed If you press CLR the memory and register contents will be reset to the factory default
292. that is locked to the tape machine speed references and sends it to the digital I O port on the SGI workstation The Micro Lynx Keyboard Controller is the system controller for the external machine and the Mediasound Transport on the SGI workstation When Mediasound is in Chase mode the Micro Lynx Play or Stop buttons operate the external machine and the SGI workstation at the same time X When the Micro Lynx is playing forward at normal play speed Mediasound synchronizes to it and begins to play X When the Micro Lynx stops Mediasound locates to the time displayed in the MIDI Time Code Display MTC in the Group Control Area As a slave the SGI workstation chases the VTR ATR master and always locates to the point that the Micro Lynx MIDI time code stream stops If you rewind the VTR ATR to cue to a particular frame the Mediasound Transport jumps to the point where the VTR ATR stops Micro Lynx Options Necessary for Video Sync Micro Lynx 06 22 00 To properly lock to video two Micro Lynx options are required X ACG Audio Clock Generator The ACG card is a synchronized digital audio sampling clock interface It outputs digital audio sample rate clocks that are synchronized to the system reference The clock card takes video frame information black burst or composite sync and converts it to audio clock signals The AES EBU output of this card is plugged into the digital I O port on the SGI workstation VSG Video Sync
293. the use of SMPTE time code Two multi track tape machines are typically locked together by the Micro Lynx to provide enough audio tracks for instruments and vocals Some productions require more than two interlocked multitracks Console fader automation is also the norm for record mix downs and an absolute necessity for dance mixes In addition many projects also involve virtual tracks Virtual tracks are MIDI synthesizer and drum machine parts that are synchronized to tape and played back live in real time rather than being recorded onto multitrack The Micro Lynx provides the all important SMPTE to MIDI translation MIDI is also the protocol used to automate effects processors such as digital reverbs harmonizers etc These MIDI devices can change programs mid song and even perform real time individual parameter changes mid program Some mixing consoles particu larly those designed for personal use and project studios also have MIDI automated switching or mixing features In short just about every device in the recording studio tape ma chines consoles effects processors and electronic instruments can now be automated using SMPTE and MIDI and the appropriate TimeLine equipment Thus the Electronic Recording studio is created MIDI KEYBOARD SEQUENCER ATR ATR f m m DIG
294. ther see Setup to alter the REH command option The Rehearse command can also be issued automatically as part of the Micro Lynx edit routine The REH key has an associated REH LED In solo mode the REH LED indicates the rehearse status of the soloed machine In group mode the REH LED indicates the rehearse status of all the machines currently assigned to the group If any machine in the group is in rehearse then the REH LED is turned on In solo mode the Record command is issued to the soloed machine if it is record enabled and in lock In group mode the Record command is issued to all machines currently assigned to the group that are record enabled if the group is locked Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller The Record command can be issued manually by pressing the REC key or by pressing the REC and PLAY keys together see Setup to alter the REC command option The Record command can also be issued automatically as part of the Micro Lynx edit routine The REC key has an associated REC LED The Micro Lynx machine interface cables monitor the actual record status of each machine The REC LED is a true record tally When turned on it indicates that the machine is actually in record In solo mode the REC LED indicates the record status of the soloed machine In group mode the REC LED indicates the record status of all the machines currently assigned to the group If any machine in the g
295. time code number LOC for a transport or group or it can be stored into another register CUE SYNCP IN OUT etc The memory register contents cannot be erased individually but they can be written over by using STO MEM To clear all the memory registers requires the clear all memory reset command CLR SETUP then ENTR CLR To quickly change or preset several options or modes at once users can store all the necessary key presses in a Macro register The Macro function is actually recalling the key presses in the order that they are stored in the Macro memory register When a Operational Features 6 16 Macro is recalled the Micro Lynx responds just as if you were actually pressing the keys Note These are not smart Macros They don t know what mode was selected before the first key was pressed nor do they know the settings of the menu options or anything else All they can do is record a series of key presses and then play them back exactly as you pressed them Thus if a Setup option is being changed you must include enough or key presses to ensure the option is set to the top or bottom of the option list before going back to the option choice you want You should also try to always enter and recall Macros from a known mode or state i e in the stop mode with group selected jog and shuttle off setup off etc In this way you will get the desired results since the Macro does not know wher
296. tion with the REC REPLAY and CUE keys Before pressing EDIT use the F1 and F2 macro keys to define the edit in and out points When the Edit command is issued the Micro Lynx cues the machines to a preroll or cue point and puts the machines into play At the edit in point the record or rehearse command is issued The machines continue to roll until the edit out point is reached a REC OUT command is issued to exit record or rehearse The machines run for a postroll period and stop If the LOOP key is selected the machines will recue and repeat the process see Loop and Setup Loop for loop options Press the EDIT key to enter the edit routine Select an edit mode the REC REPLAY and CUE LEDs will flash to prompt selection of one of the edit options The display shows the edit status as it runs An example is presented in the Getting Started chapter REC Initiates a record edit sequence Machines will cue roll and go into record at the edit in point REH Initiates a rehearse edit sequence machines will cue roll and go into rehearse at the edit in point REPLAY Initiates a replay edit sequence machines will cue and roll only CUE Machine will locate to the cue or preroll point and park EDIT Stops or cancels edit mode Micro Lynx 06 22 00 lt lt Rewind gt gt Fast Forward Micro Lynx 06 22 00 B Stop Play Keyboard Controller Edit Sequence 1 Preroll ti
297. to be varied to satisfy production requirements The TimeLine ACG Card provides a solution to this problem by offering both fixed and variable digital audio speed reference generation that is always locked to the system frame rate There are two ACG Card configurations available for the Micro Lynx both of which convert the synchronizer system into a powerful problem solver in the world of digital audio Micro Lynx 06 22 00 1 Features Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Option Cards Applications for the ACG Card include MICRO LYNX SYSTEM UNIT Transferring recording or playing any piece of digital audio synchronously Varispeeding a digital audio workstation or transport Running a workstation at a non standard sample rate Locking two digital transports together at different rates ACG1 amp 2 MICRO LYNX SYSTEM WORD CLOCK GENERATOR WORD CLOCK OVERSAMPLE MULTIPLIER TRANSMITTER INPUT REFERENGE INS AES EBU AES EBU IN RECEIVER MICRO LYNX SYSTEM CLOCK REFERENCE IN DIVIDER ACG 2 OVERSAMPLE INPUT CLOCK IN MIKO64A Figure Chapter 10 6 ACG Block Diagram Generates stable word and oversample clock outputs that are phase locked to the Micro Lynx system reference Clock outputs can be locked to the system reference at a number of fixed Sample Rate Ratios SRR Clock outputs can be varied from the nominal output sample rate varispeed in 01 steps Four select
298. tracks Such things as an accidental punch in on the time code track time code recorded too hot or too low or distorted because the Dolby or DBX was not turned off can all lead to locking problems because the time code cannot be read by the Micro Lynx In some instances the time code may need to be reshaped cleaned up or regenerated The Micro Lynx can do this automatically by using the auxiliary output The output can be selected from any machine s time code To select the reshaping function press SETUP TCG and 5 OFST Use the and keys to select the mode the default is Reshape 1 or machine A This output can also send out pilot tone or GPI 2 beeps Remember the reshape output is an electronically cleaned up of the input signal If the input is not present a drop out for instance then the reshaped output signal will also have the same drop out In this case regeneration is required Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Operational Features Jam Sync Functions Playback Features If the Master time code is discontinuous suddenly changes time code numbers because the tape has been assembled or dubbed from several original master tapes or there are dropouts in the time code it may be necessary to jam new time code so that there is only one series of time code numbers coming off the tape Without this replacement time code the machines will not be able to reliably locate to specific time code points To
299. tudio was to lock two multitrack tape machines together to increase track capacity Today many studios are also using SMPTE time code or its close cousin MIDI Time Code as a method to blend virtual tracking the use of digital audio workstations and MIDI sequencers synthesizers to create playback elements that don t require laying down sounds to an audio tape using traditional multitrack audio tape recording techniques The most common function for time code in the audio only studio is as a method of syncing up two audio tape machines To do this SMPTE or EBU time code must be prestriped onto an edge track typically the highest number track is used i e track 8 16 or 24 of the tape in one continuous pass It is important that the recording level be set following the tape machine manufacturer s recommendations typically 10 VU with all noise reduction defeated in order to reliably read the code off the tape during playback and not have cross track bleeding of the time code a continuous high pitched chirping noise or whine in the background is a sign the time code is bleeding across tracks Because SMPTE EBU time code generates a lot of harmonics due to the square waves that are recorded many users leave a guard track between audio production elements and the time code track If this adjacent track must be used then it is best to record lower frequency instruments like bass or drums onto the track Note that there are mac
300. tured a time code and is ready to store the number Store reg or mem A 1 07 02 20 1 03 52 17 8 MEM MEM LED flashes Store memory 1 03 52 17 Choose a memory location to store the time code number 4 1 SOLO A gt L 1 09 24 04 Mem 1 1 03 52 17 5 CLR 5 gt L 1 10 16 10 Clear the calculator data entry register Retrieve a value stored in a memory location 6 MEM MEM LED flashes Recall memory 0 The Micro Lynx is ready to recall a time code number that is stored in a memory location Getting Started Make a Group Procedure SOLO A gt L 1 11 07 12 Mem 1 1 03 52 17 The value stored in memory 1 is retrieved Locate using the value in the Data Entry register lower right of display as the locate point 8 LOC SOLO A gt Loc 1 03 47 17 Mem 1 1 03 52 17 The transport will locate to 1 03 47 17 the time code number in the Data Entry register memory location 1 minus the Preroll 5 seconds default The Micro Lynx can simultaneously control up to three tape machines the time code and MIDI time code generator When play on the Motion Control keys is pressed all machines in the group will go into play and synchronize When the Micro Lynx first powers up no machines are selected so you must set up your machines Use the GRP and Machine Select keys A C TCG and MIDI to group machines In group mode the display shows the status of the Master mac
301. ue there s Automated Dialog Replacement ADR in which actors re record production dialog in the controlled acoustic environment of a sound studio This replacement dialog is re corded onto audio tape that is locked to a video work print which the actors carefully watch as they read their lines Second is Foley named after the man who invented it the process whereby an abundance of real life sounds i e footsteps coat zippers car door slams etc are recorded by specialized actors called Foley walkers They also make their recording while watching a work print that s synchronized by SMPTE and a TimeLine synchronizer to an audio tape machine that records the sounds they make Micro Lynx 06 22 00 06 22 00 Third are sound effects This is mainly the spectacular stuff explosions rocket blasts gunshots Today most sound effects work as well as some Foley is created using digital audio samplers Samplers are devices that can be locked to SMPTE through MTC or MIDI Then there s that all important audio element music This is supplied by the composer who works to rough cuts preliminary edits of the finished show and ultimately to the finished video master The composer may record real instruments onto audio tape that is locked to picture using SMPTE and Lynx modules or he may work with MIDI instruments that are locked to tape by a Micro Lynx or Lynx System Supervisor Ultim
302. ue meto epa XV LisLot Fables oot ttt eret eR ET xvii Micro Lynx xiv 06 22 00 List of Figures Figure Chapter 1 Figure Chapter 1 Figure Chapter 2 Figure Chapter 2 Figure Chapter 2 Figure Chapter 2 Figure Chapter 2 Figure Chapter 2 Figure Chapter 3 Figure Chapter 3 Figure Chapter 3 Figure Chapter 3 Figure Chapter 7 Figure Chapter 7 Figure Chapter 7 Figure Chapter 7 Figure Chapter 7 Figure Chapter 7 Figure Chapter 7 Figure Chapter 7 Figure Chapter 7 Figure Chapter 7 Figure Chapter 7 Figure Chapter 7 Figure Chapter 8 Figure Chapter 8 Figure Chapter 8 Figure Chapter 8 Figure Chapter 8 Figure Chapter 8 Figure Chapter 8 Figure Chapter 8 Figure Chapter 8 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Table of Contents T Macro Lynx tec e EHE RASEN DeC BERE 1 1 2 System Block 1 2 zT Basic Micro Lynx eee PII 2 3 2 Micro Lynx with a 200422000000000001 1 2 4 o Micro Lynx with MIDI oae beer boe ies Reed vidas 2 5 4 Micro Lynx with Third Machine Card Installed 2 6 5 Micro Lynx with a Digital Audio Workstation ecce 2 7 6 Micro Lynx with the Studio System 2 8 1 Power Supply Connection 2 0 8 2 2 Connect the Transports to the System 116
303. uence of scenes is selected For example the second scene should be the bar room brawl that occurs say between addresses 05 40 59 11 and 05 44 12 22 on one of the raw footage reels In the finished program this scene needs to start exactly six minutes five seconds and nine frames 00 06 05 09 into the show and run to 00 09 18 20 When all the scenes have been sequenced in this manner an Edit Decision List EDL is compiled The EDL is a complete comput erized directory of the location of the scenes in the show along with the addresses locating each scene in the raw footage Later when the project moves to online editing the EDL can be downloaded and the final video master assembled from the origi nal raw footage which has been pristinely sitting aside while the work tapes endured the rigors of offline editing Just like the raw video footage all the audio elements that go into a video production must be assembled This procedure is generally known as audio for video or audio post production There are several different branches of audio post since there are many different types of sound sources that go into a typical video show First there s production audio which is dialog and sounds re corded during shooting Often incidental noises on the set flubbed lines and other uncontrollable aspects of the shoot make the production audio unusable Which brings us to the three main branches of post production audio For dialog
304. uld flash if ExtVid was selected as a system reference and an external feed of video sync was not present This LED indicates that the system has detected mixed time code formats If the LED is on it indicates that mixed and compatible types of time code have been detected For example 30 frame and drop frame code are different and yet compatible The LED will flash if the Micro Lynx time code generator is set to generate a time code type that is incompatible with the incoming reader time codes For example if the generator is set to 25 frame but the machine time code readers are reading 30 frame code The generator will then be automatically switched to the reference time code type The LED will remain flashing if machine A B or C reader time code types are incompatible Time code for A B C TCG and MIDI must all be compatible This LED indicates VSG option card status If the LED is off a VSG card is not installed in the system unit or the VSG is selected to off Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Keyboard Controller If the LED is on the VSG is selected on and is ON for instructions on how to select the VSG card see TCG options item 6 in the Setup menu If the LED is flashing this indicates one of four VSG or system error states 1 The VSG is selected on in the Setup menu but the card is not installed 2 The VSG is selected on and the system reference is set to Ext VID The VSG is selected on and the system frame rate is 24
305. upports the same transports as the two machine Micro Lynx main board machine controller The M3 Card also provides special hardware support for the Sony VO 5800 and the VO 5850 This is the ONLY port that may be used to connect a Sony VO 5850 to the Micro Lynx system Micro Lynx automatically detects the presence of the M3 Card there are no user configuration changes to make Plug in the card and select the transport type that you want to control On power up the Micro Lynx System Unit turns on the M3 LED in the option section of the front panel This LED indicates that the M8 Card is installed and communicating correctly Once the M3 Card is installed and initialized for a transport there are several options that may be customized Many of the default parameters listed below are automatically selected by the transport However by pressing SETUP TRAN then TRAN you may change the settings A description of each item that may be selected follows the table For operating information please refer to the Micro Lynx Operating Manual in particular the Keyboard Controller chapter Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Capstan Mode Capstan Speed Trim Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Reader Mode Lifter Defeat Record In Option Cards Table Chapter 10 1 TRAN Setup Options Machine Select Last Next TransportMfg Jo 2 2 TEL TRAN 2 Lifter Defeat Never Normal Not Stp Play Always 3 Record In Pulse Re
306. ure Appendix A 12 Micro Lynx with a Digital Audio Workstation A 21 xvi Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Table of Contents List of Tables Table Chapter 1 1 Cable Requiremensts eese eene eene nnne eese 1 9 Table Chapter 3 1 Cable 4 0000000000000000000000 01 00 3 4 Table Chapter 2 Cable Check nnne eene nnne a 3 6 Table Chapter 3 3 AUX Connector Pin 2000002 100000 3 8 Table Chapter 3 4 Troubleshooting the System 3 13 Table Chapter 3 5 Troubleshooting the System Unit communications with the Keyboard CO CPOE ac Ere 3 13 Table Chapter 3 6 Troubleshooting the Micro Lynx communications with the machines 3 13 Table Chapter 4 1 TCG Options 2 2 21 000000000000000000000 00000008 4 5 Table Chapter 4 2 Micro Lynx Setup 4 24 Table Chapter 4 3 Micro Lynx Setup Selections 4 25 Table Chapter 7 1 Transport Connector Pin Description 00 20000000 7 4 Table Chapter 7 2 RDR 1 Time Code Connector Pin 7 5 Table Chapter 7 3 RDR 2 Time Code Connector Pin
307. ure has been recorded It must be recorded with the video signal when the original tape is generated Each picture has 525 lines 625 for PAL To facilitate picture clarity the lines are divided into two interlaced odd and even fields This means that 262 even lines are scanned then the scan ner returns to the beginning of the picture and scans the 263 odd lines As the lines are scanned a number of lines at the top and bottom of the picture are never displayed they are blank space These lines are available to store information VITC is recorded on two of these spare lines at the top of each field One complete VITC data word is recorded on each line VITC uses a 90 bit data word instead of the 80 bit data word used by LTC The extra bits are used to provide error correction and to prevent bad time code values from being read VITC allows accu rate reading of tape position even when the tape is stopped in freeze frame which is something that LTC can t do VITC is often used in conjunction with LTC in applications that involve both audio and video VITC TIME CODE 1F Be1 1or Bae 15 10s BG4 1M BGs toM BGe 1 BG7 10H BG8 CRC l ONE HORIZONTAL PICTURE LINE AUDIO TRACK 2 AUDIO TRACK 1 P lt END OF FRAME VIDEO INFORMATION CONTROL TRACK ADDRES
308. used Example To describe a time code format as 30 NDF is to say that the frame rate is 30 fps and the code type is non drop frame Simply saying either 30 or drop frame defines only part of the SMPTE time code A special signal generator designed to generate and transmit SMPTE time code at one of the international formats and rates A counter designed to read and display SMPTE time code The word type is the key to understanding this phrase Type defines the counting method that is employed by the time code module There are two SMPTE types 30 also called non drop ND or non drop frame NDF and drop frame DF EBU and film types are the same as their respective speeds 25 and 24 To toggle is to consecutively press a key several times in order to step through a series of choices A place for the storage of audio information Analog tape recorders have one or more physical tape tracks MIDI sequencers and digital audio workstations provide areas of memory to store Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Track Select Transport TRS Type UB User Bit Value Video Sync Virtual Tracks VITC VSO VTR Wideband Word Clock Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Appendix control or audio data The process of enabling arming specific tape machine tracks for recording Transport refers to a part or subassembly of a machine i e a transport connector or a transport cable Tip Ring Sleeve A 1 4 balanced termination p
309. usly entered is immediately available However the first time the Micro Lynx is turned on the transports being used must be selected The Installation chapter provides instructions to select the transport types For subsequent power ons the last transport setup will be displayed Always verify that the transport is correctly selected The following is an abbreviated turn on procedure Procedure On the Tape Machine 1 EXT Place a reel of time coded tape on the machine s Set the Tape Machine to external speed some tape machines will automatically be set to external by the Micro Lynx Micro Lynx 06 22 00 4 1 Getting Started On the System Unit 2 POWER POWER LED turns on SYSTEM DATA LED on SYSTEM VALID LED on KEYBOARD SIGNAL LED on KEYBOARD VALID LED on Turning on the System Unit power System internal communications are operational Keyboard communications are operational On the Keyboard Controller 3 Lamp test Holding memory MOTION CONTROL LEDs are sequentially tested Micro Lynx Keyboard Control Unit Version x xxx The software revision number is displayed Tran A AUTO Serial TRANSPORT Tran B AUTO Serial TRANSPORT Displays the transport types selected for each machine If the incorrect transports are displayed use the initialization procedure in the Installation chapter to select the correct transport type If this is the first time that the Micro Lynx has been turned on or the Keyboard
310. values 8 8 8 50 Record enabling a track sess 8 36 Setting and clearing sync 8 44 Setting system timing parameters 4 5 Storing a value to a register 6 15 8 51 8 53 Storing values in memory sse 4 9 Trimming subframe information 8 57 Turn on power 4 1 Video transport assemble ss 8 49 Working with 2 2 2222 4 7 8 52 Working with offsets 4 13 4 16 8 45 Prompts E nae 5 9 Prompts 8 10 Punch 6 13 Punc NOUT deter Ets 6 13 R REL Ry ssi auth ative isn ei a 8 8 8 50 Key iion ep ees 8 18 8 35 Key eatur Seis 8 12 8 14 8 18 ios epp Ee 8 15 8 29 Record Enable AT tracks edere ette ehe 8 42 Al Track s Rene eene 8 42 AS track 8 43 AA track iiis eene pun uu 8 44 8 36 track 8 46 Multitrack machines 2444222221 8 36 Resetting ii RR eae UE 4 21 Tame Code track rette 8 47 Video 8 36 Record Options en geo RERO RUD 8 18 Record Ready sese 6 13 Rec
311. y of Motion Picture and Television Engineers chose SMPTE to be the industry standard for synchronization It became officially known as SMPTE EBU Time Code when the society was joined by its overseas counterpart the European Broadcast Union EBU Since it is quite a mouthful most people just say SMPTE What Can You Do with SMPTE Micro Lynx 06 22 00 There are hundreds of uses for SMPTE time code in every branch of audio production They include records video film advertising and industrials Let s start with the how and why of some of the most basic applications Synchronizing Multiple Audio Machines Imagine you are a recording engineer You ve just used up all the available tracks on your multitrack machine but your project is nowhere near completion How are you going to get some extra tracks Use a second multitrack recorder The question is how do you lock the two machines so that the music plays back in perfect synchronization first time every time You could try to hit the Play buttons on both machines at exactly the same moment and then cross your fingers but the odds of this working even once are very slim The correct solution is to use SMPTE time code AND a TimeLine synchronizing system It works like this a TimeLine Lynx or Micro Lynx generates time code that is recorded onto the audio tapes The time code is then used as a common reference point the glue that holds the two machines i
312. ynx is a comprehensive two machine synchronizer which may be optionally expanded to three machines The full feature Keyboard Controller provides the interface for SMPTE and MIDI time codegeneration transport synchronizer operations track enable automated edit and events control The Micro Lynx system has two main components and four option cards Micro Lynx 06 22 00 1 1 Introduction System Components Micro Lynx Keyboard Controller KBD Micro Lynx System Unit SU Options M3 Machine Expansion Card to add a third transport Synchronized digital audio sampling clock interface The clock card outputs digital audio sample rate clocks that are synchronized to the system reference VSG Video Sync Generator for NTSC or PAL composite sync generation VITC Reader Card MICRO LYNX KEYBOARD DISPLAY COMMUNICATIONS LED STATUS SWITCHES CALCULATOR MEMORIES MACHINE SELECT MACROS MOTION JOG CONTROL SHUTTLE Figure Chapter 1 2 System Block Diagram MICRO LYNX SYSTEM UNIT MAC PORT RS232 422 KBD PORT MACHINE MACHINE CONTROL 2 MIDI RX SYNC GEN VIDEO CONTROL 1 Micro Lynx 06 22 00 Introduction System Configuration Keyboard Controller System Unit Micro Lynx 06 22 00 The smaller recording studio requires an int
313. ys the transport types selected for each machine If the incorrect transports are displayed use steps 8 13 to select the correct transport Tran C AUTO Serial TRANSPORT Ref IntFix Card not installed Displays currently selected system reference Hold the GRP key and add groups in order of priority Display message 3 9 Installation 3 10 F1 LED on F2 LED on F3 LED on REF LOCK LED on GRP LED flashing A LED flashing B LED flashing TCG LED flashing MIDI LED flashing The Keyboard LEDs light The C LED will flash if the M3 card has been installed When TCG is selected MIDI is automatically selected SETUP SETUP LED flashing REF LOCK LED on SYS LED on LAST LED on NEXT LED on 4 LED on LED on You are now in setup mode The LEDs that allow you to move through the menus turn on Setup System options Selection LED Brightness 100 Display Message TRAN TRAN LED on A LED on The first transport A Transport 1 must be identified by manufacturer and machine type Setup AUTO Serial TRANSPORT Tran The default transport selection is displayed You have entered the transport select mode NEXT Setup AMPEX ATR 100 Tran Using the NEXT or LAST key select the manufacturer of the machine connected to the A Transport 1 port For this example select Ampex Note The default transport selection AUTO Serial TRANSPORT will automatically detect the presence of most

Micro Lynx - (NI Broadcast Ltd)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents